H8/532 Hardware Manual
Preface
The H8/532 is a high-performance single-chip Hitachi-original microcomputer, featuring a highspeed CPU with 16-bit internal data paths and a full complement of on-chip supporting modules.
The H8/532 is an ideal microcontroller for a wide variety of medium-scale devices, including both
office and industrial equipment and consumer products.
Its highly orthogonal instruction set is designed for fast execution of programs coded in the highlevel C language.
On-chip facilities include large RAM and ROM memories, numerous timers, serial I/O, an A/D
converter, I/O ports, and other functions for compact implementation of high-performance
application systems.
The H8/532 is available in both a ZTAT version* with on-chip PROM, ideal for the early stages
of production or for products with frequently-changing specifications, and a masked-ROM version
suitable for volume production.
This manual gives a hardware description of the H8/532. For details of the instruction set, refer to
the H8/500 Series Programming Manual, which applies to all chips in the H8/500 Series.
* ZTAT (Zero Turn-Around Time) is a registered trademark of Hitachi, Ltd.
Contents
Section 1 Overview
1.1
1.2
1.3
Features ··································································································································1
Block Diagram ·······················································································································4
Pin Arrangements and Functions ···························································································5
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement ·········································································································5
1.3.2 Pin Functions ··············································································································8
Section 2 MCU Operating Modes and Address Space
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Overview ······························································································································23
Mode Descriptions ···············································································································24
Address Space Map ··············································································································25
2.3.1 Page Segmentation ····································································································25
2.3.2 Page 0 Address Allocations ······················································································27
Mode Control Register (MDCR) ·························································································29
Section 3 CPU
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Overview ······························································································································31
3.1.1 Features ·····················································································································31
3.1.2 Address Space ···········································································································32
3.1.3 Register Configuration ······························································································33
CPU Register Descriptions ··································································································34
3.2.1 General Registers ······································································································34
3.2.2 Control Registers ······································································································35
3.2.3 Initial Register Values ·······························································································40
Data Formats ························································································································41
3.3.1 Data Formats in General Registers ···········································································41
3.3.2 Data Formats in Memory ··························································································42
Instructions ···························································································································44
3.4.1 Basic Instruction Formats ·························································································44
3.4.2 Addressing Modes ····································································································45
3.4.3 Effective Address Calculation ···················································································47
Instruction Set ······················································································································50
3.5.1 Overview ···················································································································50
3.5.2 Data Transfer Instructions ·························································································52
3.5.3 Arithmetic Instructions ·····························································································53
3.5.4 Logic Operations ·······································································································54
3.5.5 Shift Operations ········································································································55
3.5.6 Bit Manipulations ······································································································56
3.5.7 Branching Instructions ······························································································57
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.5.8 System Control Instructions ······················································································59
3.5.9 Short-Format Instructions ·························································································62
Operating Modes ··················································································································62
3.6.1 Minimum Mode ········································································································62
3.6.2 Maximum Mode ········································································································63
Basic Operational Timing ····································································································63
3.7.1 Overview ···················································································································63
3.7.2 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle ···············································································64
3.7.3 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access ·····························································65
3.7.4 Register Field Access Cycle (Addresses H'FF80 to H'FFFF) ···································66
3.7.5 Pin States during Register Field Access (Addresses H'FF80 to H'FFFF) ·················67
3.7.6 External Access Cycle ·······························································································68
CPU States ···························································································································69
3.8.1 Overview ···················································································································69
3.8.2 Program Execution State ···························································································71
3.8.3 Exception-Handling State ·························································································71
3.8.4 Bus-Released State ····································································································72
3.8.5 Reset State ·················································································································77
3.8.6 Power-Down State ····································································································77
Programming Notes ·············································································································78
3.9.1 Restriction on Address Location ···············································································78
3.9.2 Note on MULXU Instruction·····················································································79
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
Overview ······························································································································81
4.1.1 Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority ······················································81
4.1.2 Hardware Exception-Handling Sequence ·································································82
4.1.3 Exception Factors and Vector Table ··········································································82
Reset ····································································································································85
4.2.1 Overview ···················································································································85
4.2.2 Reset Sequence ·········································································································85
4.2.3 Stack Pointer Initialization ························································································86
Address Error ·······················································································································89
4.3.1 Illegal Instruction Prefetch ························································································89
4.3.2 Word Data Access at Odd Address ···········································································89
4.3.3 Off-Chip Address Access in Single-Chip Mode ·······················································89
Trace ····································································································································90
Interrupts ······························································································································90
Invalid Instruction ················································································································92
Trap Instructions and Zero Divide ·······················································································92
Cases in Which Exception Handling is Deferred ·································································92
4.8.1 Instructions that Disable Interrupts ···········································································92
4.8.2 Disabling of Exceptions Immediately after a Reset ··················································93
4.8.3 Disabling of Interrupts after a Data Transfer Cycle ··················································93
4.9 Stack Status after Completion of Exception Handling ························································94
4.9.1 PC Value Pushed on Stack for Trace,
Interrupts, Trap Instructions, and Zero Divide Exceptions ·······································96
4.9.2 PC Value Pushed on Stack for Address Error and Invalid
Instruction Exceptions ······························································································96
4.10 Notes on Use of the Stack ····································································································96
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Overview ······························································································································97
5.1.1 Features ·····················································································································97
5.1.2 Block Diagram ··········································································································98
5.1.3 Register Configuration ······························································································99
Interrupt Types ·····················································································································99
5.2.1 External Interrupts ····································································································99
5.2.2 Internal Interrupts ····································································································101
5.2.3 Interrupt Vector Table ·····························································································101
Register Descriptions ·········································································································103
5.3.1 Interrupt Priority Registers A to D (IPRA to IPRD) ···············································103
5.3.2 Timing of Priority Setting ·······················································································104
Interrupt Handling Sequence ·····························································································104
5.4.1 Interrupt Handling Flow ··························································································104
5.4.2 Stack Status after Interrupt Handling Sequence ·····················································107
5.4.3 Timing of Interrupt Exception-Handling Sequence ················································108
Interrupts During Operation of the Data Transfer Controller ············································108
Interrupt Response Time ····································································································111
Section 6 Data Transfer Controller
6.1
6.2
6.3
Overview ····························································································································113
6.1.1 Features ···················································································································113
6.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································113
6.1.3 Register Configuration ····························································································114
Register Descriptions ·········································································································115
6.2.1 Data Transfer Mode Register (DTMR) ···································································115
6.2.2 Data Transfer Source Address Register (DTSR) ····················································116
6.2.3 Data Transfer Destination Register (DTDR) ·························································116
6.2.4 Data Transfer Count Register (DTCR) ···································································116
6.2.5 Data Transfer Enable Registers A to D (DTEA to DTED) ·····································117
Data Transfer Operation ·····································································································118
6.4
6.5
6.3.1 Data Transfer Cycle ································································································118
6.3.2 DTC Vector Table ···································································································120
6.3.3 Location of Register Information in Memory ·························································122
6.3.4 Length of Data Transfer Cycle ················································································122
Procedure for Using the DTC ····························································································124
Example ·····························································································································125
Section 7 Wait-State Controller
7.1
7.2
7.3
Overview ····························································································································127
7.1.1 Features ···················································································································127
7.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································128
7.1.3 Register Configuration ····························································································128
Wait-State Control Register ·······························································································129
Operation in Each Wait Mode ····························································································130
7.3.1 Programmable Wait Mode ······················································································130
7.3.2 Pin Wait Mode ········································································································131
7.3.3 Pin Auto-Wait Mode ·······························································································133
Section 8 Clock Pulse Generator
8.1
8.2
8.3
Overview ····························································································································135
8.1.1 Block Diagram ········································································································135
Oscillator Circuit ················································································································135
System Clock Divider ········································································································138
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
Overview ····························································································································139
Port 1 ··································································································································142
9.2.1 Overview ·················································································································142
9.2.2 Port 1 Registers ·······································································································142
9.2.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ···················································································145
Port 2 ··································································································································148
9.3.1 Overview ·················································································································148
9.3.2 Port 2 Registers ·······································································································149
9.3.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ···················································································150
Port 3 ··································································································································151
9.4.1 Overview ·················································································································151
9.4.2 Port 3 Registers ·······································································································152
9.4.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ···················································································153
Port 4 ··································································································································154
9.5.1 Overview ·················································································································154
9.5.2 Port 4 Registers ·······································································································155
9.5.3
Port 5
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
9.6.4
9.7 Port 6
9.7.1
9.7.2
9.7.3
9.7.4
9.8 Port 7
9.8.1
9.8.2
9.8.3
9.9 Port 8
9.9.1
9.9.2
9.10 Port 9
9.10.1
9.10.2
9.10.3
9.6
Pin Functions in Each Mode ···················································································156
··································································································································157
Overview ·················································································································157
Port 5 Registers ·······································································································158
Pin Functions in Each Mode ···················································································159
Built-in MOS Pull-Up ·····························································································161
··································································································································163
Overview ·················································································································163
Port 6 Registers ·······································································································164
Pin Functions in Each Mode ···················································································165
Built-in MOS Pull-Up ·····························································································167
··································································································································167
Overview ·················································································································167
Port 7 Registers ·······································································································168
Pin Functions ··········································································································169
··································································································································172
Overview ·················································································································172
Port 8 Registers ·······································································································172
··································································································································173
Overview ·················································································································173
Port 9 Registers ·······································································································173
Pin Functions ··········································································································174
Section 10 16-Bit Free-Running Timers
10.1 Overview ····························································································································177
10.1.1 Features ···················································································································177
10.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································178
10.1.3 Input and Output Pins ·····························································································179
10.1.4 Register Configuration ····························································································180
10.2 Register Descriptions ·········································································································181
10.2.1 Free-Running Counter (FRC) - H'FF92, H'FFA2, H'FFB2 ····································181
10.2.2 Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA and OCRB) - H'FF94
and H'FF96, H'FFA4 and H'FFA6, H'FFB4 and H'FFB6 ·······································182
10.2.3 Input Capture Register (ICR) - H'FF98, H'FFA8, H'FFB8 ·····································182
10.2.4 Timer Control Register (TCR) ················································································183
10.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ···································································185
10.3 CPU Interface ·····················································································································188
10.4 Operation ····························································································································190
10.4.1 FRC Incrementation Timing ···················································································190
10.4.2 Output Compare Timing ·························································································191
10.4.3 Input Capture Timing ······························································································193
10.4.4 Setting of FRC Overflow Flag (OVF) ·····································································195
10.5 CPU Interrupts and DTC Interrupts ···················································································195
10.6 Synchronization of Free-Running Timers 1 to 3 ································································196
10.6.1 Synchronization after a Reset ·················································································196
10.6.2 Synchronization by Writing to FRCs ······································································196
10.7 Sample Application ············································································································200
10.8 Application Notes ··············································································································200
Section 11 8-Bit Timer
11.1 Overview ····························································································································207
11.1.1 Features ···················································································································207
11.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································208
11.1.3 Input and Output Pins ·····························································································209
11.1.4 Register Configuration ····························································································209
11.2 Register Descriptions ·········································································································209
11.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT) - H'FFD4 ···········································································209
11.2.2 Time Constant Registers A and B
(TCORA and TCORB) - H'FFD2 and H'FFD3 ······················································210
11.2.3 Timer Control Register (TCR) - H'FFD0 ································································210
11.2.4 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ···································································212
11.3 Operation ····························································································································214
11.3.1 TCNT Incrementation Timing ················································································214
11.3.2 Compare Match Timing ··························································································215
11.3.3 External Reset of TCNT ·························································································217
11.3.4 Setting of TCNT Overflow Flag ·············································································218
11.4 CPU Interrupts and DTC Interrupts ···················································································218
11.5 Sample Application ············································································································219
11.6 Application Notes ··············································································································220
Section 12 PWM Timer
12.1 Overview ····························································································································227
12.1.1 Features ···················································································································227
12.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································227
12.1.3 Input and Output Pins ·····························································································228
12.1.4 Register Configuration ····························································································229
12.2 Register Descriptions ·········································································································229
12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT) - H'FFC2, H'FFC4, H'FFCA ············································229
12.2.2 Duty Register (DTR) - H'FFC1, H'FFC5, H'FFC9 ·················································230
12.2.3 Timer Control Register (TCR) - H'FFC0, H'FFC4, H'FFC8 ··································230
12.3 Operation ····························································································································232
12.4 Application Notes ··············································································································234
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
13.1 Overview ····························································································································235
13.1.1 Features ···················································································································235
13.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································236
13.1.3 Register Configuration ····························································································236
13.2 Register Descriptions ·········································································································237
13.2.1 Timer Counter TCNT - H'FFED ·············································································237
13.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) - H'FFEC (Read), H'FFED (Write) ··········237
13.2.3 Notes on Register Access ························································································239
13.3 Operation ····························································································································240
13.3.1 Watchdog Timer Mode ···························································································240
13.3.2 Interval Timer Mode ·······························································································241
13.3.3 Operation in Software Standby Mode ·····································································242
13.3.4 Setting of Overflow Flag ·························································································243
13.4 Application Notes ··············································································································243
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface
14.1 Overview ····························································································································245
14.1.1 Features ···················································································································245
14.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································246
14.1.3 Input and Output Pins ·····························································································247
14.1.4 Register Configuration ····························································································247
14.2 Register Descriptions ·········································································································247
14.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) ··················································································247
14.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) - H'FFDD ································································248
14.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) ················································································248
14.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR) - H'FFDB ·······························································248
14.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) - H'FFD8 ··································································249
14.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) - H'FFDA ·······························································251
14.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) - H'FFDC ··································································253
14.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) - H'FFD9 ·········································································255
14.3 Operation ····························································································································259
14.3.1 Overview ·················································································································259
14.3.2 Asynchronous Mode ·······························································································260
14.3.3 Synchronous Mode ·································································································264
14.4 CPU Interrupts and DTC Interrupts ···················································································268
14.5 Application Notes ··············································································································269
Section 15 A/D Converter
15.1 Overview ····························································································································273
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.1.1 Features ···················································································································273
15.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································274
15.1.3 Input Pins ················································································································275
15.1.4 Register Configuration ····························································································275
Register Descriptions ·········································································································276
15.2.1 A/D Data Registers (ADDR) - H'FFE0 to H'FFE7 ·················································276
15.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) - H'FFE8 ··················································277
CPU Interface ·····················································································································279
Operation ····························································································································280
15.4.1 Single Mode ············································································································281
15.4.2 Scan Mode ··············································································································284
Input Sampling Time and A/D Conversion Time ·······························································287
Interrupts and the Data Transfer Controller ·······································································289
Section 16 RAM
16.1 Overview ····························································································································291
16.1.1 Block Diagram ········································································································291
16.1.2 Register Configuration ····························································································292
16.2 RAM Control Register (RAMCR) ·····················································································292
16.3 Operation ····························································································································292
16.3.1 Expanded Modes (Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4) ································································292
16.3.2 Single-Chip Mode (Mode 7) ···················································································293
Section 17 ROM
17.1 Overview ····························································································································295
17.1.1 Block Diagram ········································································································295
17.2 PROM Modes ·····················································································································296
17.2.1 PROM Mode Setup ·································································································296
17.2.2 Socket Adapter Pin Arrangements and Memory Map ············································297
17.3 Programming ······················································································································299
17.3.1 Writing and Verifying ·····························································································299
17.3.2 Notes on Writing ·····································································································302
17.3.3 Reliability of Written Data ······················································································303
17.3.4 Erasing of Data ·······································································································304
17.4 Handling of Windowed Packages ······················································································304
Section 18 Power-Down State
18.1 Overview ····························································································································307
18.2 Sleep Mode ························································································································308
18.2.1 Transition to Sleep Mode ························································································308
18.2.2 Exit from Sleep Mode ·····························································································308
18.3 Software Standby Mode ·····································································································308
18.3.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode ····································································308
18.3.2 Software Standby Control Register (SBYCR) ························································309
18.3.3 Exit from Software Standby Mode ·········································································310
18.3.4 Sample Application of Software Standby Mode ····················································310
18.3.5 Application Notes ···································································································311
18.4 Hardware Standby Mode ····································································································312
18.4.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode ···································································312
18.4.2 Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode ·······························································312
18.4.3 Timing Sequence of Hardware Standby Mode ·······················································313
Section 19 E Clock Interface
19.1 Overview ····························································································································315
Section 20 Electrical Specifications
20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ······························································································319
20.2 Electrical Characteristics ····································································································319
20.2.1 DC Characteristics ··································································································319
20.2.2 AC Characteristics ··································································································322
20.2.3 A/D Converter Characteristics ················································································326
20.3 MCU Operatinal Timing ····································································································326
20.3.1 Bus Timing ··············································································································327
20.3.2 Control Signal Timing ····························································································330
20.3.3 Clock Timing ··········································································································331
20.3.4 I/O Port Timing ·······································································································333
20.3.5 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Timing ········································································334
20.3.6 8-Bit Timer Timing ·································································································335
20.3.7 Pulse Width Modulation Timer Timing ··································································336
20.3.8 Serial Communication Interface Timing ·································································336
Appendix A Instructions
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
Instruction Set ····················································································································337
Instruction Codes ···············································································································342
Operation Code Map ··········································································································353
Instruction Execution Cycles ·····························································································358
A.4.1 Calculation of Instruction Execution States ····························································358
A.4.2 Tables of Instruction Execution Cycles ··································································359
Appendix B Register Field
B.1
B.2
Register Addresses and Bit Names ····················································································367
Register Descriptions ·········································································································372
Appendix C I/O Port Schematic Diagrams
C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.5
C.6
C.7
C.8
C.9
Schematic Diagram of Port 1
Schematic Diagram of Port 2
Schematic Diagram of Port 3
Schematic Diagram of Port 4
Schematic Diagram of Port 5
Schematic Diagram of Port 6
Schematic Diagram of Port 7
Schematic Diagram of Port 8
Schematic Diagram of Port 9
·····························································································407
·····························································································413
·····························································································414
·····························································································415
·····························································································416
·····························································································417
·····························································································418
·····························································································423
·····························································································424
Appendix D Memory Map ·································································································429
Appendix E Pin State
E.1
E.2
Port State of Each Pin State ·······························································································431
Pin Stattus in the Reset State ······························································································434
Appendix F Timing of Entry to and Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode ········449
Appendix G Package Dimensions ····················································································451
Figures
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
2-1
2-2
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10 (a)
3-10 (b)
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
5-1
5-2
5-3 (a)
5-3 (b)
5-4
5-5
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
7-1
Block Diagram ···················································································································4
Pin Arrangement (CP-84, Top View) ·················································································5
Pin Arrangement (CG-84, Top View) ················································································6
Pin Arrangement (FP-80A, Top View) ··············································································7
Address Space in Each Mode ··························································································26
Map of Page 0 ··················································································································28
CPU Operating Modes ·····································································································32
Registers in the CPU ········································································································33
Stack Pointer ····················································································································34
Combinations of Page Registers with Other Registers ····················································38
Short Absolute Addressing Mode and Base Register ······················································39
On-Chip Memory Access Timing ····················································································64
Pin States during Access to On-Chip Memory ································································65
Register Field Access Timing ··························································································66
Pin States during Register Field Access ··········································································67
External Access Cycle (Read Access) ·············································································68
External Access Cycle (Write Access) ············································································69
Operating States ···············································································································70
State Transitions ··············································································································71
Bus-Right Release Cycle (During On-chip Memory Access Cycle) ·······························73
Bus-Right Release Cycle (During External Access Cycle) ·············································74
Bus-Right Release Cycle (During Internal CPU Operation) ···········································75
Types of Factors Causing Exception Handling ································································83
Reset Vector ·····················································································································86
Reset Sequence (Minimum Mode, On-Chip Memory) ···················································87
Reset Sequence (Maximum Mode, External Memory) ···················································88
Interrupt Sources (and Number of Interrupt Types) ························································91
Interrupt Controller Block Diagram ················································································98
Interrupt Handling Flowchart ························································································106
Stack before and after Interrupt Exception-Handling (Minimum Mode) ······················107
Stack before and after Interrupt Exception-Handling (Maximum Mode) ·····················108
Interrupt Sequence (Minimum Mode, On-Chip Memory) ············································109
Interrupt Sequence (Maximum Mode, External Memory) ············································110
Block Diagram of Data Transfer Controller ··································································114
Flowchart of Data Transfer Cycle ··················································································119
DTC Vector Table ··········································································································120
DTC Vector Table Entry ································································································121
Order of Register Information ·······················································································122
Use of DTC to Receive Data via Serial Communication Interface ·······························126
Block Diagram of Wait-State Controller ·······································································128
7-2
7-3
7-4
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-17
9-18
9-19
9-20
9-21
10-1
10-2 (a)
10-2 (b)
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-10
Programmable Wait Mode ·····························································································131
Pin Wait Mode ···············································································································132
Pin Auto-Wait Mode ······································································································133
Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator ·····································································135
Connection of Crystal Oscillator (Example) ·································································136
Crystal Oscillator Equivalent Circuit ·············································································136
Notes on Board Design around External Crystal ···························································137
External Clock Input (Example) ····················································································137
Phase Relationship of ø Clock and E clock ···································································138
Pin Functions of Port 1 ··································································································142
Pin Functions of Port 2 ··································································································148
Port 2 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes ······································································150
Port 2 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode ····································································151
Pin Functions of Port 3 ··································································································151
Port 3 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes ······································································153
Port 3 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode ····································································154
Pin Functions of Port 4 ··································································································154
Port 4 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes ······································································156
Port 4 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode ····································································157
Pin Functions of Port 5 ··································································································157
Port 5 Pin Functions in Modes 1 and 3 ··········································································159
Port 5 Pin Functions in Modes 2 and 4 ··········································································160
Port 5 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode ····································································160
Pin Functions of Port 6 ··································································································164
Port 6 Pin Functions in Mode 3 ·····················································································166
Port 6 Pin Functions in Mode 4 ·····················································································166
Port 6 Pin Functions in Modes 7, 2, and 1 ·····································································167
Pin Functions of Port 7 ··································································································168
Pin Functions of Port 8 ··································································································172
Pin Functions of Port 9 ··································································································173
Block Diagram of 16-Bit Free-Running Timer ·····························································178
Write Access to FRC (When CPU Writes H'AA55) ·····················································189
Read Access to FRC (When FRC Contains H'AA55) ···················································190
Increment Timing for External Clock Input ··································································191
Setting of Output Compare Flags ··················································································192
Timing of Output Compare A ························································································192
Clearing of FRC by Compare-Match A ·········································································193
Input Capture Timing (Usual Case) ···············································································193
Input Capture Timing (1-State Delay) ···········································································194
Setting of Input Capture Flag ························································································194
Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) ····················································································195
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
11-10
11-11
12-1
12-2
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5
15-1
15-2
15-3
15-4
15-5
16-1
17-1
17-2
17-3
17-4
17-5
17-6
18-1
Square-Wave Output (Example) ····················································································200
FRC Write-Clear Contention ·························································································201
FRC Write-Increment Contention ·················································································202
Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match ··················································203
Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer ·······················································································208
Count Timing for External Clock Input ·········································································215
Setting of Compare-Match Flags ···················································································216
Timing of Timer Output ·································································································216
Timing of Compare-Match Clear ··················································································217
Timing of External Reset ·······························································································217
Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) ····················································································218
Example of Pulse Output ·······························································································219
TCNT Write-Clear Contention ······················································································220
TCNT Write-Increment Contention ··············································································221
Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match ···············································222
Block Diagram of PWM Timer ·····················································································228
PWM Timing ·················································································································233
Block Diagram of Timer Counter ··················································································236
Writing to TCNT and TCSR ··························································································239
Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode ·············································································241
Operation in Interval Timer Mode ·················································································242
Setting of OVF Bit ·········································································································243
TCNT Write-Increment Contention ··············································································244
Block Diagram of Serial Communication Interface ······················································246
Data Format in Asynchronous Mode ·············································································260
Phase Relationship between Clock Output and Transmit Data ·····································261
Data Format in Synchronous Mode ···············································································265
Sampling Timing (Asynchronous Mode) ······································································271
Block Diagram of A/D Converter ··················································································274
Read Access to A/D Data Register (When Register Contains H'AA40) ·······················280
A/D Operation in Single Mode (When Channel 1 is Selected) ·····································283
A/D Operation in Scan Mode (When Channels 0 to 2 are Selected) ·····························286
A/D Conversion Timing ·································································································288
Block Diagram of On-Chip RAM ·················································································291
Block Diagram of On-Chip ROM ·················································································296
Socket Adapter Pin Arrangements ·················································································298
Memory Map in PROM Mode ·······················································································299
High-Speed Programming Flowchart ············································································300
PROM Write/Verify Timing ··························································································302
Recommended Screening Procedure ·············································································303
NMI Timing of Software Standby Mode (Application Example) ·································311
18-2
19-1
19-2
20-1
20-2
20-3
20-4
20-5
20-6
20-7
20-8
20-9
20-10
20-11
20-12
20-13
20-14
20-15
20-16
20-17
20-18
20-19
20-20
20-21
C-1 (a)
C-1 (b)
C-1 (c)
C-1 (d)
C-1 (e)
C-1 (f)
C-1 (g)
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-6
C-7 (a)
C-7 (b)
C-7 (c)
Hardware Standby Sequence ·························································································313
Execution Cycle of Instruction Synchronized with E Clock in Expanded Modes
(Maximum Synchronization Delay) ··············································································316
Execution Cycle of Instruction Synchronized with E Clock in Expanded Modes
(Minimum Synchronization Delay) ···············································································317
Example of Circuit for Driving a Darlington Transistor Pair ········································322
Example of Circuit for Driving an LED ········································································322
Output Load Circuit ·······································································································325
Basic Bus Cycle (without Wait States) in Expanded Modes ·········································327
Basic Bus Cycle (with 1 Wait State) in Expanded Modes ·············································328
Bus Cycle Synchronized with E Clock ··········································································329
Reset Input Timing ········································································································ 330
Interrupt Input Timing ···································································································330
NMI Pulse Width (for Recovery from Software Standby Mode) ··································330
Bus Release State Timing ······························································································331
E Clock Timing ··············································································································331
Clock Oscillator Stabilization Timing ···········································································332
I/O Port Input/Output Timing ························································································333
Free-Running Timer Input/Output Timing ····································································334
External Clock Input Timing for Free-Running Timers ················································334
8-Bit Timer Output Timing ····························································································335
8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing ····················································································335
8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing ····················································································335
PWM Timer Output Timing ··························································································336
SCI Input Clock Timing ································································································336
SCI Input/Output Timing (Synchronous Mode) ····························································336
Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P10 ··········································································407
Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P11 ··········································································407
Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P12 ···········································································408
Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P13 ··········································································409
Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P14 ···········································································410
Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pins P15 and P16 ···························································411
Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P17 ··········································································412
Schematic Diagram of Port 2 ·························································································413
Schematic Diagram of Port 3 ·························································································414
Schematic Diagram of Port 4 ·························································································415
Schematic Diagram of Port 5 ·························································································416
Schematic Diagram of Port 6 ·························································································417
Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pin P70 ··········································································418
Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pins P71 and P72 ···························································419
Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pin P73 ··········································································420
C-7 (d)
C-7 (e)
C-8
C-9 (a)
C-9 (b)
C-9 (c)
C-9 (d)
C-9 (e)
E-1
E-2
E-3
E-4
E-5
E-6
E-7
E-8
E-9
E-10
G-1
G-2
G-3
Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pins P74, P75 and P76 ····················································421
Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pin P77 ··········································································422
Schematic Diagram of Port 8 ·························································································423
Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pins P90 and P91 ···························································424
Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pins P92, P93 and P94 ····················································425
Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P95 ··········································································426
Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P96 ··········································································427
Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P97 ··········································································428
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 1) ········································································435
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 1) ········································································436
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 2) ········································································438
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 2) ········································································439
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 3) ········································································441
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 3) ········································································442
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 4) ········································································444
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 4) ········································································445
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 7) ········································································446
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 7) ········································································447
Package Dimensions (CP-84) ························································································451
Package Dimensions (CG-84) ·······················································································451
Package Dimensions (FP-80A) ······················································································452
Tables
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
2-1
2-2
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
Features ······························································································································2
Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (CP-84, CG-84) ···········································8
Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (FP-80A) ····················································12
Pin Functions ···················································································································16
Operating Modes ·············································································································23
Mode Control Register ····································································································29
Interrupt Mask Levels ······································································································36
Interrupt Mask Bits after an Interrupt is Accepted ··························································36
Initial Values of Registers ································································································41
General Register Data Formats ························································································42
Data Formats in Memory ·································································································43
Data Formats on the Stack ·······························································································44
Addressing Modes ···········································································································46
Effective Address Calculation ·························································································47
Instruction Classification ·································································································50
Data Transfer Instructions ·······························································································52
Arithmetic Instructions ····································································································53
Logic Operation Instructions ···························································································54
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
4-1 (a)
4-1 (b)
4-2
4-3
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
7-1
7-2
8-1
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-16
10-1
10-2
Shift Instructions ··············································································································55
Bit-Manipulation Instructions ··························································································56
Branching Instructions ·····································································································57
System Control Instructions ····························································································59
Short-Format Instructions and Equivalent General Formats ···········································62
Exceptions and Their Priority ··························································································81
Instruction Exceptions ······································································································81
Exception Vector Table ····································································································84
Stack after Exception Handling Sequence ·······································································94
Interrupt Controller Registers ··························································································99
Interrupts, Vectors, and Priorities ··················································································102
Assignment of Interrupt Priority Registers ····································································103
Number of States before Interrupt Service ····································································111
Internal Control Registers of the DTC ···········································································114
Data Transfer Enable Registers ·····················································································115
Assignment of Data Transfer Enable Registers ·····························································117
Addresses of DTC Vectors ·····························································································121
Number of States per Data Transfer ··············································································123
Number of States before Interrupt Service ····································································124
DTC Control Register Information Set in RAM ···························································125
Register Configuration ···································································································128
Wait Modes ····················································································································130
External Crystal Parameters ··························································································136
Input/Output Port Summary ··························································································140
Port 1 Registers ··············································································································142
Port 1 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes ······································································145
Port 1 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Modes ··································································147
Port 2 Registers ··············································································································149
Port 3 Registers ··············································································································152
Port 4 Registers ··············································································································155
Port 5 Registers ··············································································································158
Status of MOS Pull-Ups for Port 5 ················································································161
Port 6 Registers ··············································································································164
Status of MOS Pull-Ups for Port 5 ················································································167
Port 7 Registers ··············································································································168
Port 7 Pin Functions ·······································································································170
Port 8 Registers ··············································································································172
Port 9 Registers ··············································································································173
Port 9 Pin Functions ·······································································································175
Input and Output Pins of Free-Running Timer Module ················································179
Register Configuration ···································································································180
10-3
10-4
10-5
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
12-1
12-2
12-3
13-1
13-2
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-3
14-3
14-3
14-4
14-5
14-6
14-7
14-8
14-9
14-10
15-1
15-2
15-3
15-4
16-1
17-1
17-2
17-3
17-4
17-5
17-6
17-7
17-8
Free-Running Timer Interrupts ······················································································195
Synchronization by Writing to FRCs ············································································196
Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources ···································································204
Input and Output Pins of 8-Bit Timer ············································································209
8-Bit Timer Registers ·····································································································209
8-Bit Timer Interrupts ····································································································218
Priority Order of Timer Output ······················································································223
Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources ···································································223
Output Pins of PWM Timer Module ·············································································228
PWM Timer Registers ···································································································229
PWM Timer Parameters for 10MHz System Clock ······················································232
Register Configuration ···································································································236
Read Addresses of TCNT and TCSR ············································································240
SCI Input/Output Pins ····································································································247
SCI Registers ·················································································································247
Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (1) ················································255
Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (2) ················································256
Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (3) ················································256
Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (4) ················································257
Examples of BRR Settings in Synchronous Mode ························································258
Communication Formats Used by SCI ··········································································259
SCI Clock Source Selection ···························································································259
Data Formats in Asynchronous Mode ···········································································261
Receive Errors ················································································································264
SCI Interrupts ·················································································································269
SSR Bit States and Data Transfer When Multiple Receive Errors Occur ·····················270
A/D Input Pins ···············································································································275
A/D Registers ·················································································································275
Assignment of Data Registers to Analog Input Channels ·············································276
A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode) ············································································288
RAM Control Register ···································································································292
ROM Usage in Each MCU Mode ··················································································295
Selection of PROM Mode ······························································································296
Socket Adapter ···············································································································297
Selection of Sub-Modes in PROM Mode ······································································299
DC Characteristics
(When VCC = 6.0V ±0.25V, VPP = 12.5V ±0.3V, VSS = 0V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C) ············301
AC Characteristics
(When VCC = 6.0V ±0.25V, VPP = 12.5V ±0.3V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C) ······························301
Erasing Conditions ·········································································································304
Socket for 84-Pin LCC Package ····················································································305
18-1
18-2
20-1
20-2
20-3
20-4
20-5
20-6
20-7
A-1 (a)
A-1 (b)
A-1 (c)
A-1 (d)
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-7
A-7
A-7
A-7
A-7
A-8 (a)
A-8 (b)
C-1 (a)
C-1 (b)
C-1 (c)
C-1 (d)
C-1 (e)
C-1 (f)
C-1 (g)
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-6
C-7 (a)
C-7 (b)
Power-Down State ·········································································································307
Software Standby Control Register ···············································································309
Absolute Maximum Ratings ··························································································319
DC Characteristics ·········································································································320
Allowable Output Current Sink Values ·········································································321
Bus Timing ····················································································································322
Control Signal Timing ···································································································324
Timing Conditions of On-Chip Supporting Modules ····················································325
A/D Converter Characteristics ·······················································································326
Machine Language Coding [General Format] ·······························································346
Machine Language Coding [Special Format: Short Format] ·········································350
Machine Language Coding [Special Format: Branch Instructions] ······························351
Machine Language Coding [Special Format: System Control Instructions] ·················352
Operation Codes in Byte 1 ·····························································································353
Operation Codes in Byte 2 (Axxx) ················································································354
Operation Codes in Byte 2 (05xx, 15xx, 0Dxx, 1Dxx, Bxxx, Cxxx, Dxxx,
Exxx, Fxxx) ···················································································································355
Operation Codes in Byte 2 (04xx, 0Cxx) ······································································356
Operation Codes in Bytes 2 and 3 (11xx, 01xx, 06xx, 07xx, xx00xx) ··························357
Instruction Execution Cycles (1) ···················································································361
Instruction Execution Cycles (2) ····················································································362
Instruction Execution Cycles (3) ····················································································363
Instruction Execution Cycles (4) ····················································································364
Instruction Execution Cycles (5) ····················································································365
Instruction Execution Cycles (6) ····················································································366
Adjusted Value (Branch Instruction) ·············································································366
Adjusted Value (Other Instructions by Addressing Modes) ··········································366
Port 1 Port Read (Pin P10) ·····························································································407
Port 1 Port Read (Pin P11) ·····························································································408
Port 1 Port Read (Pin P12) ·····························································································408
Port 1 Port Read (Pin P13) ·····························································································409
Port 1 Port Read (Pin P14) ·····························································································410
Port 1 Port Read (Pins P15, P16) ····················································································411
Port 1 Port Read (Pin P17) ·····························································································412
Port 2 Port Read ·············································································································413
Port 3 Port Read ·············································································································414
Port 4 Port Read ·············································································································415
Port 5 Port Read ·············································································································416
Port 6 Port Read ·············································································································417
Port 7 Port Read (Pin P70) ·····························································································418
Port 7 Port Read (Pins P71, P72) ····················································································419
C-7 (c)
C-7 (d)
C-7 (e)
C-9 (a)
C-9 (b)
C-9 (c)
C-9 (d)
C-9 (e)
E-1
E-2
Port 7 Port Read (Pin P73) ·····························································································420
Port 7 Port Read (Pins P74–P76) ····················································································421
Port 7 Port Read (Pin P77) ·····························································································422
Port 9 Port Read (Pins P90, P91) ····················································································424
Port 9 Port Read (Pins P92–P94) ····················································································425
Port 9 Port Read (Pin P95) ·····························································································426
Port 9 Port Read (Pin P96) ·····························································································427
Port 9 Port Read (Pin P97) ·····························································································428
Port State ························································································································431
Pull-up MOS State ·········································································································433
Section 1 Overview
1.1 Features
The H8/532 is an original Hitachi CMOS microcomputer unit (MCU) comprising a highperformance CPU core plus a full range of supporting functions—an entire system integrated onto
a single chip.
The CPU features a highly orthogonal instruction set that permits addressing modes and data sizes
to be specified independently in each instruction. An internal 16-bit architecture and 16-bit access
to on-chip memory enhance the CPU’s data-processing capability and provide the speed needed
for realtime control applications.
The on-chip supporting functions include RAM, ROM, timers, a serial communication interface
(SCI), A/D conversion, and I/O ports. An on-chip data transfer controller (DTC) can transfer data
in either direction between memory and I/O independently of the CPU.
For the on-chip ROM, a choice is offered between masked ROM and programmable ROM
(PROM). The PROM version can be programmed by the user with a general-purpose PROM
writer.
Table 1-1 lists the main features of the H8/532 chip.
1
Table 1-1 Features
Feature
CPU
Memory
16-Bit freerunning
timer (FRT)
(3 channels)
8-Bit timer
(1 channel)
PWM timer
(3 channels)
Watchdog
timer (WDT)
(1 channel)
Description
General-register machine
• Eight 16-bit general registers
• Five 8-bit and two 16-bit control registers
High speed
• Maximum clock rate: 10MHz (oscillator frequency: 20MHz)
Expanded operating modes supporting external memory
• Minimum mode: up to 64K-byte address space
• Maximum mode: up to 1M-byte address space
Highly orthogonal instruction set
• Addressing modes and data size can be specified independently for
each instruction
1.5 Addressing modes
• Register-register operations
• Register-memory operations
Instruction set optimized for C language
• Special short formats for frequently-used instructions and addressing modes
• 1K-Byte high-speed RAM on-chip
• 32K-Byte programmable or masked ROM on-chip
Each channel provides:
• 1 free-running counter (which can count external events)
• 2 output-compare registers
• 1 input capture register
• One 8-bit up-counter (which can count external events)
• 2 time constant registers
• Generates pulses with any duty ratio from 0 to 100%
• Resolution: 1/250
• An overflow generates a nonmaskable interrupt
• Can also be used as an interval timer
2
Table 1-1 Features (cont)
Feature
Serial communication
interface (SCI)
A/D converter
Description
• Asynchronous or synchronous mode (selectable)
• Full duplex: can send and receive simultaneously
• Built-in baud rate generator
• 10-Bit resolution
• 8 channels, controllable in single mode or scan mode (selectable)
• Sample-and-hold function
I/O ports
• 57 Input/output pins (six 8-bit ports, one 5-bit port, one 4-bit port)
• 8 Input-only pins (one 8-bit port)
• Memory-mapped I/O
Interrupt
• 3 external interrupt pins (NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1)
controller
• 19 internal interrupts
(INTC)
• 8 priority levels
Data transfer
Performs bidirectional data transfer between memory and I/O independently
controller (DTC) of the CPU
Wait-state
Can insert wait states in access to external memory or I/O
controller (WSC)
Operating
5 MCU operating modes
modes
• Expanded minimum modes, supporting up to 64k bytes external memory
with or without using on-chip ROM (Modes 1 and 2)
• Expanded maximum modes, supporting up to 1M byte external memory
with or without using on-chip ROM (Modes 3 and 4)
• Single-chip mode (Mode 7)
3 power-down modes
• Sleep mode
• Software standby mode
• Hardware standby mode
Other features
• E clock output available
• Clock generator on-chip
Model Name
HD6475328CG
HD6475328CP
HD6475328F
HD6435328CP
HD6435328F
Package Options
84-Pin windowed LCC (CG-84)
84-Pin PLCC (CP-84)
80-Pin QFP (FP-80A)
84-Pin PLCC (CP-84)
80-Pin QFP (FP-80A)
3
ROM
PROM
Mask
ROM
1.2 Block Diagram
Port 1
Port 3
Interrupt
Controller
Serial
Communication
Interface
8 Bits Timer
PWM Timer
(x 3 channel)
16 Bits Free
Running Timer
(x 3 channel)
10 Bits
A/D Converter
Watchdog
Timer
Port 7
* CP-84 and CG-84 only
P77 /FTOA1
P76 /FTOB 3 /FTCI 3
P7 5 /FTOB 2 /FTCI 2
P74 /FTOB 1 /FTCI 1
P73 /FTI 3 /TMRI
P72 /FTI 2
P71 /FTI 1
P70 /TMCI
Port 8
P8 7 /AN 7
P8 6 /AN 6
P8 5 /AN 5
P8 4 /AN 4
P8 3 /AN 3
P8 2 /AN 2
P8 1 /AN 1
P8 0 /AN 0
P9 7 /SCK
P9 6 /RXD
P9 5 /TXD
P9 4 /PW 3
P9 3 /PW 2
P9 2 /PW 1
P9 1 /FTOA 3
P9 0 /FTOA 2
Port 9
Port 6
NMI
AV cc
AV ss
P5 7 /A 15
P5 6 /A 14
P5 5 /A 13
P5 4 /A 12
P5 3 /A 11
P5 2 /A 10
P5 1 /A 9
P5 0 /A 8
CPU
Data
Transfer
Controller
V cc
V cc
V ss
V ss
V ss
V ss *
V ss
V ss
Port 4
PROM/Mask
ROM 32 kByte
RAM
1 kByte
P4 7 /A 7
P4 6 /A 6
P4 5 /A 5
P4 4 /A 4
P4 3 /A 3
P4 2 /A 2
P4 1 /A 1
P4 0 /A 0
Port 5
WaitState
Controller
Address bus
Clock
Generator
Data bus (High)
RES
STBY
MD0
MD1
MD2
Port 2
Data bus (Low)
EXTAL
XTAL
P3 7 /D 7
P3 6 /D 6
P3 5 /D 5
P3 4 /D 4
P3 3 /D 3
P3 2 /D 2
P3 1 /D 1
P3 0 /D 0
P2 4 /WR
P2 3 /RD
P2 2 /DS
P2 1 /R/W
P2 0 /AS
P1 7 /TMO
P1 6 /IRQ 1
P1 5 /IRQ 0
P1 4 /WAIT
P1 3 /BREQ
P1 2 /BACK
P1 1 /E
P1 0 /ø
Figure 1-1 shows a block diagram of the H8/532 chip.
Figure 1-1 Block Diagram
4
P6 3 /A 19
P6 2 /A 18
P6 1 /A 17
P6 0 /A 16
1.3 Pin Arrangements and Functions
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement
P20 /AS
P17 /TMO
P16 /IRQ 1
P15 /IRQ 0
P14 /WAIT
P13 /BREQ
P12 /BACK
P11 /E
P10 /ø
Vss
XTAL
EXTAL
Vss
P97 /SCK
P96 /RXD
P95 /TXD
P94 /PW3
P93 /PW2
P92 /PW1
P91 /FTOA3
P90 /FTOA2
Figure 1-2 shows the pin arrangement of the CP-84 package. Figure 1-3 shows the pin
arrangement of the CG-84 package. Figure 1-4 shows the pin arrangement of the FP-80A package.
11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75
12
74
13
73
14
72
15
71
16
70
17
69
18
68
19
67
20
66
21
65
22
PLCC-84
64
23
63
24
62
25
61
26
60
27
59
28
58
29
57
30
56
31
55
32
54
AVcc
P87 /AN7
P86 /AN6
P85 /AN5
P84 /AN4
P83 /AN3
P82 /AN2
P81 /AN1
P80 /AN0
AVss
Vss
P77 /FTOA1
P76 /FTOB 3 /FTCI 3
P75 /FTOB 2 /FTCI 2
P74 /FTOB 1 /FTCI 1
P73 /FTI 3 /TMRI
P72 /FTI 2
P71 /FTI 1
P70 /TMCI
Vcc
P63 /A19
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
P40 /A 0
P41 /A 1
P42 /A 2
P43 /A 3
P44 /A 4
P45 /A 5
P46 /A 6
P47 /A 7
Vss
Vss
P50 /A 8
P51 /A 9
P5 2 /A 10
P5 3 /A 11
P5 4 /A 12
P5 5 /A 13
P5 6 /A 14
P5 7 /A 15
P6 0 /A 13
P6 1 /A 14
P6 2 /A 15
P21 /R/W
P22 /DS
P23 /RD
P24 /WR
Vcc
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
NC
Vss
P30 /D0
P31 /D1
P32 /D2
P33 /D3
P34 /D4
P35 /D5
P36 /D6
P37 /D7
1 pin
H8/532
HD6475328CP
JAPAN
Figure 1-2 Pin Arrangement (CP-84, Top View)
5
P20 /AS
P17 /TMO
P16 /IRQ 1
P15 /IRQ 0
P14 /WAIT
P13 /BREQ
P12 /BACK
P11 /E
P10 /ø
Vss
XTAL
EXTAL
Vss
P97 /SCK
P96 /RXD
P95 /TXD
P94 /PW3
P93 /PW2
P92 /PW1
P91 /FTOA3
P90 /FTOA2
11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75
12
74
13
73
14
72
15
71
16
70
17
69
18
68
19
67
20
66
21
22
65
LCC-84
64
23
63
24
62
25
61
26
60
27
59
28
58
29
57
30
56
31
55
32
54
AVcc
P87 /AN7
P86 /AN6
P85 /AN5
P84 /AN4
P83 /AN3
P82 /AN2
P81 /AN1
P80 /AN0
AVss
Vss
P77 /FTOA1
P76 /FTOB 3 /FTCI 3
P75 /FTOB 2 /FTCI 2
P74 /FTOB 1 /FTCI 1
P73 /FTI 3 /TMRI
P72 /FTI 2
P71 /FTI 1
P70 /TMCI
Vcc
P63 /A19
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
P40 /A 0
P41 /A 1
P42 /A 2
P43 /A 3
P44 /A 4
P45 /A 5
P46 /A 6
P47 /A 7
Vss
Vss
P50 /A 8
P51 /A 9
P5 2 /A 10
P5 3 /A 11
P5 4 /A 12
P5 5 /A 13
P5 6 /A 14
P5 7 /A 15
P6 0 /A 16
P6 1 /A 17
P6 2 /A 18
P21 /R/W
P22 /DS
P23 /RD
P24 /WR
Vcc
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
NC
Vss
P30 /D0
P31 /D1
P32 /D2
P33 /D3
P34 /D4
P35 /D5
P36 /D6
P37 /D7
Index
H8/532
HD6475328CG
JAPAN
Figure 1-3 Pin Arrangement (CG-84, Top View)
6
P20 /AS
P17 /TMO
P16 /IRQ 1
P15 /IRQ 0
P14 /WAIT
P13 /BREQ
P12 /BACK
P11 /E
P10 /ø
Vss
XTAL
EXTAL
P97 /SCK
P96 /RXD
P95 /TXD
P94 /PW3
P93 /PW2
P92 /PW1
P91 /FTOA3
P90 /FTOA2
1
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61
60
2
59
3
58
4
57
5
56
6
55
7
54
8
53
9
52
10
11
51
50
QFP-80A
12
49
13
48
14
47
15
46
16
45
17
44
18
43
19
42
20
41
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
AVcc
P87 /AN7
P86 /AN6
P85 /AN5
P84 /AN4
P83 /AN3
P82 /AN2
P81 /AN1
P80 /AN0
AVss
P77 /FTOA1
P76 /FTOB 3 /FTCI 3
P75 /FTOB 2 /FTCI 2
P74 /FTOB 1 /FTCI 1
P73 /FTI 3 /TMRI
P72 /FTI 2
P71 /FTI 1
P70 /TMCI
Vcc
P63 /A19
P40 /A 0
P41 /A 1
P42 /A 2
P43 /A 3
P44 /A 4
P45 /A 5
P46 /A 6
P47 /A 7
Vss
P50 /A 8
P51 /A 9
P5 2 /A 10
P5 3 /A 11
P5 4 /A 12
P5 5 /A 13
P5 6 /A 14
P5 7 /A 15
P6 0 /A 16
P6 1 /A 17
P6 2 /A 18
P21 /R/W
P22 /DS
P23 /RD
P24 /WR
Vcc
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
Vss
P30 /D0
P31 /D1
P32 /D2
P33 /D3
P34 /D4
P35 /D5
P36 /D6
P37 /D7
H8/532
HD6475328F
JAPAN
1 pin
Figure 1-4 Pin Arrangement (FP-80A, Top View)
7
1.3.2 Pin Functions
Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode: Table 1-2 lists the arrangements of the pins of the
CP-84 and CG-84 packages in each operating mode. Table 1-3 lists the arrangements for the FP80A package.
Table 1-2 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (CP-84, CG-84)
Pin
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Mode 1
Mode 2
XTAL
XTAL
VSS
VSS
P10/ø
P10/ø
P11/E
P11/E
P12 / BACK
P12 / BACK
P13 / BREQ
P13 / BREQ
P14 / WAIT
P14 / WAIT
P15 / IRQ0
P15 / IRQ0
P16 / IRQ1
P16 / IRQ1
P17 / TMO
P17 / TMO
AS
AS
R/W
R/W
DS
DS
RD
RD
WR
WR
VCC
VCC
MD0
MD0
MD1
MD1
Pin Name
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Mode 3
Mode 4
XTAL
XTAL
VSS
VSS
P10/ø
P10/ø
P11/E
P11/E
P12 / BACK
P12 / BACK
P13 / BREQ
P13 / BREQ
P14 / WAIT
P14 / WAIT
P15 / IRQ0
P15 / IRQ0
P16 / IRQ1
P16 / IRQ1
P17 / TMO
P17 / TMO
AS
AS
R/W
R/W
DS
DS
RD
RD
WR
WR
VCC
VCC
MD0
MD0
MD1
MD1
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
8
Single-Chip
Mode
Mode 7
XTAL
VSS
P10/ø
P11/E
P12
P13
P14
P15 / IRQ0
P16 / IRQ1
P17 / TMO
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
VCC
MD0
MD1
PROM
Mode
NC
VSS
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
VCC
VSS
VSS
Table 1-2 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (CP-84, CG-84) (cont)
Pin
No.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Mode 1
Mode 2
MD2
MD2
STBY
STBY
RES
RES
NMI
NMI
NC
NC
VSS
VSS
D0
D0
D1
D1
D2
D2
D3
D3
D4
D4
D5
D5
D6
D6
D7
D7
A0
A0
A1
A1
A2
A2
A3
A3
A4
A4
A5
A5
A6
A6
A7
A7
VSS
VSS
Pin Name
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Mode 3
Mode 4
MD2
MD2
STBY
STBY
RES
RES
NMI
NMI
NC
NC
VSS
VSS
D0
D0
D1
D1
D2
D2
D3
D3
D4
D4
D5
D5
D6
D6
D7
D7
A0
A0
A1
A1
A2
A2
A3
A3
A4
A4
A5
A5
A6
A6
A7
A7
VSS
VSS
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
9
Single-Chip
Mode
Mode 7
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
NC
VSS
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
P37
P40
P41
P42
P43
P44
P45
P46
P47
VSS
PROM
Mode
VSS
VSS
VPP
A9
NC
VSS
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
VSS
Table 1-2 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (CP-84, CG-84) (cont)
Pin
No.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
Pin Name
Expanded Minimum
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Modes
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
A8
P50 / A8
A8
P50 / A8
A9
P51 / A9
A9
P51 / A9
P52 / A10
A10
P52 / A10
A10
A11
P53 / A11
A11
P53 / A11
A12
P54 / A12
A12
P54 / A12
A13
P55 / A13
A13
P55 / A13
A14
P56 / A14
A14
P56 / A14
A15
P57 / A15
A15
P57 / A15
P60
A16
P60 / A16
P60
P61
P61
A17
P61 / A17
P62
P62
A18
P62 / A18
P63
A19
P63 / A19
P63
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
P70 / TMCI
P70 / TMCI
P70 / TMCI
P70 / TMCI
P71 / FTI1
P71 / FTI1
P71 / FTI1
P71 / FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P72 / FTI2
P72 / FTI2
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
P73 / FTI3 /
P73 / FTI3 /
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
TMRI
TMRI
TMRI
P74 / FTOB1 / P74 / FTOB1 / P74 / FTOB1 / P74 / FTOB1 /
FTCI1
FTCI1
FTCI1
FTCI1
P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 /
FTCI2
FTCI2
FTCI2
FTCI2
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
10
Single-Chip
Mode
Mode 7
VSS
P50
P51
P52
P53
P54
P55
P56
P57
P60
P61
P62
P63
VCC
P70 / TMCI
P71 / FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
P74 / FTOB1 /
FTCI1
P75 / FTOB2 /
FTCI2
PROM
Mode
VSS
A8
OE
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
CE
VCC
VCC
NC
NC
VCC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Table 1-2 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (CP-84, CG-84) (cont)
Pin
No.
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Mode 1
Mode 2
P76 / FTOB3 / P76 / FTOB3 /
FTCI3
FTCI3
P77 / FTOA1
P77 / FTOA1
VSS
VSS
AVSS
AVSS
P80 / AN0
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
P87 / AN7
AVCC
AVCC
P90 / FTOA2
P90 / FTOA2
P91 / FTOA3
P91 / FTOA3
P92 / PW1
P92 / PW1
P93 / PW2
P93 / PW2
P94 / PW3
P94 / PW3
P95/ TXD
P95 / TXD
P96 / RXD
P96/ RXD
P97 / SCK
P97/ SCK
VSS
VSS
EXTAL
EXTAL
Pin Name
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Mode 3
Mode 4
P76 / FTOB3 / P76 / FTOB3 /
FTCI3
FTCI3
P77 / FTOA1 P77 / FTOA1
VSS
VSS
AVSS
AVSS
P80 / AN0
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
P87 / AN7
AVCC
AVCC
P90 / FTOA2 P90 / FTOA2
P91 / FTOA3 P91 / FTOA3
P92 / PW1
P92 / PW1
P93 / PW2
P93 / PW2
P94 / PW3
P94 / PW3
P95/ TXD
P95/ TXD
P96/ RXD
P96/ RXD
P97/ SCK
P97/ SCK
VSS
VSS
EXTAL
EXTAL
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
11
Single-Chip
Mode
Mode 7
P76/ FTOB3 /
FTCI3
P77 / FTOA1
VSS
AVSS
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
AVCC
P90 / FTOA2
P91 / FTOA3
P92 / PW1
P93 / PW2
P94 / PW3
P95/ TXD
P96/ RXD
P97/ SCK
VSS
EXTAL
PROM
Mode
NC
NC
VSS
VSS
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
VCC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
VSS
NC
Table 1-3 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (FP-80A)
Pin
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Mode 1
Mode 2
R/W
R/W
DS
DS
RD
RD
WR
WR
VCC
VCC
MD0
MD0
MD1
MD1
MD2
MD2
STBY
STBY
RES
RES
NMI
NMI
VSS
VSS
D0
D0
D1
D1
D2
D2
D3
D3
D4
D4
D5
D5
D6
D6
D7
D7
A0
A0
Pin Name
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Mode 3
Mode 4
R/W
R/W
DS
DS
RD
RD
WR
WR
VCC
VCC
MD0
MD0
MD1
MD1
MD2
MD2
STBY
STBY
RES
RES
NMI
NMI
VSS
VSS
D0
D0
D1
D1
D2
D2
D3
D3
D4
D4
D5
D5
D6
D6
D7
D7
A0
A0
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
12
Single-Chip
Mode
Mode 7
P21
P22
P23
P24
VCC
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
VSS
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
P37
P40
PROM
Mode
NC
NC
NC
NC
VCC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VPP
A9
VSS
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
A0
Table 1-3 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (FP-80A) (cont)
Pin
No.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Mode 1
Mode 2
A1
A1
A2
A2
A3
A3
A4
A4
A5
A5
A6
A6
A7
A7
VSS
VSS
A8
P50 / A8
A9
P51 / A9
A10
P52 / A10
A11
P53 / A11
A12
P54 / A12
A13
P55 / A13
A14
P56 / A14
A15
P57 / A15
P60
P60
P61
P61
P62
P62
P63
P63
VCC
VCC
Pin Name
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Mode 3
Mode 4
A1
A1
A2
A2
A3
A3
A4
A4
A5
A5
A6
A6
A7
A7
VSS
VSS
A8
P50/ A8
A9
P51/ A9
A10
P52/ A10
A11
P53 / A11
A12
P54 / A12
A13
P55 / A13
A14
P56 / A14
A15
P57 / A15
A16
P60 / A16
A17
P61 / A17
A18
P62 / A18
A19
P63 / A19
VCC
VCC
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
13
Single-Chip
Mode
Mode 7
P41
P42
P43
P44
P45
P46
P47
VSS
P50
P51
P52
P53
P54
P55
P56
P57
P60
P61
P62
P63
VCC
PROM
Mode
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
VSS
A8
OE
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
CE
VCC
VCC
NC
NC
VCC
Table 1-3 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (FP-80A) (cont)
Pin
No.
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Pin Name
Expanded Minimum
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Modes
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
P70 / TMCI
P70/ TMCI
P70/ TMCI
P70/ TMCI
P71/ FTI1
P71/ FTI1
P71/ FTI1
P71 / FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P72 / FTI2
P72 / FTI2
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
P73 / FTI3 /
P73 / FTI3 /
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
TMRI
TMRI
TMRI
P74 / FTOB1 / P74 / FTOB1 / P74 / FTOB1 / P74/ FTOB1 /
FTCI1
FTCI1
FTCI1
FTCI1
P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 /
FTCI2
FTCI2
FTCI2
FTCI2
P76 / FTOB3 / P76 / FTOB3 / P76 / FTOB3 / P76 / FTOB3 /
FTCI3
FTCI3
FTCI3
FTCI3
P77 / FTOA1
P77 / FTOA1 P77 / FTOA1 P77 / FTOA1
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
P80 / AN0
P80 / AN0
P80 / AN0
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P81 / AN1
P81 / AN1
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P82 / AN2
P82 / AN2
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P83 / AN3
P83 / AN3
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P84 / AN4
P84 / AN4
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P85 / AN5
P85 / AN5
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P86 / AN6
P86 / AN6
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
P87 / AN7
P87 / AN7
P87 / AN7
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
14
Single-Chip
Mode
Mode 7
P70/ TMCI
P71/ FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
P74 / FTOB1 /
FTCI1
P75 / FTOB2 /
FTCI2
P76 / FTOB3 /
FTCI3
P77 / FTOA1
AVSS
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
PROM
Mode
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
VSS
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Table 1-3 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (FP-80A) (cont)
Pin
No.
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Mode 1
Mode 2
AVCC
AVCC
P90 / FTOA2
P90 / FTOA2
P91 / FTOA3
P91 / FTOA3
P92 / PW1
P92 / PW1
P93 / PW2
P93 / PW2
P94 / PW3
P94 / PW3
P95 / TXD
P95 / TXD
P96 / RXD
P96 / RXD
P97 / SCK
P97 / SCK
EXTAL
EXTAL
XTAL
XTAL
VSS
VSS
P10 / ø
P10 / ø
P11 / E
P11 / E
P12 / BACK
P12 / BACK
P13 / BREQ
P13 / BREQ
P14 / WAIT
P14 / WAIT
P15 / IRQ0
P15 / IRQ0
P16 / IRQ1
P16 / IRQ1
P17 / TMO
P17 / TMO
AS
AS
Pin Name
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Mode 3
Mode 4
AVCC
AVCC
P90 / FTOA2 P90 / FTOA2
P91 / FTOA3 P91 / FTOA3
P92 / PW1
P92 / PW1
P93 / PW2
P93 / PW2
P94 / PW3
P94 / PW3
P95 / TXD
P95 / TXD
P96 / RXD
P96 / RXD
P97 / SCK
P97 / SCK
EXTAL
EXTAL
XTAL
XTAL
VSS
VSS
P10 / ø
P10 / ø
P11 / E
P11 / E
P12 / BACK
P12 / BACK
P13 / BREQ
P13 / BREQ
P14 / WAIT
P14 / WAIT
P15 / IRQ0
P15 / IRQ0
P16 / IRQ1
P16 / IRQ1
P17 / TMO
P17 / TMO
AS
AS
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
15
Single-Chip
Mode
Mode 7
AVCC
P90 / FTOA2
P91 / FTOA3
P92 / PW1
P93 / PW2
P94 / PW3
P95 / TXD
P96 / RXD
P97 / SCK
EXTAL
XTAL
VSS
P10 / ø
P11 / E
P12
P13
P14
P15 / IRQ0
P16 / IRQ1
P17 / TMO
P20
PROM
Mode
VCC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
VSS
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Pin Functions: Table 1-4 gives a concise description of the function of each pin.
Table 1-4 Pin Functions
Type
Power
Clock
System
control
Symbol
VCC
Pin No.
CP-84,
CG-84 FP-80A
16, 55 5, 42
VSS
2, 24
41, 42
64, 83
12, 29
71
XTAL
1
70
EXTAL
84
69
ø
3
72
E
4
73
BACK
5
74
I/O Name and Function
I
Power: Connected to the power supply (+5V).
Connect both VCC pins to the system power
supply (+5V). The chip will not operate if either pin
is left unconnected.
I
Ground: Connected to ground (0V).
Connect all VSS pins to the system power
supply (0V). The chip will not operate if any VSS
pin is left unconnected.
I
Crystal: Connected to a crystal oscillator.
The crystal frequency should be double the desired
ø clock frequency.
If an external clock is input at the EXTAL pin, leave
the XTAL pin unconnected.
I
External Crystal: Connected to a crystal
oscillator or external clock. The frequency of the
external clock should be double the desired ø clock
frequency. See section 8.2, “Oscillator Circuit” for
examples of connections to a crystal and external
clock.
O
System Clock: Supplies the ø clock to peripheral
devices.
O
Enable Clock: Supplies an E clock to E clock based
peripheral devices.
O
Bus Request Acknowledge: Indicates
that the bus right has been granted to an external
device. Notifies an external device that issued a
BREQ signal that it now has control of the bus.
16
Table 1-4 Pin Functions (cont)
Type
System
control
Symbol
BREQ
Pin No.
CP-84,
CG-84 FP-80A
6
75
STBY
20
9
RES
21
10
54 – 43
40 – 33
32 – 25
7
41 – 30
28 – 21
20 – 13
76
11
80
R/W
12
1
DS
13
2
RD
14
3
WR
15
4
Address A19 – A0
bus
Data bus D7 – D0
Bus
WAIT
control
AS
I/O Name and Function
I
Bus Request: Sent by an external device to the
H8/532 chip to request the bus right.
I
Standby: A transition to the hardware standby
mode (a power-down state) occurs when a Low
input is received at the STBY pin.
I
Reset: A Low input causes the H8/532 chip to
reset.
O
Address Bus: Address output pins.
I/O Data Bus: 8-Bit bidirectional data bus.
I
Wait: Requests the CPU to insert one or more Tw
states when accessing an off-chip address.
O
Address Strobe: Goes Low to indicate that there
is a valid address on the address bus.
O
Read/Write: Indicates whether the CPU is reading
or writing data on the bus.
• High—Read
• Low—Write
O
Data Strobe: Goes Low to indicate the presence of
valid data on the data bus.
O
Read: Goes Low to indicate that the CPU is reading
an external address.
O
Write: Goes Low to indicate that the CPU is
writing to an external address.
17
Table 1-4 Pin Functions (cont)
Type
Interrupt
Pin No.
CP-84,
Symbol CG-84 FP-80A
NMI
22
11
IRQ0
IRQ1
Operating MD2
mode
MD1
control
MD0
8
9
19
18
17
77
78
8
7
6
I/O Name and Function
I
NonMaskable Interrupt: Highest-signals priority
interrupt request. The port 1 control register (P1CR)
determines whether the interrupt is requested on the
rising or falling edge of the NMI input.
I
Interrupt Request 0 and 1: Maskable interrupt
request pins.
I
Mode: Input pins for setting the MCU operating
mode according to the table below.
MD2 MD1 MD0 Mode Description
0
0
0
Mode 0 —
0
0
1
Mode 1 Expanded minimum mode
(ROM disabled)
0
1
0
Mode 2 Expanded minimum mode
(ROM enabled)
0
1
1
Mode 3 Expanded maximum mode
(ROM disabled)
1
0
0
Mode 4 Expanded maximum mode
(ROM enabled)
1
0
1
Mode 5 —
1
1
0
Mode 6 —
1
1
1
Mode 7 Single-chip mode
The inputs at these pins are latched in mode select
bits 2 to 0 (MDS2 – MDS0) of the mode control
register (MDCR) on the rising edge of the RES
signal.
18
Table 1-4 Pin Functions (cont)
Type
16-Bit freerunning
timer (FRT)
8-Bit
timer
PWM
timer
Symbol
FTOA1
FTOA2
FTOA3
FTOB1
FTOB2
FTOB3
FTCI1
FTCI2
FTCI3
Pin No.
CP-84,
CG-84 FP-80A
63
50
75
61
76
62
60
47
61
48
62
49
60
47
61
48
62
49
FTI1
FTI2
FTI3
TMO
57
58
59
10
44
45
46
79
I
TMCI
56
43
I
TMRI
59
46
I
PW1
PW2
PW3
77
78
79
63
64
65
O
I/O
O
O
I
O
Name and Function
FRT Output Compare A (channels 1, 2, and 3):
Output pins for the output compare A function
of the free-running timer channels 1, 2, and 3.
FRT Output Compare B (channels 1, 2, and 3):
Output pins for the output compare B function
of the free-running timer channels 1, 2, and 3.
FRT Counter Clock Input (channels 1, 2, and 3):
External clock input pins for the free-running
counters (FRCs) of free-running timer channels 1,
2, and 3.
FRT Input Capture (channels 1, 2, and 3):
Input capture pins for free-running timer
channels 1, 2, and 3.
8-bit Timer Output: Compare-match output pin
for the 8-bit timer.
8-bit Timer Clock Input: External
clock input pin for the 8-bit timer counter.
8-bit Timer Counter Reset Input: A high input
at this pin resets the 8-bit timer counter.
PWM Timer Output (channels 1, 2, and 3):
Pulse-width modulation timer output pulses.
19
Table 1-4 Pin Functions (cont)
Type
Symbol
Serial com- TXD
munication
interface
signals
RXD
AN7 – AN0 73 – 66
59 – 52
Receive Data: Data input pins for the
serial communication interface.
I/O Serial Clock: Input/output pin for the
serial interface clock.
I
Analog Input: Analog signal input pins.
AVCC*
74
60
I
AVSS*
65
51
I
P17 – P10 10 – 3
79 – 72
I/O
P24 – P20 15 – 11
4 – 1,
80
I/O
P37 – P30 32 – 25
20 – 13
I/O
P47 – P40 40 – 33
28 – 21
I/O
SCK
A/D
converter
Parallel
I/O
Pin No.
CP-84,
CG-84
FP-80A I/O Name and Function
80
66
O
Transmit Data: Data output pins for the
serial communication interface.
81
67
82
68
I
Analog Reference Voltage: Reference voltage
and power supply pin for the A/D converter.
Analog Ground: Ground pin for the A/D
converter.
Port 1: An 8-bit input/output port. The
direction of each bit is determined by the port 1
data direction register (P1DDR).
Port 2: A 5-bit input/output port. The
direction of each bit is determined by the port 2
data direction register (P2DDR).
Port 3: An 8-bit input/output port. The
direction of each bit is determined by the port 3
data direction register (P3DDR).
Port 4: An 8-bit input/output port. The
direction of each bit is determined by the port 4
data direction register (P4DDR). These pins
can drive LED indicators.
* When A/D converter is not used, AVCC should be connected to VCC, and AVSS should be
connected to GND.
20
Table 1-4 Pin Functions (cont)
Type
Parallel
I/O
Symbol
P57 – P50
P63 – P60
P77 – P70
P87 – P80
P97 – P90
Pin No.
CP-84,
CG-84 FP-80A I/O Name and Function
50 – 43 37 – 30 I/O Port 5: An 8-bit input/output port. The direction of
each bit is determined by the port 5 data direction
register (P5DDR). These pins have built-in MOS
input pull-ups.
54 – 51 41 – 38 I/O Port 6: A 4-bit input/output port. The direction of
each bit is determined by the port 6 data direction
register (P6DDR). These pins have built-in MOS
input pull-ups.
63 – 56 50 – 43 I/O Port 7: An 8-bit input/output port. The direction of
each bit is determined by the port 7 data direction
register (P7DDR). These pins have Schmitt inputs.
73 – 66 59 – 52 I
Port 8: An 8-bit input port
82 – 75 68 – 61 I/O Port 9: An 8-bit input/output port. The direction of
each bit is determined by the port 9 data direction
register (P9DDR).
21
Section 2 MCU Operating Modes and Address Space
2.1 Overview
The H8/532 microcomputer unit (MCU) operates in five modes numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, and 7. The
mode is selected by the inputs at the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) at the instant when the chip comes
out of a reset. As indicated in table 2-1, the MCU mode determines the size of the address space,
the usage of on-chip ROM, and the operating mode of the CPU. The MCU mode also affects the
functions of I/O pins.
Table 2-1 Operating Modes
MD2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
MD1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
MD0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
MCU Mode
—
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
—
—
Mode 7
Address Space
—
Expanded minimum
Expanded minimum
Expanded maximum
Expanded maximum
—
—
Single-chip only
On-Chip ROM
—
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
—
—
Enabled
CPU Mode
—
Minimum mode
Minimum mode
Maximum mode
Maximum mode
—
—
Minimum mode
Notation: 0: Low level
1: High level
—: Cannot be used
Modes 1 to 4 are referred to as “expanded” because they permit access to off-chip memory and
peripheral addresses. The expanded minimum modes (modes 1 and 2) support a maximum
address space of 64K bytes. The expanded maximum modes (modes 3 and 4) support a maximum
address space of 1M byte.
Interrupt service is slightly slower in the expanded maximum modes than in the other modes
because the CPU has to save its code page register.
The H8/532 cannot be set to modes 0, 5, and 6. The mode pins should never be set to these
values.
23
2.2 Mode Descriptions
The five MCU modes are described below. For further information on the I/O pin functions in
each mode, see section 9, “I/O Ports.”
Mode 1 (Expanded Minimum Mode): Mode 1 supports a maximum 64K-byte address space
which does not include any on-chip ROM. Ports 1 to 5 are used for bus lines and bus control
signals as follows:
Control signals: Ports 1* and 2
Data bus:
Port 3
Address bus:
Ports 4 and 5
* The functions of individual pins of port 1 are software-selectable.
Mode 2 (Expanded Minimum Mode): Mode 2 supports a maximum 64K-byte address space of
which the first 32K bytes are in on-chip ROM. Ports 1 to 5 are used for bus lines and bus control
signals as follows:
Control signals: Ports 1* and 2
Data bus:
Port 3
Address bus:
Ports 4 and 5*
* The functions of individual pins in ports 1 and 5 are software-selectable.
Note: In mode 2, port 5 is initially a general-purpose input port. Software must change it to
output before using it for the address bus. See section 9.6, “Port 5” for details. The following
instruction makes all pins of port 5 into output pins:
MOV.B
#H'FF, @H'FF88*
* H'xx or H'xxxx express the hexadecimal number.
Mode 3 (Expanded Maximum Mode): Mode 3 supports a maximum 1M-byte address space
which does not include any on-chip ROM. Ports 1 to 6 are used for bus lines and bus control
signals as follows:
Control signals: Ports 1* and 2
Data bus:
Port 3
Address bus:
Ports 4, 5, and 6
* The functions of individual pins of port 1 are software-selectable.
24
Mode 4 (Expanded Maximum Mode): Mode 4 supports a maximum 1M-byte address space of
which the first 32K bytes are in on-chip ROM. Ports 1 to 6 are used for bus lines and bus control
signals as follows:
Control signals: Ports 1* and 2
Data bus:
Port 3
Address bus:
Ports 4, 5*, and 6*
* The functions of individual pins in ports 1, 5, and 6 are software-selectable.
Note: In mode 4, ports 5 and 6 are initially general-purpose input ports. Software must change
them to output before using them for the address bus. See section 9.6, “Port 5” and 10.7, “Port 6”
for details. The following instruction sets all pins of ports 5 and 6 to output:
MOV.W #H'FFFF, @H'FF88
Mode 7 (Single-Chip Mode): In this mode all memory is on-chip, in 32K bytes of ROM and 1K
byte of RAM. It is not possible to access off-chip addresses.
The single-chip mode provides the maximum number of ports. All the pins associated with the
address and data buses in the expanded modes are available as general-purpose input/output ports
in the single-chip mode.
2.3 Address Space Map
2.3.1 Page Segmentation
The H8/532’s address space is segmented into 64K-byte pages. In the single-chip mode and
expanded minimum modes there is just one page: page 0. In the expanded maximum modes there
can be up to 16 pages. Figure 2-1 shows the address space in each mode and indicates which parts
are on- and off-chip.
25
Expanded minimum modes
Address
Mode 1
Expanded maximum modes
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
H'00000
Page 0
H'0FFFF
H'10000
Page 1
H'1FFFF
H'F0000
Page 15
H'FFFFF
On-chip
On- or off-chip (selectable)
Figure 2-1 Address Space in Each Mode
26
Off-chip
Single-chip mode
Mode 7
2.3.2 Page 0 Address Allocations
The high and low address areas in page 0 are reserved for registers and vector tables.
Vector Tables: The low address area contains the exception vector table and DTC vector table.
The CPU accesses the exception vector table to obtain the addresses of user-coded exceptionhandling routines. The DTC vector table contains pointers to tables of register information used
by the on-chip chip data transfer controller. The size of these tables depends on the CPU
operating mode. Details are given in section 4.1.3, “Exception Factors and Vector Table,” section
5.2.3, “Interrupt Vector Table,” and section 6.3.2, “DTC Vector Table.”
In modes 2 and 4 the vector tables are located in on-chip ROM. In modes 1, 3, and 7 the vector
tables are in external memory.
Register Field: The highest 128 addresses in page 0 (addresses H'FF80 to H'FFFF) belong to
control, status, and data registers used by the I/O ports and on-chip supporting modules. Program
code cannot be located at these addresses.
The CPU accesses addresses in this register field like other addresses in the address space. By
reading and writing at these addresses the CPU controls the on-chip supporting modules and
communicates via the I/O ports. A complete map of the register field is given in appendix B.
On-Chip RAM: One of the control registers in the register field is a RAM control register
(RAMCR) containing a RAM enable bit (RAME) that enables or disables the 1-kbyte on-chip
RAM. When this bit is set to “1” (its default value), addresses H'FFB0 to H'FF7F are located onchip. When this bit is cleared to “0,” these addresses are located in external memory and the onchip RAM is not used. See section 16, “RAM” for further information.
The RAME bit is bit 7 at address H'FFF9.
Coding Example:
To enable on-chip RAM: BSET.B #7, @H'FFF9
To disable on-chip RAM: BCLR.B #7, @H'FFF9
Note: If on-chip RAM is disabled in the single-chip mode, access to addresses H'FFB0 to H'FF7F
causes an address error.
27
Figure 2-2 is a map of page 0 of the address space.
H'0000
Exception vector table
DTC vector table
On-chip ROM
(modes 2, 4, and 7)
or external memory
(modes 1 and 3)
H'7FFF
H'8000
H'FB80
On-chip RAM (when enabled)
H'FF80
On-chip register field
H'FFFF
Figure 2-2 Map of Page 0
28
2.4 Mode Control Register (MDCR)
Another control register in the register field in page 0 is the mode control register (MDCR). The
inputs at the mode pins are latched in this register on the rising edge of the signal. The mode
control register can be read by the CPU, but not written. Table 3-2 lists the attributes of this
register.
Table 2-2 Mode Control Register
Name
Mode control register
Abbreviation
MDCR
Read/Write
Read only
Address
H'FFFA
The bit configuration of this register is shown below.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
MDS2
MDS1
MDS0
Initial value
1
1
0
0
0
*
*
*
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
R
* Initialized according to MD2 to MD0.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as “1.”
Bits 5 to 3—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as “0.”
Bits 2 to 0—Mode Select 2 to 0 (MDS2 to MDS0): These bits indicate the values of the mode
pins (MD2 to MD0) latched on the rising edge of the signal. MDS2 corresponds to MD2, MDS1
to MD1, and MDS0 to MD0. These bits can be read but not written.
Coding Example: To test whether the MCU is operating in mode 1:
CMP:G.B #H'C1, @H'FFFA
The comparison is with H'C1 instead of H'01 because bits 7 and 6 are always read as “1.”
29
Section 3 CPU
3.1 Overview
The H8/532 chip has the H8/500 Family CPU: a high-speed central processing unit designed for
realtime control of a wide range of medium-scale office and industrial equipment. Its Hitachioriginal architecture features eight 16-bit general registers, internal 16-bit data paths, and an
optimized instruction set.
Section 3 summarizes the CPU architecture and instruction set.
3.1.1 Features
The main features of the H8/500 CPU are listed below.
• General-register machine
— Eight 16-bit general registers
— Seven control registers (two 16-bit registers, five 8-bit registers)
• High speed: maximum 10MHz
At 10MHz a register-register add operation takes only 200ns.
• Address space managed in 64k-byte pages, expandable to 1M byte*
Page registers make four pages available simultaneously: a code page, stack page, data page,
and extended page.
• Two CPU operating modes:
— Minimum mode: Maximum 64k-byte address space
— Maximum mode: Maximum 1M-byte address space*
• Highly orthogonal instruction set
Addressing modes and data sizes can be specified independently within each instruction.
• 1.5 Addressing modes
Register-register and register-memory operations are supported.
• Optimized for efficient programming in C language
In addition to the general registers and orthogonal instruction set, the CPU has special short
formats for frequently-used instructions and addressing modes.
* The CPU architecture supports up to 16M bytes of external memory, but the H8/532 chip has
only enough address pins to address 1M byte.
31
3.1.2 Address Space
The address space size depends on the operating mode.
The H8/532 MCU has five operating modes, which are selected by the input to the mode pins
(MD2 to MD0) when the chip comes out of a reset. The CPU, however, has only two operating
modes. The MCU operating mode determines the CPU operating mode, which in turn determines
the maximum address space size as indicated in figure 3-1.
Minimum mode
Maximum address space: 64 k
bytes Hightest address: H'FFFF
Maximum mode
Maximum address space: 1 M byte
Hightest address: H'FFFFF
CPU operating mode
Figure 3-1 CPU Operating Modes
32
3.1.3 Register Configuration
Figure 3-2 shows the register structure of the CPU. There are two groups of registers: the general
registers (Rn) and control registers (CR).
General registers (Rn)
15
0
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
(FP)
(SP)
FP: Frame Pointer
SP: Stack Pointer
Control registers (CR)
15
0
PC
PC: Program Counter
SR
CCR
15
T
8 7
I2 I1 I0
0
N Z V C
SR: Status Register
CCR: Condition Code Register
CP
CP: Code Page register
DP
DP: Data Page register
EP
EP: Extended Page register
TP
TP: sTack Page register
BR
BR: Base Register
Figure 3-2 Registers in the CPU
33
3.2 CPU Register Descriptions
3.2.1 General Registers
All eight of the 16-bit general registers are functionally alike; there is no distinction between data
registers and address registers. When these registers are accessed as data registers, either byte or
word size can be selected.
R6 and R7, in addition to functioning as general registers, have special assignments.
R7 is the stack pointer, used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. It can be
designated by the name SP, which is synonymous with R7. As indicated in figure 3-3, it points to
the top of the stack. It is also used implicitly by the LDM and STM instructions, which load and
store multiple registers from and to the stack and pre-decrement or post-increment R7 accordingly.
R6 functions as a frame pointer (FP). The LINK and UNLK use R6 implicitly to reserve or
release a stack frame.
Unused area
SP
Stack area
Figure 3-3 Stack Pointer
34
3.2.2 Control Registers
The CPU control registers (CR) include a 16-bit program counter (PC), a 16-bit status register
(SR), four 8-bit page registers, and one 8-bit base register (BR).
Program Counter (PC): This 16-bit register indicates the address of the next instruction the
CPU will execute.
Status Register (SR): This 16-bit register contains internal status information. The lower half of
the status register is referred to as the condition code register (CCR): it can be accessed as a
separate condition code byte.
CCR
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
T
—
—
—
—
I2
I1
I0
—
—
—
—
N
Z
V
C
Bit 15—Trace (T): When this bit is set to “1,” the CPU operates in trace mode and generates a
trace exception after every instruction. See section 4.4, “Trace” for a description of the trace
exception-handling sequence.
When the value of this bit is “0,” instructions are executed in normal continuous sequence. This
bit is cleared to “0” at a reset.
Bits 14 to 11—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as “0.”
Bits 10 to 8—Interrupt Mask (I2, I1, I0): These bits indicate the interrupt request mask level
(0 to 7). As shown in table 3-1, an interrupt request is not accepted unless it has a higher level
than the value of the mask. A nonmaskable interrupt (NMI), which has level 8, is accepted at any
mask level. After an interrupt is accepted, I2, I1, and I0 are changed to the level of the interrupt.
Table 3-2 indicates the values of the I bits after an interrupt is accepted.
A reset sets all three of bits (I2, I1, and I0) to “1,” masking all interrupts except NMI.
35
Table 3-1 Interrupt Mask Levels
Priority
High
Low
Mask
Level
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mask Bits
I2 I1 I0
1 1 1
1 1 0
1 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 1
0 1 0
0 0 1
0 0 0
Interrupts Accepted
NMI
Level 7 and NMI
Levels 6 to 7 and NMI
Levels 5 to 7 and NMI
Levels 4 to 7 and NMI
Levels 3 to 7 and NMI
Levels 2 to 7 and NMI
Levels 1 to 7 and NMI
Table 3-2 Interrupt Mask Bits after an Interrupt is Accepted
Level of Interrupt Accepted
NMI (8)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
I2
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
I1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
36
I0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as “0.”
Bit 3—Negative (N): This bit indicates the most significant bit (sign bit) of the result of an
instruction.
Bit 2—Zero (Z): This bit is set to “1” to indicate a zero result and cleared to “0” to indicate a
nonzero result.
Bit 1—Overflow (V): This bit is set to “1” when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to
“0” at other times.
Bit 0—Carry (C): This bit is set to “1” when a carry or borrow occurs at the most significant bit,
and is cleared to “0” (or left unchanged) at other times.
The specific changes that occur in the condition code bits when each instruction is executed are
listed in appendix A.1 “Instruction Tables.” See the H8/500 Series Programming Manual for
further details.
Page Registers: The code page register (CP), data page register (DP), extended page register
(EP), and stack page register (TP) are 8-bit registers that are used only in the maximum mode. No
use of their contents is made in the minimum mode.
In the maximum mode, the page registers combine with the program counter and general registers
to generate 24-bit effective addresses as shown in figure 3-4, thereby expanding the program area,
data area, and stack area.
37
Page register
PC or general register
8 Bits
16 Bits
PC
CP
R0
R1
R2
DP
R3
@ aa : 16
R4
EP
R5
R6
TP
R7
24 Bits (effective address)
Figure 3-4 Combinations of Page Registers with Other Registers
Code Page Register (CP): The code page register and the program counter combine to generate
a 24-bit program code address. In the maximum mode, the code page register is initialized at a
reset to a value loaded from the vector table, and both the code page register and program counter
38
are saved and restored in exception handling.
Data Page Register (DP): The data page register combines with general registers R0 to R3 to
generate a 24-bit effective address. The data page register contains the upper 8 bits of the address.
It is used to calculate effective addresses in the register indirect addressing mode using R0 to R3,
and in the 16-bit absolute addressing mode (@aa:16).
The data page register is rewritten by the LDC instruction.
Extended Page Register (EP): The extended page register combines with general register R4 or
R5 to generate a 24-bit operand address. The extended page register contains the upper 8 bits of
the address. It is used to calculate effective addresses in the register indirect addressing mode
using R4 or R5.
The extended page can be used as an additional data page.
Stack Page Register (TP): The stack page register combines with R6 (FP) or R7 (SP) to
generate a 24-bit stack address. The stack page register contains the upper 8 bits of the address. It
is used to calculate effective addresses in the register indirect addressing mode using R6 or R7, in
exception handling, and subroutine calls.
Base Register (BR): This 8-bit register stores the base address used in the short absolute
addressing mode (@aa:8). In this addressing mode a 16-bit effective address in page 0 is
generated by using the contents of the base register as the upper 8 bits and an address given in the
instruction code as the lower 8 bits. See figure 3-5.
In the short absolute addressing mode the address is always located in page 0.
8 Bits
8 Bits
BR
@ aa : 8
16 Bits (effective address)
Figure 3-5 Short Absolute Addressing Mode and Base Register
39
3.2.3 Initial Register Values
When the CPU is reset, its internal registers are initialized as shown in table 3-3. Note that the
stack pointer (R7) and base register (BR) are not initialized to fixed values. Also, of the page
registers used in maximum mode, only the code page register (CP) is initialized; the other three
page registers come out of the reset state with undetermined values.
Accordingly, in the minimum mode the first instruction executed after a reset should initialize the
stack pointer. The base register must also be initialized before the short absolute addressing mode
(@aa:8) is used.
In the maximum mode, the first instruction executed after a reset should initialize the stack page
register (TP) and the next instruction should initialize the stack pointer. Later instructions should
initialize the base register and the other page registers as necessary.
40
Table 3-3 Initial Values of Registers
Register
General registers
15
R7 – R0
Minimum Mode
Control registers
15
Initial Value
Maximum Mode
0
Undetermined
Undetermined
0
Loaded from vector table
Loaded from vector table
H'070x
(x: undetermined)
H'070x
(x: undetermined)
Undetermined
Loaded from vector table
Undetermined
Undetermined
Undetermined
Undetermined
Undetermined
Undetermined
Undetermined
Undetermined
PC
SR
CCR
15
87
0
T– – – – I2I1I0 – – – – NZVC
7
0
CP
7
0
DP
7
0
EP
7
0
TP
7
0
BR
3.3 Data Formats
The H8/500 can process 1-bit data, 4-bit BCD data, 8-bit (byte) data, 16-bit (word) data, and 32bit (longword) data.
• Bit manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data.
• Decimal arithmetic instructions operate on 4-bit BCD data.
• Almost all instructions operate on byte and word data.
• Multiply and divide instructions operate on longword data.
3.3.1 Data Formats in General Registers
Data of all the sizes above can be stored in general registers as shown in table 3-4.
41
Bit data locations are specified by bit number. Bit 15 is the most significant bit. Bit 0 is the least
significant bit. BCD and byte data are stored in the lower 8 bits of a general register. Word data
use all 16 bits of a general register. Longword data use two general registers: the upper 16 bits
are stored in Rn (n must be an even number); the lower 16 bits are stored in Rn+1.
Operations performed on BCD data or byte data do not affect the upper 8 bits of the register.
Table 3-4 General Register Data Formats
Data Type
Register No.
1-Bit
Data Structure
15
Rn
15
0
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
8
7
6
5
4
3
4
3
2
1
0
BCD
15
Rn
Don’t-care
Upper digit
0
Lower digit
Byte
15
Rn
8
Don’t-care
7
MSB
0
LSB
Word
15
Rn
Longword
0
MSB
LSB
31
Rn*
Rn+1*
16
MSB
Upper 16 bits
Lower 16 bits
15
LSB
0
* For longword data n must be even (0, 2, 4, or 6).
3.3.2 Data Formats in Memory
Table 3-5 indicates the data formats in memory.
Instructions that access bit data in memory have byte or word operands. The instruction specifies
a bit number to indicate a specific bit in the operand.
Access to word data in memory must always begin at an even address. Access to word data
starting at an odd address causes an address error. The upper 8 bits of word data are stored in
address n (where n is an even number); the lower 8 bits are stored in address n+1.
42
Table 3-5 Data Formats in Memory
Data Type
1-Bit (in byte
operand data)
Data Format
7
Address n
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Even address
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Odd address
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Address n
MSB
Even address
MSB
1-Bit (in word
operand data)
Byte
LSB
Word
Odd address
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
LSB
When the stack is accessed in exception processing (to save or restore the program counter, code
page register, or status register), word access is always performed, regardless of the actual data
size. Similarly, when the stack is accessed by an instruction using the pre-decrement or postincrement register indirect addressing mode specifying R7 (@–R7 or @R7+), which is the stack
pointer, word access is performed regardless of the operand size specified in the instruction. An
address error will therefore occur if the stack pointer indicates an odd address. Programs should
be coded so that the stack pointer always indicates an even address.
Table 3-6 shows the data formats on the stack.
43
Table 3-6 Data Formats on the Stack
Data Type
Byte data
on stack
Data Format
Even address
Don’t-care
Odd address
MSB
Even address
MSB
LSB
Word data
on stack
Odd address
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
LSB
3.4 Instructions
3.4.1 Basic Instruction Formats
There are two basic CPU instruction formats: the general format and the special format.
General format: This format consists of an effective address (EA) field, an effective address
extension field, and an operation code (OP) field. The effective address is placed before the
operation code because this results in faster execution of the instruction.
Effective address field
• Effective address field:
Effective address extension
Operation code
One byte containing information used to calculate the effective
address of an operand.
• Effective address extension: Zero to two bytes containing a displacement value, immediate
data, or an absolute address. The size of the effective address
extension is specified in the effective address field.
• Operation code:
Defines the operation to be carried out on the operand located at
the address calculated from the effective address information.
Some instructions (DADD, DSUB, MOVFPE, MOVTPE) have
an extended format in which the operand code is preceded by a
one-byte prefix code.
44
• (Example of prefix code in DADD instruction)
Effective address
Prefix code
Operation code
10100rrr
00000000
10100rrr
Special Format: In this format the operation code comes first, followed by the effective address
field and effective address extension. This format is used in branching instructions, system
control instructions, and other instructions that can be executed faster if the operation is specified
before the operand.
Operation code
Effective address field
Effective address extension
• Operation code: One or two bytes defining the operation to be performed by the instruction.
• Effective address field and effective address extension: Zero to three bytes containing
information used to calculate an effective address.
3.4.2 Addressing Modes
The CPU supports 7 addressing modes: (1) register direct; (2) register indirect; (3) register
indirect with displacement; (4) register indirect with pre-decrement or post-increment; (5)
immediate; (6) absolute; and (7) PC-relative.
Due to the highly orthogonal nature of the instruction set, most instructions having operands can
use any applicable addressing mode from (1) through (6). The PC-relative mode (7) is used by
branching instructions.
In most instructions, the addressing mode is specified in the effective address field. The effectiveaddress extension, if present, contains a displacement, immediate data, or an absolute address.
Table 3-7 indicates how the addressing mode is specified in the effective address field.
45
Table 3-7 Addressing Modes
No.
Addressing Mode
Mnemonic
EA Field
1
Register direct
Rn
1 0 1 0 Sz r r r
*1
EA Extension
None
*2
2
Register indirect
@Rn
1 1 0 1 Sz r r r
None
3
Register indirect
with displacement
@(d:8,Rn)
1 1 1 0 Sz r r r
Displacement (1 byte)
@(d:16,Rn)
1 1 1 1 Sz r r r
Displacement (2 bytes)
Register indirect
with pre-decrement
Register indirect
with post-increment
@–Rn
1 0 1 1 Sz r r r
@Rn+
1 1 0 0 Sz r r r
Immediate
#xx:8
00000100
Immediate data (1 byte)
#xx:16
00001100
Immediate data (2 bytes)
@aa:8
0 0 0 0 Sz 1 0 1
@aa:16
0 0 0 1 Sz 1 0 1
1-Byte absolute address
(offset from BR)
2-Byte absolute address
disp
No EA field.
Addressing mode
is specified in the
operation code.
4
5
6
7
Absolute *3
PC-relative
None
1- or 2-byte displacement
Notes: * 1 Sz: Specifies the operand size.
When Sz = 0: byte operand
When Sz = 1: word operand
* 2 rrr: Register number field, specifying a general register number.
0 0 0 — R0
0 0 1 — R1
0 1 0 — R2
0 1 1 — R3
1 0 0 — R4
1 0 1 — R5
1 1 0 — R6
1 1 1 — R7
* 3 The @aa:8 addressing mode is also referred to as the short absolute addressing mode.
46
3.4.3 Effective Address Calculation
Table 3-8 explains how the effective address is calculated in each addressing mode.
Table 3-8 Effective Address Calculation
No.
1
Addressing Mode Effective Address Calculation
Register direct
—
Rn
1010Sz
rrr
Effective Address
Operand is contents of
Rn
2
Register indirect
@Rn
1101Sz
rrr
23
—
15
DP *1
0
Rn
Or TP or EP *2
3
Register indirect
with displacement
@(d:8,Rn)
1110Sz
rrr
@(d:16,Rn)
1111Sz
rrr
8 Bits
15
0
23
Rn
DP
15
0
Displacement with
sign extension
16 Bits
15
+
0
23
Register indirect
15
with pre-decrement
@–Rn
1011Sz
*1
0
Result
Or TP or EP *2
0
+
0
23
15
DP *1
Rn
1 or 2
rrr
Result
15
DP
Displacement
4
0
Or TP or EP *2
Rn
15
15
*1
–
0
Result
Or TP or EP *2
Rn is decremented by –1 or –2
before instruction execution.*3*4*5
Register indirect
—
with post-increment
@Rn+
Rn is incremented by +1 or +2
1100Sz
rrr
after instruction execution.*3*4*5
47
23
15
DP *1
Or TP or EP *2
0
Rn
Table 3-8 Effective Address Calculation (cont)
No.
5
6
7
Addressing Mode Effective Address Calculation
Absolute address —
@aa:8
0000Sz101
Effective Address
23
15
0
H'00
BR
EA extension data
@aa:16
0001Sz101
—
23
Immediate
#xx:8
00000100
—
Operand is 1-byte EA
extension data.
#xx:16
00001100
—
Operand is 2-byte EA
extension data.
DP
PC-relative
8 Bits
disp:8
15
0
No EA code
PC
Specified in OP code
15
0
Displacement with
sign extension
disp:16
16 Bits
No EA code
15
Specified in OP code
PC
15
23
15
CP
*1
0
Result
⊕
23
15
CP *1
0
0
15
0
EA extension data
0
Result
⊕
Displacement
Notes: * 1 The page register is ignored in minimum mode.
* 2 The page register used in addressing modes 2, 3, and 4 depends on the general register :
DP for R0, R1, R2, or R3; EP for R4 or R5; TP for R6 or R7.
* 3 Decrement by –1 for a byte operand, and by –2 for a word operand.
* 4 The pre-decrement or post-increment is always ±2 when R7 is specified, even if the
operand is byte size.
* 5 The drawing below shows what happens when the @-SP and @ SP+ addressing
modes are used to save and restore the stack pointer.
48
SP
Old SP-2 (upper byte)
SP
Old SP-2 (lower byte)
SP
MOV.W SP, @–SP
MOV.W @SP+.SP
49
3.5 Instruction Set
3.5.1 Overview
The main features of the CPU instruction set are:
• A general-register architecture.
• Orthogonality. Addressing modes and data sizes can be specified independently in each instruction.
• 1.5 addressing modes (supporting register-register and register-memory operations)
• Affinity for high-level languages, particularly C, with short formats for frequently-used
instructions and addressing modes.
• Standard mnemonics, common throughout the H Series.
The CPU instruction set includes 63 types of instructions, listed by function in table 3-9.
Table 3-9 Instruction Classification
Function
Data transfer
Arithmetic operations
Logic operations
Shift
Bit manipulation
Branch
System control
Instructions
MOV, LDM, STM, XCH, SWAP, MOVTPE, MOVFPE
ADD, SUB, ADDS, SUBS, ADDX, SUBX, DADD, DSUB,
MULXU, DIVXU, CMP, EXTS, EXTU, TST, NEG, CLR,
TAS
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL,
ROTXR
BSET, BCLR, BTST, BNOT
Bcc*, JMP, PJMP, BSR, JSR, PJSR, RTS, PRTD,
PRTS, RTD, SCB (/F, /NE, /EQ)
TRAPA, TRAP/VS, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC,
ORC, XORC, NOP, LINK, UNLK
Total
Types
7
17
4
8
4
11
12
63
* Bcc is a conditional branch instruction in which cc represents a condition code.
Tables 3-10 to 3-16 give a concise summary of the instructions in each functional category. The
MOV, ADD, and CMP instructions have special short formats, which are listed in table 3-17. For
detailed descriptions of the instructions, refer to the H8/500 Series Programming Manual.
The notation used in tables 3-10 to 3-17 is defined below.
50
Operation Notation
Rd
General register (destination)
Rs
General register (source)
Rn
General register
(EAd)
Destination operand
(EAs)
Source operand
CCR
Condition code register
N
N (negative) bit of CCR
Z
Z (zero) bit of CCR
V
V (overflow) bit of CCR
C
C (carry) bit of CCR
CR
Control register
PC
Program counter
CP
Code page register
SP
Stack pointer
FP
Frame pointer
#IMM
Immediate data
disp
Displacement
+
Addition
–
Subtraction
×
Multiplication
÷
Division
∧
AND logical
∨
OR logical
⊕
Exclusive OR logical
→
Move
↔
Exchange
¬
Not
51
3.5.2 Data Transfer Instructions
Table 3-10 describes the seven data transfer instructions.
Table 3-10 Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Data
MOV
transfer
MOV:G
MOV:E
MOV:I
MOV:F
MOV:L
MOV:S
LDM
Size*
B/W
B
W
B/W
B/W
B/W
W
STM
W
XCH
W
SWAP
B
MOVTPE
B
MOVFPE
B
Function
(EAs) → (EAd), #IMM → (EAd)
Moves data between two general registers, or between
a general register and memory, or moves immediate data
to a general register or memory.
Stack → Rn (register list)
Pops data from the stack to one or more registers.
Rn (register list) → stack
Pushes data from one or more registers onto the stack.
Rs ↔ Rd
Exchanges data between two general registers.
Rd (upper byte) ↔ Rd (lower byte)
Exchanges the upper and lower bytes in a general register.
Rn → (EAd)
Transfers data from a general register to memory in
synchronization with the E clock.
(EAs) → Rd
Transfers data from memory to a general register in
synchronization with the E clock.
Note: B—byte; W—word
52
3.5.3 Arithmetic Instructions
Table 3-11 describes the 17 arithmetic instructions.
Table 3-11 Arithmetic Instructions
Instruction
Arithmetic ADD
operations
ADD:G
ADD:Q
SUB
ADDS
SUBS
ADDX
SUBX
Size
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
DADD
DSUB
B
B
MULXU
B/W
DIVXU
B/W
CMP
CMP:G
CMP:E
CMP:I
B/W
B
W
Function
Rd ± (EAs) → Rd, (EAd) ± #IMM → (EAd)
Performs addition or subtraction on data in a general
register and data in another general register or memory, or
on immediate data and data in a general register or memory.
Rd ± (EAs) ± C → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on
data in a general register and data in another general
register or memory, or on immediate data and data in a
general register or memory.
(Rd)10 ± (Rs)10 ± C → (Rd)10
Performs decimal addition or subtraction on data in two
general registers.
Rd × (EAs) → Rd
Performs 8-bit × 8-bit or 16-bit × 16-bit unsigned
multiplication on data in a general register and data in
another general register or memory, or on data in a
general register and immediate data.
Rd ÷ (EAs) → Rd
Performs 16-bit ÷ 8-bit or 32-bit ÷ 16-bit unsigned division
on data in a general register and data in another general
register or memory, or on data in a general register and
immediate data.
Rn – (EAs), (EAd) – #IMM
Compares data in a general register with data in another
general register or memory, or with immediate data, or
compares immediate data with data in memory.
Note: B—byte; W—word
53
Table 3-11 Arithmetic Instructions (cont)
Instruction
Arithmetic
operations
EXTS
Size
B
EXTU
B
TST
B/W
NEG
B/W
CLR
B/W
TAS
B
Function
(<bit 7> of <Rd>) → (<bits 15 to 8> of <Rd>)
Converts byte data in a general register to word data by
extending the sign bit.
0 → (<bits 15 to 8> of <Rd>)
Converts byte data in a general register to word data by
padding with zero bits.
(EAd) – 0
Compares general register or memory contents with 0.
0 – (EAd) → (EAd)
Obtains the two’s complement of general register or
memory contents.
0 → (EAd)
Clears general register or memory contents to 0.
(EAd) — 0, (1)2 → (<bit 7> of <EAd>)
Tests general register or memory contents, then sets the
most significant bit (bit 7) to “1.”
Note: B—byte; W—word
3.5.4 Logic Operations
Table 3-12 lists the four instructions that perform logic operations.
Table 3-12 Logic Operation Instructions
Instruction
Logical
operations
AND
Size
B/W
OR
B/W
XOR
B/W
NOT
B/W
Function
Rd∧(EAs) → Rd
Performs a logical AND operation on a general register
and another general register, memory, or immediate data.
Rd∨(EAs) → Rd
Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and
another general register, memory, or immediate data.
Rd⊕(EAs) → Rd
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register
and another general register, memory, or immediate data.
¬ (EAd) → (EAd)
Obtains the one’s complement of general register or memory
contents.
Note: B—byte; W—word
54
3.5.5 Shift Operations
Table 3-13 lists the eight shift instructions.
Table 3-13 Shift Instructions
Instruction
Shift
SHAL
operations SHAR
Size
B/W
B/W
SHLL
SHLR
B/W
B/W
ROTL
ROTR
ROTXL
ROTXR
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
Function
(EAd) shift → (EAd)
Performs an arithmetic shift operation on general register
or memory contents.
(EAd) shift → (EAd)
Performs a logical shift operation on general register or
memory contents.
(EAd) shift → (EAd)
Rotates general register or memory contents.
(EAd) rotate through carry → (EAd)
Rotates general register or memory contents through the
C (carry) bit.
Note: B—byte; W—word
55
3.5.6 Bit Manipulations
Table 3-14 describes the four bit-manipulation instructions.
Table 3-14 Bit-Manipulation Instructions
Instruction
Bit
BSET
manipulations
Size
B/W
BCLR
B/W
BNOT
B/W
BTST
B/W
Function
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z,
1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory, then
sets the bit to “1.” The bit is specified by a bit number
given in immediate data or a general register.
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z,
0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory, then
clears the bit to “0.” The bit is specified by a bit number
given in immediate data or a general register.
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z,
→ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory, then
inverts the bit. The bit is specified by a bit number given
in immediate data or a general register.
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory. The
bit is specified by a bit number given in immediate data or
a general register.
Note: B—byte; W—word
56
3.5.7 Branching Instructions
Table 3-15 describes the 11 branching instructions.
Table 3-15 Branching Instructions
Instruction
Branch
Bcc
Size
—
Function
Branches if condition cc is true.
Mnemonic
BRA (BT)
BRN (BF)
BHI
BLS
BCC (BHS)
Description
Always (true)
Never (false)
High
Low or Same
Carry Clear
(High or Same)
Carry Set (Low)
Not Equal
Equal
Overflow Clear
Overflow Set
Plus
Minus
Greater or Equal
Less Than
Greater Than
Less or Equal
BCS (BLO)
BNE
BEQ
BVC
BVS
BPL
BMI
BGE
BLT
BGT
BLE
JMP
PJMP
BSR
JSR
PJSR
RTS
—
—
—
—
—
—
Condition
True
False
C∨Z=0
C∨Z=1
C=0
C=1
Z=0
Z=1
V=0
V=1
N=0
N=1
N⊕V=0
N⊕V=1
Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 0
Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 1
Branches unconditionally to a specified address in the same page.
Branches unconditionally to a specified address in a specified page.
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address in the same page.
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address in the same page.
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address in a specified page.
Returns from a subroutine in the same page.
57
Table 3-15 Branching Instructions (cont)
Instruction
Branch
PRTS
RTD
Size
—
—
PRTD
—
SCB/F
SCB/NE
SCB/EQ
—
—
—
Function
Returns from a subroutine in a different page.
Returns from a subroutine in the same page and adjusts
the stack pointer.
Returns from a subroutine in a different page and adjusts
the stack pointer.
Controls a loop using a loop counter and/or a specified
termination condition.
58
3.5.8 System Control Instructions
Table 3-16 describes the 12 system control instructions.
Table 3-16 System Control Instructions
Instruction
System
TRAPA
control
TRAP/VS
Size
—
—
RTE
LINK
—
—
UNLK
—
SLEEP
LDC
—
B/W*
STC
B/W*
ANDC
B/W*
ORC
B/W*
XORC
B/W*
NOP
—
Function
Generates a trap exception with a specified vector number.
Generates a trap exception if the V bit is set to “1” when
the instruction is executed.
Returns from an exception-handling routine.
FP → @–SP; SP → FP; SP + #IMM → SP
Creates a stack frame.
FP → SP; @SP+ → FP
Deallocates a stack frame created by the LINK instruction.
Causes a transition to the power-down state.
(EAs) → CR
Moves immediate data or general register or memory
contents to a specified control register.
CR → (EAd)
Moves control register data to a specified general register
or memory location.
CR ∧ #IMM → CR
Logically ANDs a control register with immediate data.
CR ∨ #IMM → CR
Logically ORs a control register with immediate data.
CR ⊕ #IMM → CR
Logically exclusive-ORs a control register with immediate
data.
PC + 1 → PC
No operation. Only increments the program counter.
* The size depends on the control register.
When using the LDC and STC instructions to stack and unstack the BR, CCR, TP, DP, and EP
control registers in the H8/500 family, note the following point.
H8/500 hardware does not permit byte access to the stack. If the LDC.B or STC.B assembler
mnemonic is coded with the @R7 + (@SP+) or @–R7 (@–SP) addressing mode, the stackpointer addressing mode takes precedence and hardware automatically performs word access.
59
Specifically, the LDC.B and STC.B instructions are executed as follows.
The following applies only to the stack-pointer addressing modes. In addressing modes that do not
use the stack pointer, byte data access is performed as specified by the assembler mnemonic.
(1)
STC.B EP, @–SP
When word data access is applied to EP, both EP and DP are accessed. This instruction
stores EP at address SP (old) –2, and DP at address SP (old) –1.
EP
a
Old SP – 2
Old SP – 1
DP
b
Old SP
New SP
a
New SP + 1
b
New SP + 2
After execution
Before execution
(2)
LDC.B @SP+, EP
When word data access is applied to EP, both EP and DP are accessed. This instruction
loads EP from address SP (old), and DP from address SP (old) +1, updating the DP value as
well as the EP value.
Old SP
a
Old SP + 1
b
Old SP + 2
EP
a
New SP – 1
DP
b
DP
b
New SP
After execution
Before execution
(3)
EP
a
New SP – 2
STC.B CCR, @–SP
When word data access is applied to CCR, only CCR is accessed. This instruction stores
identical CCR contents at both address SP (old) –2 and address SP (old) –1.
CCR
a
New SP
a
Old SP – 1
New SP + 1
b
Old SP
New SP + 2
Old SP – 2
Before execution
After execution
60
(4)
LDC.B @SP+, CCR
When word data access is applied to CCR, only CCR is accessed. This instruction loads
CCR from address SP (old) +1. Note that the value in address SP (old) is not loaded.
CCR
Old SP
a
New SP – 2
Old SP + 1
b
New SP – 1
Old SP + 2
CCR
b
New SP
After execution
Before execution
BR, DP, and TP are accessed in the same way as CCR. When DP is specified, both EP and
DP are accessed, but when CCR, BR, DP, or TP is specified, only the specified register is
accessed.
61
3.5.9 Short-Format Instructions
The ADD, CMP, and MOV instructions have special short formats. Table 3-17 lists these short
formats together with the equivalent general formats.
The short formats are a byte shorter than the corresponding general formats, and most of them
execute one state faster.
Table 3-17 Short-Format Instructions and Equivalent General Formats
Short-Format
Execution Equivalent GeneralExecution
Instruction
Length States *2 Format Instruction
Length States *2
ADD:Q #xx,Rd *1
2
2
ADD:G
#xx:8,Rd
3
3
CMP:E #xx:8,Rd
2
2
CMP:G.B #xx:8,Rd
3
3
CMP:I #xx:16,Rd
3
3
CMP:G.W #xx:16,Rd
4
4
MOV:E #xx:8,Rd
2
2
MOV:G.B #xx:8,Rd
3
3
MOV:I #xx:16,Rd
3
3
MOV:G.W #xx:16,Rd
4
4
MOV:L @aa:8,Rd
2
5
MOV:G
@aa:8,Rd
3
5
MOV:S Rs,@aa:8
2
5
MOV:G
Rs,@aa:8
3
5
MOV:F @(d:8,R6),Rd 2
5
MOV:G
@(d:8,R6),Rd 3
5
MOV:F Rs,@(d:8,R6) 2
5
MOV:G
Rs,@(d:8,R6) 3
5
Notes: * 1 The ADD:Q instruction accepts other destination operands in addition to a general
register, but the immediate data value (#xx) is limited to ±1 or ±2.
* 2 Number of execution states for access to on-chip memory.
3.6 Operating Modes
The CPU operates in one of two modes: the minimum mode or the maximum mode.
These modes are selected by the mode pins (MD2 to MD0 ).
3.6.1 Minimum Mode
The minimum mode supports a maximum address space of 64k bytes. The page registers are
ignored. Instructions that branch across page boundaries (PJMP, PJSR, PRTS, PRTD) are invalid.
62
3.6.2 Maximum Mode
In the maximum mode the page registers are valid, expanding the maximum address space to 1M
byte.
The address space is divided into 64k-byte pages. The pages are separate; it is not possible to
move continuously across a page boundary.
It is possible to move from one page to another with branching instructions (PJMP, PJSR, PRTS,
PRTD). The TRAPA instruction and branches to interrupt-handling routines can also jump across
page boundaries. It is not necessary for a program to be contained in a single 64k-byte page.
When data access crosses a page boundary, the program must rewrite the page register before it
can access the data in the next page.
For further information on the operating modes, see section 2, “MCU Operating Modes and
Address Space.”
3.7 Basic Operational Timing
3.7.1 Overview
The CPU operates on a system clock (ø) which is created by dividing an oscillator frequency
(fosc) by two. One period of the system clock is referred to as a “state.” The CPU accesses
memory in a cycle consisting of 2 or 3 states. The CPU uses different methods to access on-chip
memory, the on-chip register field, and external devices.
Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM): For maximum speed, access to on-chip memory
(RAM, ROM) is performed in two states, using a 16-bit-wide data bus.
Figure 3-6 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Figure 3-7 indicates the pin states. The bus
control signals output from the H8/532 chip go to the nonactive state during the access.
Access to On-Chip Register Field (Addresses H'FF80 to H'FFFF): The access cycle consists
of three states. The data bus is 8 bits wide.
Figure 3-8 shows the on-chip supporting module access cycle. Figure 3-9 indicates the pin states.
63
Access to External Devices: The access cycle consists of three states. The data bus is 8 bits
wide. Figure 3-10 (a) and (b) shows the external access cycle. Additional wait states (Tw) can be
inserted by the wait-state controller (WSC).
3.7.2 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
Memory cycle
T1 state
T2 state
ø
Internal address bus
Address
Internal Read signal
Read data
Internal data bus
(Read access)
Internal Write signal
Internal data bus
(Write access)
Write data
Figure 3-6 On-Chip Memory Access Timing
64
3.7.3 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access
T1 state
T2 state
ø
A19 to A 0
R/W (read access)
R/W (write access)
“High”
AS, DS, RD, WR
High-impedance
D 7 to D 0
Figure 3-7 Pin States during Access to On-Chip Memory
65
3.7.4 Register Field Access Cycle (Addresses H'FF80 to H'FFFF)
Memory cycle
T1 state
T2 state
ø
Address
Internal address bus
Internal Read signal
Internal data bus
(read access)
Read data
Internal Write signal
Internal data bus
(write access)
Write data
Figure 3-8 Register Field Access Timing
66
T3 state
3.7.5 Pin States during Register Field Access (Addresses H'FF80 to H'FFFF)
T1 state
T2 state
T3 state
ø
A 19 to A 0
R/W (read access)
R/W (write access)
“High”
AS, DS, RD, WR
High-impedance
D 7 to D0
Figure 3-9 Pin States during Register Field Access
67
3.7.6 External Access Cycle
Read cycle
T1 state
T2 state
T3 state
ø
A19 –A 0
Address
AS
R/W
DS
RD
“High”
WR
D7 –D0
Read data
Figure 3-10 (a) External Access Cycle (Read Access)
68
Write cycle
T1 state
T2 state
T3 state
ø
A19 –A 0
Address
AS
R/W
DS
“High”
RD
WR
D7 –D0
Write data
Figure 3-10 (b) External Access Cycle (Write Access)
3.8 CPU States
3.8.1 Overview
The CPU has five states: the program execution state, exception-handling state, bus-released state,
reset state, and power-down state. The power-down state is further divided into the sleep mode,
software standby mode, and hardware standby mode. Figure 3-11 summarizes these states, and
figure 3-12 shows a map of the state transitions.
69
State
Program execution state
The CPU executes program instructions in sequence.
Exception-handling state
A transient state in which the CPU executes a hardware
sequence (saving the program counter and status register,
fetching a vector from the vector table, etc.) triggered by a reset,
interrupt, or other exception.
Bus-released state
The state in which the CPU has released the external bus in
response to a bus request signal from an external device, and
is waiting for the bus to be returned.
Reset state
The state in which the CPU and all on-chip supporting
modules have been initialized and are stopped.
Power-down state
A state in which some
or all of the clock
signals are stopped to
conserve power.
Sleep mode
Software standby mode
Hardware standby mode
Figure 3-11 Operating States
70
BREQ = “1”
BREQ = “0”
Program execution state
BREQ = “1”
Bus-released state
BREQ = “0”
End of
exception
handling
Request
for exception
handling
SLEEP
SLEEP
instruction
instruction
with standby
flag set
Sleep mode
Interrupt request
NMI
Software standby mode
RES = “1”
Exception-handling
state
Reset state * 1
STBY = “1”, RES = “0”
*2
Hardware standby mode
* 1 From any state except the hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs
whenever RES goes Low.
* 2 A transition to the hardware standby mode from any state occurs when STBY goes Low.
Figure 3-12 State Transitions
3.8.2 Program Execution State
In this state the CPU executes program instructions in normal sequence.
3.8.3 Exception-Handling State
The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal
program flow due to an interrupt, trap instruction, address error, or other exception. In this state
the CPU carries out a hardware-controlled sequence that prepares it to execute a user-coded
exception-handling routine.
71
In the hardware exception-handling sequence the CPU does the following:
1. Saves the program counter and status register (in minimum mode) or program counter, code
page register, and status register (in maximum mode) to the stack.
2. Clears the T bit in the status register to “0.”
3. Fetches the start address of the exception-handling routine from the exception vector table.
4. Branches to that address, returning to the program execution state.
See section 4, “Exception Handling,” for further information on the exception-handling state.
3.8.4 Bus-Released State
When so requested, the CPU can grant control of the external bus to an external device. While an
external device has the bus right, the CPU is said to be in the bus-released state. The bus right is
controlled by two pins:
• BREQ:
• BACK:
Input pin for the Bus Request signal from an external device
Output pin for the Bus Request Acknowledge signal from the CPU, indicating that the
CPU has released the bus
The procedure by which the CPU enters and leaves the bus-released state is:
1. The CPU receives a Low BREQ signal from an external device.
2. The CPU places the address bus pins (A19 – A0), data bus pins (D7 – D0) and bus control pins
(RD, WR, R/W, DS, and AS) in the high-impedance state, sets the BACK pin to the Low level
to indicate that it has released the bus, then halts.
3. The external device that requested the bus (with the BREQ signal) becomes the bus master. It
can use the data bus and address bus. The external device is responsible for manipulating the
bus control signals (RD, WR, R/W, DS, and AS).
4. When the external device finishes using the bus, it clears the BREQ signal to the High level.
The CPU then reassumes control of the bus and returns to the program execution state.
Bus Release Timing: The CPU can release the bus right at the following times:
1. The BREQ signal is sampled during every memory access cycle (instruction prefetch or data
read/write). If BREQ is Low, the CPU releases the bus right at the end of the cycle. (In
word data access to external memory or an address from H'FF80 to H'FFFF, the CPU does
not release the bus right until it has accessed both the upper and lower data bytes.)
2. During execution of the MULXU and DIVXU instructions, since considerable time may
pass without an instruction prefetch or data read/write, BREQ is also sampled at internal
machine cycles, and the bus right is released if BREQ is Low.
3. The bus right can also be released in the sleep mode.
The CPU does not recognize interrupts while the bus is released.
72
Timing Charts: Timing charts of the operation by which the bus is released are shown in
figure 3-13 for the case of bus release during an on-chip memory read cycle, in figure 3-14 for
bus release during an external memory read cycle, and in figure 3-15 for bus release while the
CPU is performing an internal operation.
On-chip memory
Access cycle
T2
T1*
Bus-right release cycle
T2*
TX*
TX
TX
CPU cycle
TX
T1
ø
A19 –A 0
D7 –D0
RD, WR, R/W
DS, AS
BREQ
BACK
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
The BREQ pin is sampled at the start of the T1 state and the Low level is detected.
At the end of the memory access cycle, the BACK pin goes Low and the CPU releases the bus.
While the bus is released, the BREQ pin is sampled at each Tx state.
A High level is detected at the BREQ pin.
The BACK pin is returned to the High level, ending the bus-right release cycle.
Fig. 3-13
* T1 and T2: On-chip memory access states.
Tx : Bus-right released state.
Figure 3-13 Bus-Right Release Cycle (During On-Chip Memory Access Cycle)
73
External access cycle
T1
T2
TW*
Bus-right release cycle
T3
TX*
TX
CPU cycle
TX
T1
ø
A19 –A 0
D7 –D0
RD, WR
R/W, DS
BREQ
BACK
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(4)
The BREQ pin is sampled at the start of the TW state and the Low level is detected.
At the end of the external access cycle, the BACK pin goes Low and the CPU releases the bus.
The BREQ pin is sampled at the TX state and a High level is detected.
The BACK pin is returned to the High level, ending the bus-right release cycle.
* TW : Wait state.
TX : Bus-right released state.
Fig. 3-14
Figure 3-14 Bus-Right Release Cycle (During External Access Cycle)
74
External access cycle
Ti *
Ti
Ti
Bus-right release cycle
Ti
TX*
TX
CPU cycle
TX
T1
ø
A19 –A 0
D7 –D0
RD, WR
R/W, DS
BREQ
BACK
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(4)
The BREQ pin is sampled at the start of a TI state and the Low level is detected.
At the end of the internal operation cycle, the BACK pin goes Low and the CPU releases the bus.
The BREQ pin is sampled at the TX state and a High level is detected.
The BACK pin is returned to the High level, ending the bus-right release cycle.
Fig. 3-15
* TI : Internal CPU operation state.
TX : Bus-right released state.
Figure 3-15 Bus-Right Release Cycle (During Internal CPU Operation)
75
Notes: The BREQ signal must be held Low until BACK goes Low. If BREQ returns to the High
level before BACK goes Low, the bus release operation may be executed incorrectly.
To leave the bus-released state, the High level at the BREQ pin must be sampled two times. If the
BREQ returns to Low before it is sampled two times, the bus released cycle will not end.
The bus release operation is enabled only when the BRLE bit in the port 1 control register (P1CR)
is set to “1.” When this bit is cleared to “0” (its initial value), the BREQ and BACK pins are used
for general-purpose input and output, as P13 and P12.
An instruction that sets the BRLE bit is: BSET.B #3, @H'FFFC
Note the following point when using the H8/532’s release function.
If the BREQ signal is asserted and an interrupt is requested simultaneously during execution of the
SLEEP instruction, the BACK signal may fail to be output even though the CPU has released the
bus. This may cause the system to stop for the interval during which BREQ is asserted, with no
device in control of the bus. The interrupts that can cause this state include NMI, IRQ, and all the
interrupts from on-chip supporting modules. When the BREQ signal is deasserted, ending this
state, the CPU takes control of the bus again and resumes normal instruction execution.
The following methods can be used to avoid entering this state.
Method 1: If the BREQ signal is used, do not use the SLEEP instruction.
Method 2: Disable the BREQ signal during execution of the SLEEP instruction. This can be
done by clearing the bus release enable bit (BRLE) in the port 1 control register (P1CR) to 0
immediately bifore executing the SLEEP instruction. (When the BRLE bit is cleared, low inputs
on the BREQ line are not latched on-chip.) Place instructions to set the BRLE bit to 1 at the
beginning of interrupt-handling routines. If the data transfer controller (DTC) is used, place an
instruction to set the BRLE bit immediately after the SLEEP instruction.
If method 2 is used, BREQ inputs will be ignored while the chip is in sleep mode.
(Coding example)
Main Program
BCLR.B
SLEEP
BSET.B
Interrupt-Handling Routine
BSET.B #3, @P1CR
#3, @P1CR
#3, @P1CR
RTE
76
3.8.5 Reset State
In the reset state, the CPU and all on-chip supporting modules are initialized and placed in the
stopped state. The CPU enters the reset state whenever the RES pin goes Low, unless the CPU is
currently in the hardware standby mode. It remains in the reset state until the RES pin goes High.
See section 4.2, “Reset,” for further information on the reset state.
3.8.6 Power-Down State
The power-down state comprises three modes: the sleep mode, the software standby mode, and
the hardware standby mode.
See section 18, “Power-Down State,” for further information.
77
3.9 Programming Notes
3.9.1 Restriction on Address Location
The following restriction applies when instructions are located in on-chip RAM.
• Restriction
Instruction execution cannot proceed continuously from an external address to on-chip RAM in
the ZTAT versions. This restriction does not apply to versions with masked ROM.
• Solution
To execute instructions located in on-chip RAM, use a branch instruction (examples: Bcc, JMP,
etc.) to branch to the first instruction located in on-chip RAM. Do not place instruction code in
the last three bytes of external memory (H'FB7D to H'FB7F).
H'FB7A
NOP
H'FB7A
NOP
H'FB7B
NOP
H'FB7B
BRA
H'FB7C
NOP
H'FB7C
disp
H'FB7D
NOP
H'FB7D
H'FB7E
NOP
H'FB7E
H'FB7F
NOP
H'FB80
NOP
H'FB81
NOP
Do not
place
instruction
code here
H'FB7F
Not
executable
H'FB80
NOP
H'FB81
NOP
Execution Disabled
Execution Enabled
78
Branch
3.9.2 Note on MULXU Instruction
Note that in the case described below, the H8/532 multiply instruction does not give correct
results.
(1)
Problem
The result of a squaring operation such as MULXU.B Rn, Rn is indeterminate. This problem
occurs when the same register is specified for the source and destination of a byte
multiplication operation.
This problem occurs only in ZTAT versions of the H8/532. It does not occur in versions
with masked ROM.
(2)
Solution
The problem can be avoided by the following methods.
➀ Place the source and destination operands in different registers.
Example: MULXU.B R4, R4
→
MOV.W R4, R5
MULXU.B R5, R4
➁ Use a word multiplication instruction.
Example: MULXU.B R4, R4
→
➂ Place one of the operands in memory.
Example: MULXU.B R4, R4
→
MULXU.W R4, R4
MOV.W R5, R4
MOV.W R4, @–SP
MULXU.B @(1,SP), R4
ADDS #2, SP
This problem occurs only in the H8/532. It does not occur in other chips in the H8/500
Series (such as the H8/520).
(3)
Note on usage of C compiler
Programmers using the C compiler should bear the following programming note in mind.
• Conditions under which the compiler generates a MULXU.B Rn, Rn instruction
The C compiler generates a MULXU.B Rn, Rn instruction when the following two conditions
are satisfied in the source program:
79
➀ A one-byte variable (char or unsigned char) is declared as a register variable.
➁ The variable declared as in ➀ is squared by compound substitution
Example: register char a;
a *= a;
• Solution
The problem can be avoided as follows:
➀ In the example above, do not declare the variable (a) as a register variable.
Example: register char a;
→
char a;
a *= a;
a *= a;
➁ When squaring one-byte data, do not use compound substitution. Code as follows:
Example: a *= a;
→
a = a * a;
80
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.1 Overview
4.1.1 Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority
As indicated in table 4-1 (a) and (b), exception handling can be initiated by a reset, address error,
trace, interrupt, or instruction. An instruction initiates exception handling if the instruction is an
invalid instruction, a trap instruction, or a DIVXU instruction with zero divisor. Exception
handling begins with a hardware exception-handling sequence which prepares for the execution of
a user-coded software exception-handling routine.
There is a priority order among the different types of exceptions, as shown in table 4-1 (a). If two
or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are handled in their order of priority. An
instruction exception cannot occur simultaneously with other types of exceptions.
Table 4-1 (a) Exceptions and Their Priority
High
Exception
Type
Source
Detection Timing
Start of ExceptionHandling Sequence
Reset
External
RES Low-to-High transition
Immediately
Address error
Internal
Instruction fetch or data read/write
bus cycle
End of instruction
execution
Trace
Internal
End of instruction execution, if
T = “1” in status register
End of instruction
execution
Interrupt
External,
internal
End of instruction execution or end
of exception-handling sequence
End of instruction
execution
Low
Table 4-1 (b) Instruction Exceptions
Exception Type
Start of Exception-Handling Sequence
Invalid instruction
Attempted execution of instruction with undefined code
Trap instruction
Started by execution of trap instruction
Zero divide
Attempted execution of DIVXU instruction with zero divisor
81
4.1.2 Hardware Exception-Handling Sequence
The hardware exception-handling sequence varies depending on the type of exception. When
exception handling is initiated by a factor other than a reset, the CPU:
1. Saves the program counter and status register (in minimum mode) or program counter, code
page register, and status register (in maximum mode) to the stack.
2. Clears the T bit in the status register to “0.”
3. Fetches the start address of the exception-handling routine from the exception vector table.
4. Branches to that address.
For an interrupt, the CPU also alters the interrupt mask level in bits I2 to I0 of the status register.
For a reset, step 1 is omitted. See section 4.2, “Reset,” for the full reset sequence.
4.1.3 Exception Factors and Vector Table
The factors that initiate exception handling can be classified as shown in figure 4-1.
The starting addresses of the exception-handling routines for each factor are contained in an
exception vector table located in the low addresses of page 0. The vector addresses are listed in
table 4-2. Note that there are different addresses for the minimum and maximum modes.
82
• Reset
External
interrupt
NMI
IRQ0
IRQ1
• Interrupt
Internal
interrupt
Internal interrupt requested by
on-chip module
Exception
• Address error
• Trace
Invalid instruction
• Instruction
Zero divide
TRAPA instruction
TRAP/VS instruction
Figure 4-1 Types of Factors Causing Exception Handling
83
Table 4-2 Exception Vector Table
Type of Exception
Reset (initialize PC)
— (Reserved for system)
Invalid instruction
DIVXU instruction (zero divide)
TRAP/VS instruction
— (Reserved for system)
Address error
Trace
— (Reserved for system)
Nonmaskable external interrupt (NMI)
— (Reserved for system)
TRAPA instruction (16 vectors)
External interrupts
Internal interrupts *2
IRQ0
IRQ1
Vector Address
Minimum Mode
Maximum Mode *1
H'0000 to H'0001
H'0000 to H'0003
H'0002 to H'0003
H'0004 to H'0007
H'0004 to H'0005
H'0008 to H'000B
H'0006 to H'0007
H'000C to H'000F
H'0008 to H'0009
H'0010 to H'0013
H'000A to H'000B
H'0014 to H'0017
to
to
H'000E to H'000F
H'001C to H'001F
H'0010 to H'0011
H'0020 to H'0023
H'0012 to H'0013
H'0024 to H'0027
H'0014 to H'0015
H'0028 to H'002B
H'0016 to H'0017
H'002C to H'002F
H'0018 to H'0019
H'0030 to H'0033
to
to
H'001E to H'001F
H'003C to H'003F
H'0020 to H'0021
H'0040 to H'0043
to
to
H'003E to H'003F
H'007C to H'007F
H'0040 to H'0041
H'0080 to H'0083
H'0042 to H'0043
H'0084 to H'0087
H'0044 to H'0045
H'0088 to H'008B
to
to
H'007E to H'007F
H'00FC to H'00FF
Notes: * 1. The exception vector table is located at the beginning of page 0.
* 2. For details of the internal interrupt vectors, see table 5-2.
84
4.2 Reset
4.2.1 Overview
A reset has the highest exception-handling priority.
When the RES pin goes Low, all current processing is halted and the H8/532 chip enters the reset
state.
A reset initializes the internal status of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting
modules and I/O ports. It does not initialize the on-chip RAM.
When the RES pin returns from Low to High, the H8/532 chip comes out of the reset state and
begins executing the hardware reset sequence.
4.2.2 Reset Sequence
The Reset signal is detected when the RES pin goes Low.
To ensure that the H8/532 is reset, the RES pin should be held Low for at least 20ms at power-up.
To reset the H8/532 during operation, the RES pin should be held Low for at least 6 ø clock
cycles. See table D-1, “Status of Ports” in Appendix D for the status of other pins in the reset
state.
When the RES pin returns to the High state after being held Low for the necessary time, the
hardware reset exception-handling sequence begins, during which:
1. The value at the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) is latched in bits MDS2 to MDS0 of the mode
control register (MDCR).
2. In the status register (SR), the T bit is cleared to disable the trace mode, and the interrupt mask
level (bits I2 to I0) is set to 7. A reset disables all interrupts, including NMI.
3. The CPU loads the reset start address from the vector table into the program counter and begins
executing the program at that address.
The contents of the vector table differs between minimum mode and maximum mode as indicated
in figure 4-2. This affects step 3 as follows:
Minimum mode: One word is copied from addresses H'0000 and H'0001 in the vector table to
the program counter. Program execution then begins from the address in the program counter
(PC).
85
Maximum Mode: Two words are read from addresses H'0000 to H'0003 in the vector table. The
byte in address H'0000 is ignored. The byte in address H'0001 is copied to the code page register
(CP). The contents of addresses H'0002 and H'0003 are copied to the program counter. Program
execution starts from the address indicated by the code page register and program counter.
H’0000
PC (Upper)
H’0000
Don’t care
H’0001
PC (Lower)
H’0001
CP
H’0002
PC (Upper)
H’0003
PC (Lower)
(1) Minimum mode
(2) Maximum mode
Figure 4-2 Reset Vector
Figure 4-3 shows the timing of the reset sequence in minimum mode. Figure 4-4 shows the
timing of the reset sequence in maximum mode.
4.2.3 Stack Pointer Initialization
The hardware reset sequence does not initialize the stack pointer, so this must be done by
software. If an interrupt were to be accepted after a reset and before the stack pointer (SP) is
initialized, the program counter and status register would not be saved correctly, causing a
program crash. This danger can be avoided by coding the reset routine as explained next.
When the chip comes out of the reset state all interrupts, including NMI, are disabled, so the
instruction at the reset start address is always executed. In the minimum mode, this instruction
should initialize the stack pointer (SP). In the maximum mode, this instruction should be an LDC
instruction initializing the stack page register (TP), and the next instruction should initialize the
stack pointer. Execution of the LDC instruction disables interrupts again, ensuring that the stack
pointer initializing instruction is executed.
86
Fig. 4-3
Figure 4-3 Reset Sequence (Minimum Mode, On-Chip Memory)
87
Minimum 6 states
(1) Instruction prefetch address
(2) Operation code
(2)
(1)
Reset
vector
(3) Program start address
(4) First instruction of program
Internal processing cycle
Vector
Vector
address
Prefetch first
instruction
of program
(4)
(3)
Instruction
execution
cycle
Note: This timing chart applies to the minimum mode when the program and stack areas are both in on-chip memory and the program starts at an even address.
Internal
Write
signal
Internal
Read
signal
Internal data
bus (16 bits)
Internal
address
bus
RES
ø
Figure 4-4 Reset Sequence (Maximum Mode, External Memory)
88
Vector
PC H
Vector
address + 2
Reset vector
Vector
CP
don’t
care
(1) Program start address
(2) First instruction of program
Internal processing
cycle
Vector
address + 1
Vector
address
Vector
PC L
Vector
address + 3
(2)
(1)
Prefetch first instruction of program
Note: This diagram applies to maximum mode when the program area and vector table are both in external memory.
After a reset, the wait-state controller inserts three wait states in each bus cycle.
Write signal
LWR, HWR
Read signal
RD
D15 to D0
A 23 to A 0
RES
ø
Instruction
execution
cycle
4.3 Address Error
There are three causes of address errors:
• Illegal instruction prefetch
• Word data access at odd address
• Off-chip access in single-chip mode
An address error initiates the address error exception-handling sequence. This sequence clears the
T bit of the status register to “0” to disable the trace mode, but does not affect the interrupt mask
level in bits I2 to I0.
4.3.1 Illegal Instruction Prefetch
An attempt to prefetch an instruction from the register field in memory addresses H'FF80 to
H'FFFF causes an address error regardless of the MCU operating mode.
Handling of this address error begins when the prefetch cycle that caused the error has been
completed and execution of the current instruction has also been completed. The program counter
value pushed on the stack is the address of the instruction immediately following the last
instruction executed.
Program code should not be located in addresses H'FF7D to H'FF7F. If the CPU executes an
instruction in these addresses, it will attempt to prefetch the next instruction from the register
field, causing an address error.
4.3.2 Word Data Access at Odd Address
If an attempt is made to access word data starting at an odd address, an address error occurs
regardless of the MCU operating mode. The program counter value pushed on the stack in the
handling of this error is the address of the next instruction (or next but one) after the instruction
that attempted the illegal word access.
4.3.3 Off-Chip Address Access in Single-Chip Mode
In the single-chip mode there is no external memory, so in addition to the address errors described
above, the following two types of address errors can occur.
Access to Addresses H'8000 to H'FB7F: These addresses exist neither in on-chip ROM or RAM
nor in the on-chip register field, so an address error occurs if they are accessed for any purpose:
for instruction prefetch, byte data access, or word data access.
89
Access to Disabled RAM Area: The on-chip RAM area (H'FB80 to H'FF7F) can be disabled by
clearing the RAME bit in the RAM control register (RAMCR). If RAM access is attempted in
this state in the single-chip mode, an address error occurs.
4.4 Trace
When the T bit of the status register is set to “1,” the CPU operates in trace mode. A trace
exception occurs at the completion of each instruction. The trace mode can be used to execute a
program for debugging by a debugger.
In the trace exception sequence the T bit of the status register is cleared to “0” to disable the trace
mode while the trace routine is executing. The interrupt mask level in bits I2 to I0 is not changed.
Interrupts are accepted as usual during the trace routine.
In the status-register data saved on the stack, the T bit is set to “1.” When the trace routine returns
with the RTE instruction, the status register is popped from the stack and the trace mode resumes.
If an address error occurs during execution of the first instruction after the return from the trace
routine, since the address error has higher priority, the address error exception-handling sequence
is initiated, clearing the T bit in the status register to “0” and making it impossible to trace this
instruction.
4.5 Interrupts
Interrupts can be requested from three external sources (NMI, IRQ0, and IRQ1) and seven on-chip
supporting modules: the 16-bit free-running timers (FRT1 to FRT3), the 8-bit timer, the serial
communication interface (SCI), the A/D converter, and the watchdog timer (WDT). The on-chip
interrupt sources can request a total of nineteen different types of interrupts, each having its own
interrupt vector. Figure 4-5 lists the interrupt sources and the number of different interrupts from
each source.
Each interrupt source has a priority. NMI interrupts have the highest priority, and are normally
accepted unconditionally. The priorities of the other interrupt sources are set in control registers
(IPR A to D) in the register field at the high end of page 0 and can be changed by software.
Priority levels range from 0 (low) to 7 (high), with NMI considered to be on level 8.
The on-chip interrupt controller decides whether an interrupt can be accepted by comparing its
priority with the interrupt mask level, and determines the order in which to accept competing
interrupt requests. Interrupts that are not accepted immediately remain pending until they can be
accepted later.
90
When it accepts an interrupt, the interrupt controller also decides whether to interrupt the CPU or
start the on-chip data transfer controller (DTC). This decision is controlled by bits set in four data
transfer enable registers (DTE A to D) in the register field. The DTC is started if the corresponding
DTE bit is set to “1;” otherwise a CPU interrupt is generated. DTC interrupts provide an efficient
way to send and receive blocks of data via the serial communication interface, or to transfer data
between memory and I/O without detailed CPU programming. The CPU stops while the DTC is
operating. DTC interrupts are described in section 6, “Data Transfer Controller.”
The hardware exception-handling sequence for a CPU interrupt clears the T bit in the status
register to “0” and sets the interrupt mask level in bits I2 to I0 to the level of the interrupt it has
accepted. This prevents the interrupt-handling routine from being interrupted except by a higherlevel interrupt. The previous interrupt mask level is restored on the return from the interrupthandling routine.
For further information on interrupts, see section 5, “Interrupt Controller.”
External
interrupts
NMI (1)
IRQ0 (1)
IRQ1 (1)
Interrupt
sources
16-Bit FRT1 (4)
16-Bit FRT2 (4)
16-Bit FRT3 (4)
Internal
interrupts
8-Bit timer (3)
SCI (3)
A/D converter (1)
NMI:
IRQ:
FRT:
SCI:
WDT:
NonMaskable Interrupt
Interrupt Request
Free-Running Timer
Serial Communication Interface
WatchDog Timer
WDT*
* Interrupts from the watchdog timer are handled as NMI or IRQ0.
Figure 4-5 Interrupt Sources (and Number of Interrupt Types)
91
4.6 Invalid Instruction
An invalid instruction exception occurs if an attempt is made to execute an instruction with an
undefined operation code or illegal addressing mode specification. The program counter value
pushed on the stack is the value of the program counter when the invalid instruction code was
detected.
In the invalid instruction exception-handling sequence the T bit of the status register is cleared to
“0,” but the interrupt mask level (I2 to I0) is not affected.
4.7 Trap Instructions and Zero Divide
A trap exception occurs when the TRAPA or TRAP/VS instruction is executed. A zero divide
exception occurs if an attempt is made to execute a DIVXU instruction with a zero divisor.
In the exception-handling sequences for these exceptions the T bit of the status register is cleared
to “0,” but the interrupt mask level (I2 to I0) is not affected. If a normal interrupt is requested
while a trap or zero-divide instruction is being executed, after the trap or zero-divide exceptionhandling sequence, the normal interrupt exception-handling sequence is carried out.
TRAPA Instruction: The TRAPA instruction always causes a trap exception. The TRAPA
instruction includes a vector number from 0 to 15, allowing the user to provide up to sixteen
different trap-handling routines.
TRAP/VS Instruction: When the TRAP/VS instruction is executed, a trap exception occurs if
the overflow (V) bit in the condition code register is set to “1.” If the V bit is cleared to “0,” no
exception occurs and the next instruction is executed.
DIVXU Instruction with Zero Divisor: An exception occurs if an attempt is made to divide
by zero in a DIVXU instruction.
4.8 Cases in Which Exception Handling is Deferred
In the cases described next, the address error exception, trace exception, external interrupt (NMI,
IRQ0, and IRQ1) requests, and internal interrupt requests (19 types) are not accepted immediately
but are deferred until after the next instruction has been executed.
4.8.1 Instructions that Disable Interrupts
Interrupts are disabled immediately after the execution of five instructions: XORC, ORC, ANDC,
LDC, and RTE.
Suppose that an internal interrupt is requested and the interrupt controller, after checking the
interrupt priority and interrupt mask level, notifies the CPU of the interrupt, but the CPU is
92
currently executing one of the five instructions listed above. After executing this instruction the
CPU always proceeds to the next instruction. (And if the next instruction is one of these five, the
CPU also proceeds to the next instruction after that.) The exception-handling sequence starts after
the next instruction that is not one of these five has been executed. The following is an example:
(Example)
.
.
.
.
.
.
LDC.B #H'00,TP
MOV.W #H'FF80,SP
Program flow
←
Interrupt controller notifies CPU
of interrupt request
CPU executes the instruction next to LDC before
starting exception handling
MOV.B #H'00,@WCR
To exception-handling sequence
.
.
.
4.8.2 Disabling of Exceptions Immediately after a Reset
If an interrupt is accepted after a reset and before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the program
counter and status register will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this,
when the chip comes out of the reset state all interrupts, including the NMI, are disabled, so the
first instruction of the reset routine is always executed. As noted earlier, in the minimum mode,
this instruction should initialize the stack pointer (SP). In the maximum mode, the first instruction
should be an LDC instruction that initializes the stack page register (TP); the next instruction
should initialize the stack pointer.
4.8.3 Disabling of Interrupts after a Data Transfer Cycle
If an interrupt starts the data transfer controller and another interrupt is requested during the data
transfer cycle, when the data transfer cycle ends, the CPU always executes the next instruction
before handling the second interrupt.
Even if a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) occurs during a data transfer cycle, it is not accepted until
the next instruction has been executed. An example of this is shown below.
93
(Example)
.
.
.
.
.
Program flow
← DTC interrupt request
ADD.W R2,R0
Data transfer cycle
← NMI interrupt request
MOV.W R0,@H'FF00
After data transfer cycle, CPU
executes next instruction before
branching to exception handling
MOV.W #H'FF02,R0
.
.
.
To NMI exception-handling sequence
4.9 Stack Status after Completion of Exception Handling
The status of the stack after an exception-handling sequence is described below.
Table 4-3 shows the stack after completion of the exception-handling sequence for various types
of exceptions in the minimum and maximum modes.
Table 4-3 Stack after Exception Handling Sequence
Exception Factor
Trace
Interrupt
Trap
SP
Minimum Mode
Maximum Mode
SR (upper byte)
TP:SP
SR (upper byte)
SR (lower byte)
SR (lower byte)
Next instruction address (upper byte)
Don’t-care
Next instruction address (lower byte)
Next instruction page (8 bits)
Next instruction address (upper byte)
Next instruction address (lower byte)
Zero divide
(DIVXU)
Note: The RTE instruction returns to the next instruction after the instruction being executed when
the exception occurred.
94
Table 4-3 Stack after Exception Handling Sequence (cont)
Exception Factor
Invalid
instruction
SP
Minimum Mode
Maximum Mode
SR (upper byte)
TP:SP
SR (lower byte)
SR (upper byte)
SR (lower byte)
PC when error occurred (upper byte)
Don’t-care
PC when error occurred (lower byte)
CP when error occurred (8 bits)
PC when error occurred (upper byte)
PC when error occurred (lower byte)
Note: The program counter value pushed on the stack is not necessarily the address of the first
byte of the invalid instruction.
Address
error
SP
SR (upper byte)
TP:SP
SR (upper byte)
SR (lower byte)
SR (lower byte)
PC when error occurred (upper byte)
Don’t-care
PC when error occurred (lower byte)
CP when error occurred (8 bits)
PC when error occurred (upper byte)
PC when error occurred (lower byte)
Note: The program counter value pushed on the stack is the address of the next instruction after
the last instruction successfully executed.
95
4.9.1 PC Value Pushed on Stack for Trace, Interrupts, Trap Instructions, and Zero Divide
Exceptions
The program counter value pushed on the stack for a trace, interrupt, trap, or zero divide exception
is the address of the next instruction at the time when the interrupt was accepted. The RTE
instruction accordingly returns to the next instruction after the instruction executed before the
exception-handling sequence.
4.9.2 PC Value Pushed on Stack for Address Error and Invalid Instruction Exceptions
The program counter value pushed on the stack for an address error or invalid instruction
exception differs depending on the conditions when the exception occurred.
4.10 Notes on Use of the Stack
If the stack pointer is set to an odd address, an address error will occur when the stack is accessed
during interrupt handling or for a subroutine call. The stack pointer should always point to an
even address. To keep the stack pointer pointing to an even address, a program should use word
data size when saving or restoring registers to and from the stack.
In the @–SP or @SP+ addressing mode, the CPU performs word access even if the instruction
specifies byte size. (This is not true in the @–Rn and @Rn+ addressing modes when Rn is a
register from R0 to R6.)
96
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.1 Overview
The interrupt controller decides which interrupts to accept, and how to deal with multiple
interrupts. It also decides whether an interrupt should be served by the CPU or by the data
transfer controller (DTC). This section explains the features of the interrupt controller, describes
its internal structure and control registers, and details the handling of interrupts.
For detailed information on the data transfer controller, see section 6, “Data Transfer Controller.”
5.1.1 Features
Three main features of the interrupt controller are:
• Interrupt priorities are user-programmable.
User programs can set priority levels from 7 (high) to 0 (low) in four interrupt priority (IPR)
registers for IRQ0, IRQ1, and each of the on-chip supporting modules—for every interrupt, that
is, except the nonmaskable interrupt (NMI). NMI has the highest priority level (8) and is
normally always accepted. An interrupt with priority level 0 is always masked.
• Multiple interrupts on the same level are served in a default priority order.
Lower-priority interrupts remain pending until higher-priority interrupts have been handled.
• For most interrupts, software can select whether to have the interrupt served by the CPU or the
on-chip data transfer controller (DTC).
User programs can make this selection by setting and clearing bits in four data transfer enable
(DTE) registers. The data transfer controller can be started by any interrupts except NMI, the
error interrupt (ERI) from the on-chip serial communication interface, and the overflow
interrupts (FOVI and OVI) from the on-chip timers.
97
5.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 5-1 shows the block configuration of the interrupt controller.
Interrupt controller
NMI
request
NMI
IRQ0
FRT3
8 bits timer
Comparator
FRT2
Interrupt
request
SCI
A/D converter
DTEA to DTED
Interrupt
request
signals
from
modules
Priority decision
FRT1
IPRA to IPRD
IRQ1
DTC
request
I2
I1
I0
SR (CPU)
FRT: 16 Bits Free Running Timer
SCI: Serial Communication Interface
SR: Status Register
IPR: Interrupt Priority Register
DTE: Data Transfer Enable Register
Figure 5-1 Interrupt Controller Block Diagram
98
5.1.3 Register Configuration
The four interrupt priority registers (IPRA to IPRD) and four data transfer enable registers (DTEA
to DTED) are 8-bit registers located at addresses H'FFF0 to H'FFF7 in the register field in page 0
of the address space. Table 5-1 lists their attributes.
Table 5-1 Interrupt Controller Registers
Name
Interrupt
priority
register
Data transfer
enable
register
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
Abbreviation
IPRA
IPRB
IPRC
IPRD
DTEA
DTEB
DTEC
DTED
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address
H'FFF0
H'FFF1
H'FFF2
H'FFF3
H'FFF4
H'FFF5
H'FFF6
H'FFF7
Initial Value
H'00
H'00
H'00
H'00
H'00
H'00
H'00
H'00
5.2 Interrupt Types
There are 22 distinct types of interrupts: 3 external interrupts originating off-chip and 19 internal
interrupts originating in the on-chip supporting modules.
5.2.1 External Interrupts
The three external interrupts are NMI, IRQ0, and IRQ1.
NMI (NonMaskable Interrupt): This interrupt has the highest priority level (8) and cannot be
masked. An NMI is generated by input to the NMI pin, and can also be generated by a watchdog
timer (WDT) overflow. The input at the NMI pin is edge-sensed. A user program can select
whether to have the interrupt occur on the rising edge or falling edge of the NMI input by setting
or clearing the nonmaskable interrupt edge bit (NMIEG) in the port 1 control register (P1CR).
In the NMI exception-handling sequence, the T (Trace) bit in the CPU status register (SR) is
cleared to “0,” and the interrupt mask level in I2 to I0 is set to 7, masking all other interrupts. The
interrupt controller holds the NMI request until the NMI exception-handling sequence begins, then
clears the NMI request, so if another interrupt is requested at the NMI pin during the NMI
exception-handling sequence, the NMI exception-handling sequence will be carried out again.
A watchdog timer overflow generates an NMI if the TME and WT/IT bits in the watchdog timer's
status/control register are both set to “1.” See section 13, “Watchdog Timer” for details.
99
Coding Examples:
To select the rising edge of the NMI input:
To select the falling edge of the NMI input:
BSET.B #4, @H'FFFC
BCLR.B #4, @H'FFFC
IRQ0 (Interrupt Request 0): An IRQ0 interrupt can be requested by a Low input to the IRQ0 pin
and/or a watchdog timer overflow. A Low IRQ0 input requests an IRQ0 interrupt if the interrupt
request enable 0 bit (IRQ0E) in the P1CR is set to “1.” IRQ0 must be held Low until the CPU
accepts the interrupt. Otherwise the request will be ignored. A watchdog timer overflow requests
an IRQ0 interrupt if the TME bit is set to “1” and the WT/IT bit is cleared to “0” in the watchdog
timer's control/status register. See section 13, “Watchdog Timer” for details of the watchdog
timer.
The IRQ0 interrupt can be assigned any priority level from 7 to 0 by setting the corresponding
value in the upper four bits of IPRA. If bit 4 of data transfer enable register A (DTEA) is set to
“1,” an IRQ0 interrupt starts the data transfer controller. Otherwise the interrupt is served by the
CPU.
In the CPU interrupt-handling sequence for IRQ0, the T bit of the status register is cleared to “0,”
and the interrupt mask level is set to the value in the upper four bits of IPRA.
Coding Examples:
To enable IRQ0 to be requested by IRQ0 input:
To assign priority level 7 to IRQ0:
To have IRQ0 start the DTC:
BSET.B #5, @H'FFFC
OR.B #70, @H'FFF0
BSET.B #4, @H'FFF4
IRQ1 (Interrupt Request 1): An IRQ0 interrupt is requested by a High-to-Low transition at the
IRQ1 pin. The IRQ1 interrupt is enabled only when the interrupt request enable 1 bit (IRQ1E) in
the P1CR is set to “1.”
The IRQ1 interrupt can be assigned any priority level from 7 (high) to 0 (low) by setting the
corresponding value in the lower four bits of IPRA. If bit 0 of data transfer enable register A
(DTEA) is set to “1,” an IRQ1 interrupt starts the data transfer controller. Otherwise the interrupt
is served by the CPU.
The interrupt controller holds the IRQ1 request until the IRQ1 exception-handling sequence
begins, then clears the IRQ1 request. If another interrupt is requested at the IRQ1 pin during the
IRQ1 interrupt-handling routine, the request is held, but the IRQ1 exception-handling sequence is
not carried out immediately because the interrupt is masked by bits I2 to I0 in the status register.
On return from the interrupt-handling routine one more instruction is executed, then the
exception-handling sequence for the second IRQ1 interrupt is carried out.
100
In the CPU interrupt-handling sequence for IRQ1, the T bit of the CPU status register is cleared to
“0,” and the interrupt mask level is set to the value in the lower four bits of IPRA.
Coding Examples:
To enable IRQ1 to be requested by IRQ1 input:
To assign priority level 7 to IRQ0 and level 5 to IRQ1:
To have IRQ1 start the DTC:
BSET.B #6, @H'FFFC
MOV.B #75, @H'FFF0
BSET.B #0, @H'FFF4
5.2.2 Internal Interrupts
Nineteen types of internal interrupts can be requested by the on-chip supporting modules. Each
interrupt is separately vectored in the exception vector table, so it is not necessary for the usercoded interrupt handler routine to determine which type of interrupt has occurred.
Each of the internal interrupts can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing an enable bit in the
control register of the on-chip supporting module.
An interrupt priority level from 7 to 0 can be assigned to each on-chip supporting module by
setting interrupt priority registers B to D. Within each module, different interrupts have a fixed
priority order. For most of these interrupts, values set in data transfer enable registers B to D can
select whether to have the interrupt served by the CPU or the data transfer controller.
In the CPU interrupt-handling sequence, the T bit of the CPU status register is cleared to “0,” and
the interrupt mask level in bits I2 to I0 is set to the value in the IPR.
5.2.3 Interrupt Vector Table
Table 5-2 lists the addresses of the exception vector table entries for each interrupt, and explains
how their priority is determined. For the on-chip supporting modules, the priority level set in the
interrupt priority register applies to the module as a whole: all interrupts from that module have
the same priority level. A separate priority order is established among interrupts from the same
module. If the same priority level is assigned to two or more modules and two interrupts are
requested simultaneously from these modules, they are served in the priority order indicated in the
rightmost column in table 5-2.
A reset clears the interrupt priority registers so that all interrupts except NMI start with priority
level 0, meaning that they are unconditionally masked.
101
Table 5-2 Interrupts, Vectors, and Priorities
Interrupt
NMI
IRQ0
IRQ1
16-Bit
FRT1
ICI
OCIA
OCIB
FOVI
16-Bit
ICI
FRT2
OCIA
OCIB
FOVI
16-Bit
ICI
FRT3
OCIA
OCIB
FOVI
8-Bit
CMIA
timer
CMIB
OVI
SCI
ERI
RXI
TXI
A/D
ADI
converter
Assignable
Priority
Levels
(Initial
Level)
8
(8)
7 to 0
(0)
7 to 0
(0)
7 to 0
(0)
IPR
Bits
—
IPRA
bits 6 to 4
IPRA
bits 2 to 0
IPRB
bits 6 to 4
7 to 0
(0)
IPRB
bits 2 to 0
7 to 0
(0)
IPRC
bits 6 to 4
7 to 0
(0)
IPRC
bits 2 to 0
7 to 0
(0)
IPRD
bits 6 to 4
7 to 0
(0)
IPRD
bits 2 to 0
Priority
within
Module
—
Vector Table
Entry Address
Minimum
Maximum
Mode
Mode
H'16 - H'17
H'2C - H'2F
—
H'40 - H'41
H'80 - H'83
—
H'42 - H'43
H'84 - H'87
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
2
1
0
2
1
0
—
H'48 - H'49
H'4A - H'4B
H'4C - H'4D
H'4E - H'4F
H'50 - H'51
H'52 - H'53
H'54 - H'55
H'56 - H'57
H'58 - H'59
H'5A - H'5B
H'5C - H'5D
H'5E - H'5F
H'60 - H'61
H'62 - H'63
H'64 - H'65
H'68 - H'69
H'6A - H'6B
H'6C - H'6D
H'70 - H'71
H'90 - H'93
H'94 - H'97
H'98 - H'9B
H'9C - H'9F
H'A0 - H'A3
H'A4 - H'A7
H'A8 - H'AB
H'AC - H'AF
H'B0 - H'B3
H'B4 - H'B7
H'B8 - H'BB
H'BC - H'BF
H'C0 - H'C3
H'C4 - H'C7
H'C8 - H'CB
H'D0 - H'D3
H'D4 - H'D7
H'D8 - H'DB
H'E0 - H'E3
Priority
among
Interrupts
on Same
Level*
High
Low
* If two or more interrupts are requested simultaneously, they are handled in order of priority level,
as set in registers IPRA to IPRD. If they have the same priority level because they are requested
from the same on-chip supporting module, they are handled in a fixed priority order within the
module. If they are requested from different modules to which the same priority level is
assigned, they are handled in the order indicated in the right-hand column.
102
5.3 Register Descriptions
5.3.1 Interrupt Priority Registers A to D (IPRA to IPRD)
IRQ0, IRQ1, and the on-chip supporting modules are each assigned three bits in one of the four
interrupt priority registers (IPRA to IPRD). These bits specify a priority level from 7 (high) to 0
(low) for interrupts from the corresponding source. The drawing below shows the configuration
of the interrupt priority registers. Table 5-3 lists their assignments to interrupt sources.
Bit
7
6
5
4
—
3
2
1
0
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bits 7 and 3 are reserved. They cannot be modified and are always read as “0.”
Table 5-3 Assignment of Interrupt Priority Registers
Register
IPRA
IPRB
IPRC
IPRD
Interrupt Request Source
Bits 6 to 4
Bits 2 to 0
IRQ0
IRQ1
16-Bit FRT1
16-Bit FRT2
16-Bit FRT3
8-Bit timer
SCI
A/D converter
Address
H'FFF0
H'FFF1
H'FFF2
H'FFF3
As table 5-3 indicates, each interrupt priority register specifies priority levels for two interrupt
sources. A user program can assign desired levels to these interrupt sources by writing “000” in
bits 6 to 4 or bits 2 to 0 to set priority level 0, for example, or “111” to set priority level 7.
A reset clears registers IPRA to IPRD to H'00, so all interrupts except NMI are initially masked.
103
When the interrupt controller receives one or more interrupt requests, it selects the request with
the highest priority and compares its priority level with the interrupt mask level set in bits I2 to I0
in the CPU status register. If the priority level is higher than the mask level, the interrupt
controller passes the interrupt request to the CPU (or starts the data transfer controller). If the
priority level is lower than the mask level, the interrupt controller leaves the interrupt request
pending until the interrupt mask is altered to a lower level or the interrupt priority is raised.
Similarly, if it receives two interrupt requests with the same priority level, the interrupt controller
determines their priority as explained in table 5-2 and leaves the interrupt request with the lower
priority pending.
5.3.2 Timing of Priority Setting
The interrupt controller requires two system clock (ø) periods to determine the priority level of an
interrupt. Accordingly, when an instruction modifies an instruction priority register, the new
priority does not take effect until after the next instruction has been executed.
5.4 Interrupt Handling Sequence
5.4.1 Interrupt Handling Flow
The interrupt-handling sequence follows the flowchart in figure 5-2. Note that address error, trace
exception, and NMI requests bypass the interrupt controller’s priority decision logic and are
routed directly to the CPU.
1. Interrupt requests are generated by one or more on-chip supporting modules or external
interrupt sources.
2. The interrupt controller checks the interrupt priorities set in IPRA to IPRD and selects the
interrupt with the highest priority. Interrupts with lower priorities remain pending. Among
interrupts with the same priority level, the interrupt controller determines priority as explained
in table 5-2.
3. The interrupt controller compares the priority level of the selected interrupt request with the
mask level in the CPU status register (bits I2 to I0). If the priority level is equal to or less than
the mask level, the interrupt request remains pending. If the priority level is higher than the
mask level, the interrupt controller accepts the interrupt request and proceeds to the next step.
4. The interrupt controller checks the corresponding bit (if any) in the data transfer enable
registers (DTEA to DTED). If this bit is set to “1,” the data transfer controller is started.
Otherwise, the CPU interrupt exception-handling sequence is started.
When the data transfer controller is started, the interrupt request is cleared (except for interrupt
requests from the serial communication interface, which are cleared by writing to the TDR or
reading the RDR).
104
If the data transfer enable bit is cleared to “0” (or is nonexistent), the sequence proceeds as
follows. For the case in which the data transfer controller is started, see section 6, “Data Transfer
Controller.”
5. After the CPU has finished executing the current instruction, the program counter and status
register (in minimum mode) or program counter, code page register, and status register (in
maximum mode) are saved to the stack, leaving the stack in the condition shown in figure 5-3
(a) or (b). The program counter value saved on the stack is the address of the next instruction
to be executed.
6. The T (Trace) bit of the status register is cleared to “0,” and the priority level of the interrupt is
copied to bits I2 to I0, thus masking further interrupts unless they have a higher priority level.
When an NMI is accepted, the interrupt mask level in bits I2 to I0 is set to 7.
7. The interrupt controller generates the vector address of the interrupt, and the entry at this
address in the exception vector table is read to obtain the starting address of the user-coded
interrupt handling routine.
In step 7, the same difference between the minimum and maximum modes exists as in the reset
handling sequence. In the minimum mode, one word is copied from the vector table to the
program counter, then the interrupt-handling routine starts executing from the address indicated in
the program counter. In the maximum mode, two words are read. The lower byte of the first word
is copied to the code page register. The second word is copied to the program counter. The
interrupt-handling routine starts executing from the address indicated in the code page register and
program counter.
105
Program execution state
N
Interrupt requested?
Address
error?
Y
N
N
Trace?
NMI?
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Level-7 interrupt?
N
Level-6 interrupt?
Y
Level-1 interrupt?
Y
N
Y
Mask level
in SR ≤ 6?
Mask level
in SR ≤ 5?
N
Y
Mask level
in SR = 0?
N
Y
N
Y
Interrupt remains pending
Y
Data transfer
enabled?
Start DTC
Read DTC vector
N
Exception-handling
sequence
Read transfer mode
Save PC
Read source address
Read data
Y
Maximum
mode?
N
Source
address increment
mode?
Save PC
Y
Increment source
address (+1 or +2)
N
Save SR
Write source address
Read destination address
Clear T bit
Write data
N
Trace
Destination
address increment
mode?
Address
error?
Y
N
N
Update mask level
Y
Increment source
address (+1 or +2)
Write destination
address
Read DTCR
Vectoring
DTCR-1 → DTCR
Write DTCR
To user-coded
exception-handling
routine
Y
DTCR = 0?
Figure 5-2 Interrupt Handling Flowchart
106
N
5.4.2 Stack Status after Interrupt Handling Sequence
Figure 5-3 (a) and (b) show the stack before and after the interrupt exception-handling sequence.
Address
Address
2m – 4
2m – 4
Upper 8 bits of SR
2m – 3
2m – 3
Lower 8 bits of SR
2m – 2
2m – 2
Upper 8 bits of PC
2m – 1
2m – 1
Lower 8 bits of PC
SP
2m
2m
Stack area
(Before)
(After)
Save to stack
Notes:
1. PC: The address of the next instruction to be executed is saved.
2. Register saving and restoring must start at an even address (e.g 2m).
Figure 5-3 (a) Stack before and after Interrupt Exception-Handling
(Minimum Mode)
107
SP
Address
Address
2m – 6
2m – 6
Upper 8 bits of SR
2m – 5
2m – 5
Lower 8 bits of SR
2m – 4
2m – 4
Don’t care
2m – 3
2m – 3
CP
2m – 2
2m – 2
Upper 8 bits of PC
2m – 1
2m – 1
Lower 8 bits of PC
SP
2m
SP
2m
Stack area
(Before)
(After)
Save to stack
Notes:
1. PC: The address of the next instruction to be executed is saved.
2. Register saving and restoring must start at an even address (e.g 2m).
Figure 5-3 (b) Stack before and after Interrupt Exception-Handling
(Maximum Mode)
5.4.3 Timing of Interrupt Exception-Handling Sequence
Figure 5-4 shows the timing of the exception-handling sequence for an interrupt when the
program area and stack area are both in on-chip memory and the user-coded interrupt handling
routine starts at an even address.
5.5 Interrupts During Operation of the Data Transfer Controller
If an interrupt is requested during a DTC data transfer cycle, the interrupt is not accepted until the
data transfer cycle has been completed and the next instruction has been executed. This is true
even if the interrupt is an NMI. An example is shown below.
Program flow
(Example)
DTC interrupt request
ADD.W
R2, R0
MOV.W
R0, @H'FF00
ADD.W
@H' FF02,R0
Data transfer cycle request
NMI interrupt
After data transfer cycle, CPU executes next
instruction before starting exception handling
To NMI exception handling sequence
108
Figure 5-4 Interrupt Sequence (Minimum Mode, On-Chip Memory)
109
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Internal
processing cycle
(1)
Stack access
SR
SP - 4
(4)
(3)
(4) First instruction of interrupt-handling routine
Prefetch first Start instruction Interrupt
accepted
instruction of execution
interrupthandling routine
Vector
Vector
address
(3) Starting address of interrupt-handling routine
PC
SP - 2
Note: This timing chart applies to the minimum mode when the program and stack areas are both in on-chip memory and the interrupt-handling routine starts
at an even address.
(2) Instruction code
Priority level
decision and wait
for end of
current instruction
(1) Instruction prefetch address
Interrupt
write
signal
Interrupt
reset
signal
Interrupt
data
bus (16 bits)
NMI, IRQ0
IRQ 1
Interrupt
address
bus
ø
Figure 5-5 Interrupt Sequence (Maximum Mode, External Memory)
110
(2)
(1)
PC H
SP – 2
Priority level
decision
Internal
and wait for processing
end of
cycle
current
instruction
(2)
(1)
PC L
SP – 1
CP
SP – 3
Stack access
don’t
care
SP – 4
SR H
SP – 6
SR L
SP – 5
Vector
don’t
care
address
Vector
Vector
Vector
Vector
Interrupt vector
Vector
Vector
address + 1 address + 2 address + 3
Note: This timing chart applies to the maximum mode when the program and stack areas are both in external memory.
Instruction execution starts after interrupt vector fetch and 4-byte (4 bys cycles) instruction prefetch has been done.
(4) First instruction of interrupt-handling routine
(3) Starting address of interrupt-handling routine
(2) Instruction code
(1) Instruction prefetch address
Internal Write
signal
Internal Read
signal
Internal data
bus (16 bits)
NMI, IRQ 0
IRQ 1
Internal
address bus
ø
Prefetch first instruction of
interrupt-handling routine
(4)
(3)
Start
instruction
execution
5.6 Interrupt Response Time
Table 5-4 indicates the number of states that may elapse between the generation of an interrupt
request and the execution of the first instruction of the interrupt-handling routine, assuming that
the interrupt is not masked and not preempted by a higher-priority interrupt. Since word access is
performed to on-chip memory areas, fastest interrupt service can be obtained by placing the
program in on-chip ROM and the stack in on-chip RAM.
Table 5-4 Number of States before Interrupt Service
No.
1
2
3
Reason for Wait
Interrupt priority decision and comparison with
mask level in CPU status register
Maximum number of
Instruction is in on-chip
states to completion
memory
of current instruction
Instruction is in external
memory
Number of States
Minimum Mode
Maximum Mode
2 states
x
(x = 38 for LDM instruction specifying
all registers)
y
(y = 74 + 16m for LDM instruction
specifying all registers)
Stack is in on-chip RAM
16
21
Stack is in external memory 28 + 6m
41 + 10m
Saving of PC and SR
or PC, CP, and SR
and instruction prefetch
Stack is in
Instruction is in on-chip
on-chip RAM
memory
Instruction is in external
Total
memory
Stack is in
Instruction is in on-chip
external RAM
memory
Instruction is in external
memory
18 + x
(56)
18 + y
(92 + 16m)
30 + 6m + x
(68 + 6m)
30 + 6m + y
(104 + 22m)
Note: m: Number of wait states inserted in external memory access.
Values in parentheses are for the LDM instruction.
111
23 + x
(61)
23 + y
(97 + 16m)
43 + 10m + x
(81 + 10m)
43 + 10m + y
(117 + 26m)
Section 6 Data Transfer Controller
6.1 Overview
The H8/532 chip includes a data transfer controller (DTC) that can be started by designated
interrupts to transfer data from a source address to a destination address located in page 0. These
addresses include in particular the registers of the on-chip supporting modules and I/O ports.
Typical uses of the DTC are to change the setting of a control register of an on-chip supporting
module in response to an interrupt from that module, or to transfer data from memory to an I/O
port or the serial communication interface. Once set up, the transfer is interrupt-driven, so it
proceeds independently of program execution, although program execution temporarily stops
while each byte or word is being transferred.
6.1.1 Features
The main features of the DTC are listed below.
• The source address and destination address can be set anywhere in the 64k-byte address space
of page 0.
• The DTC can be programmed to transfer one byte or one word of data per interrupt.
• The DTC can be programmed to increment the source address and/or destination address after
each byte or word is transferred.
• After transferring a designated number of bytes or words, the DTC generates a CPU interrupt
with the vector of the interrupt source that started the DTC.
• This designated data transfer count can be set from 1 to 65,536 bytes or words.
6.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 6-1 shows a block diagram of the DTC.
The four DTC control registers (DTMR, DTSR, DTDR, and DTCR) are invisible to the CPU, but
corresponding information is kept in a register information table in memory. A separate table is
maintained for each DTC interrupt type. When an interrupt requests DTC service, the DTC loads
its control registers from the table in memory, transfers the byte or word of data, and writes any
altered register information back to memory.
113
Internal data bus
DTC request
RAM
Interrupt controller
Register
information table
0
DTC
IRQ 0
Register
information table
1
IRQ 1
DTEA
DTMR
DTEB
DTSR
DTEC
DTDR
DTED
DTCR
DTMR: DT Mode Register
DTSR: DT Source Address Register
DTDR: DT Destination Address Register
DTCR: DT Count Register
DTEA to DTED: DT Enable Register A to D
Figure 6-1 Block Diagram of Data Transfer Controller
6.1.3 Register Configuration
The four DTC control registers are listed in table 6-1. These registers are not located in the
address space and cannot be written or read by the CPU. To set information in these registers, a
program must write the information in a table in memory from which it will be loaded by the
DTC.
Table 6-1 Internal Control Registers of the DTC
Name
Data transfer mode register
Data transfer source address register
Data transfer destination address register
Data transfer count register
Abbreviation
DTMR
DTSR
DTDR
DTCR
114
Read/Write
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Starting of the DTC is controlled by the four data transfer enable registers, which are located in
high addresses in page 0. Table 6-2 lists these registers.
Table 6-2 Data Transfer Enable Registers
Name
Data transfer
enable
register
Abbreviation
DTEA
DTEB
DTEC
DTED
A
B
C
D
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address
H'FFF4
H'FFF5
H'FFF6
H'FFF7
Initial Value
H'00
H'00
H'00
H'00
6.2 Register Descriptions
6.2.1 Data Transfer Mode Register (DTMR)
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Sz
SI
DI
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Read/Write —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The data transfer mode register is a 16-bit register, the first three bits of which designate the data
size and specify whether to increment the source and destination addresses.
Bit 15—Sz (Size): This bit designates the size of the data transferred.
Bit 15
Sz
Description
0
Byte transfer
1
Word transfer* (two bytes at a time)
* For word transfer, the source and destination addresses must be even addresses.
Bit 14—SI (Source Increment): This bit specifies whether to increment to source address.
Bit 14
SI
0
1
Description
Source address is not incremented.
1) If Sz = 0: Source address is incremented by +1 after each data transfer.
2) If Sz = 1: Source address is incremented by +2 after each data transfer.
115
Bit 13—DI (Destination Increment): This bit specifies whether to increment to destination
address.
Bit 13
DI
0
1
Description
Destination address is not incremented.
1) If Sz = 0: Destination address is incremented by +1 after each data transfer.
2) If Sz = 1: Destination address is incremented by +2 after each data transfer.
Bits 12 to 0—Reserved Bits: These bits are reserved.
6.2.2 Data Transfer Source Address Register (DTSR)
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The data transfer source register is a 16-bit register that designates the data transfer source
address. For word transfer this must be an even address. In the maximum mode, this address is
implicitly located in page 0.
6.2.3 Data Transfer Destination Register (DTDR)
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The data transfer destination register is a 16-bit register that designates the data transfer
destination address. For word transfer this must be an even address. In the maximum mode, this
address is implicitly located in page 0.
6.2.4 Data Transfer Count Register (DTCR)
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
116
The data transfer count register is a 16-bit register that counts the number of bytes or words of
data remaining to be transferred. The initial count can be set from 1 to 65,536. A register value of
0 designates an initial count of 65,536.
The data transfer count register is decremented automatically after each byte or word is
transferred. When its value reaches 0, indicating that the designated number of bytes or words
have been transferred, a CPU interrupt is generated with the vector of the interrupt that requested
the data transfer.
6.2.5 Data Transfer Enable Registers A to D (DTEA to DTED)
These four registers designate whether an interrupt starts the DTC. The bits in these registers are
assigned to interrupts as indicated in table 6-3. No bits are assigned to the NMI, FOVI, OVI, and
ERI interrupts, which cannot request data transfers.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Table 6-3 Assignment of Data Transfer Enable Registers
Interrupt Source
Register Module
Bits 7 to 4
7
6
DTEA
IRQ0
—
—
5
—
4
IRQ0
Interrupt Source
Module
Bits 3 to 0
3
2
IRQ1
—
—
DTEB
16-Bit FRT1
—
OCIB OCIA
ICI
16-Bit FRT2
—
DTEC
16-Bit FRT3
—
OCIB OCIA
ICI
8-Bit Timer
—
—
DTED
SCI
—
—
A/D converter
—
—
TXI
RXI
1
—
OCIB OCIA
0
IRQ1
ICI
CMIB CMIA
—
ADI
Note: Bits marked “—” should always be cleared to “0.”
If the bit for a certain interrupt is set to “1,” that interrupt is regarded as a request for DTC service.
If the bit is cleared to “0,” the interrupt is regarded as a CPU interrupt request.
Only the 16 interrupts indicated in table 6-3 can request DTC service. DTE bits not assigned to
any interrupt (indicated by “—” in table 6-3) should be left cleared to “0.”
117
• Note on Timing of DTE Modifications: The interrupt controller requires two system clock (ø)
periods to determine the priority level of an interrupt. Accordingly, when an instruction modifies
a data transfer enable register, the new setting does not take effect until the third state after that
instruction has been executed.
6.3 Data Transfer Operation
6.3.1 Data Transfer Cycle
When started by an interrupt, the DTC executes the following data transfer cycle:
1. From the DTC vector table, the DTC reads the address at which the register information table
for that interrupt is located in memory.
2. The DTC loads the data transfer mode register and source address register from this table and
reads the data (one byte or word) from the source address.
3. If so specified in the mode register, the DTC increments the source address register and writes
the new source address back to the table in memory.
4. The DTC loads the data transfer destination address register and writes the byte or word of data
to the destination address.
5. If so specified in the mode register, the DTC increments the destination address register and
writes the new destination address back to the table in memory.
6. The DTC loads the data transfer count register from the table in memory, decrements the data
count, and writes the new count back to memory.
7. If the data transfer count is now 0, the DTC generates a CPU interrupt. The interrupt vector is
the vector of the interrupt type that started the DTC.
At an appropriate point during this procedure the DTC also clears the interrupt request by clearing
the corresponding flag bit in the status register of the on-chip supporting module to “0.” (For
IRQ0 or IRQ1, the DTC clears an internal latch.)
But the DTC does not clear the data transfer enable bit in the data transfer enable register. This
action, if necessary, must be taken by the user-coded interrupt-handling routine invoked at the end
of the transfer.
The data transfer cycle is shown in a flowchart in figure 6-2.
For the steps from the occurrence of the interrupt up to the start of the data transfer cycle, see
section 5.4.1, “Interrupt Handling Flow.”
118
INT
Interrupt
CPU
N
DTC interrupt?
Y
DTC
Save PC and SR
Read DTC vector
Read vector
Read transfer mode
Read address from
vector table
Read source address
Read data
N
Start executing
interrupt-handling
routine at that
address.
Y
Source address
increment mode?
Increment source address (+1 or +2)
Write source address
Read destination address
Write data
Destination address
increment mode?
N
Y
Increment destination address
(+1 or +2)
Write destination address
Read DTCR
DTCR → DTCR
Write DTCR
Y
DTCR = 0?
N
DTC END
Figure 6-2 Flowchart of Data Transfer Cycle
119
6.3.2 DTC Vector Table
The DTC vector table is located immediately following the exception vector table at the beginning
of page 0 in memory. For each interrupt that can request DTC service, the DTC vector table
provides a pointer to an address in memory where the table of DTC control register information
for that interrupt is stored. The register information tables can be placed in any available locations
in page 0.
RAM
Vector table
DTMR0
Exception
vector table
TA0
Register
information table
0
DTSR0
DTDR0
DTCR0
DTMR1
TA0
TA1
TA1
Register
information table
1
DTSR1
DTDR1
DTCR1
DTC vector
table
Note: TA0, TA1, ...: Addresses of DTC register information tables in memory.
ote: TA 0 , TA1,... : Addresses of DTC register information tables in memory.
In the normal case the register information tables are placed on a RAM. If the
software does not need to modify the register information (addresses are fixed and
transfer count is 1), it can be placed on ROM.
Figure 6-3 DTC Vector Table
In minimum mode, each entry in the DTC vector table consists of two bytes, pointing to an
address in page 0. In maximum mode, for compatibility reasons, each DTC vector table entry
consists of four bytes but the first two bytes are ignored; the last two bytes point to an address
which is implicitly assumed to be in page 0, regardless of the current page specifications.
Figure 6-4 shows one DTC vector table entry in minimum and maximum mode.
120
DTC vector table
RAM
DTC vector table
Address
Address
m
Address (H)
m+1
Address (L)
Register
information
(1) Minimum mode
Don’t care
2m*
Don’t care
2 m + 1*
Address (H)
2m+2
Address (L)
2m+3
(2) Maximum mode
* Address 2m and 2m + 1 are not accessed at vector read.
Figure 6-4 DTC Vector Table Entry
Table 6-4 lists the addresses of the entries in the DTC vector table for each interrupt.
Table 6-4 Addresses of DTC Vectors
Interrupt
IRQ0
IRQ1
16-Bit
free-running
timer 1
(FRT1)
16-Bit
free-running
timer 2
(FRT2)
16-Bit
free-running
timer 3
(FRT3)
ICI
OCIA
OCIB
FOVI
ICI
OCIA
OCIB
FOVI
ICI
OCIA
OCIB
FOVI
Address of DTC Vector
Minimum Mode
Maximum Mode
H'0080 - H'0081
H'0100 - H'0103
H'0082 - H'0083
H'0104 - H'0107
H'0088 - H'0089
H'0110 - H'0113
H'008A - H'008B
H'0114 - H'0117
H'008C - H'008D
H'0118 - H'011B
—
—
H'0090 - H'0091
H'0120 - H'0123
H'0092 - H'0093
H'0124 - H'0127
H'0094 - H'0095
H'0128 - H'012B
—
—
H'0098 - H'0099
H'0130 - H'0133
H'009A - H'009B
H'0134 - H'0137
H'009C - H'009D
H'0138 - H'013B
—
—
121
Table 6-4 Addresses of DTC Vectors (cont)
Interrupt
8-Bit
timer
Serial
communication
interface
A/D converter
CMIA
CMIB
OVI
ERI
RXI
TXI
ADI
Address of DTC Vector
Minimum Mode
Maximum Mode
H'00A0 - H'00A1
H'0140 - H'0143
H'00A2 - H'00A3
H'0144 - H'0147
—
—
—
—
H'00AA - H'00AB
H'0154 - H'0157
H'00AC - H'00AD
H'0158 - H'015B
H'00B0 - H'00B1
H'0160 - H'0163
6.3.3 Location of Register Information in Memory
For each interrupt, the DTC control register information is stored in four consecutive words in
memory in the order shown in figure 6-5.
DTC vector table
RAM
TA
DTMR
Mode register
TA + 2
DTSR
Source address register
TA + 4
DTDR
Destination address register
TA + 6
DTCR
8 Bits
8 Bits
Count register
Figure 6-5 Order of Register Information
6.3.4 Length of Data Transfer Cycle
Table 6-5 lists the number of states required per data transfer, assuming that the DTC control
register information is stored in on-chip RAM. This is the number of states required for loading
and saving the DTC control registers and transferring one byte or word of data. Two cases are
considered: a transfer between on-chip RAM and a register belonging to an I/O port or on-chip
supporting module (i.e., a register in the register field from addresses H'FF80 to H'FFFF); and a
transfer between such a register and external RAM.
122
Table 6-5 Number of States per Data Transfer
Increment Mode
Source Destina(SI)
tion (DI)
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
On-Chip RAM ↔Module or I/O
Register
Byte Transfer
Word Transfer
31
34
33
36
33
36
35
38
External RAM ↔ Module or I/O
Register
Byte Transfer
Word Transfer
32
38
34
40
34
40
36
42
Note: Numbers in the table are the number of states.
The values in table 6-5 are calculated from the formula:
N = 26 + 2 × SI + 2 × DI + MS + MD
Where MS and MD have the following meanings:
MS: Number of states for reading source data
MD: Number of states for writing destination data
The values of MS and MD depend on the data location as follows:
➀ Byte or word data in on-chip RAM:
➩
2 states
➁ Byte data in external RAM or register field:
➩
3 states
➂ Word data in external RAM or register field: ➩
6 states
If the DTC control register information is stored in external RAM, 20 + 4 × SI + 4 × DI must be
added to the values in table 6-5.
The values given above do not include the time between the occurrence of the interrupt request
and the starting of the DTC. This time includes two states for the interrupt controller to check
priority and a variable wait until the end of the current CPU instruction. At maximum, this time
equals the sum of the values indicated for items No. 1 and 2 in table 6-6.
If the data transfer count is 0 at the end of a data transfer cycle, the number of states from the end
of the data transfer cycle until the first instruction of the user-coded interrupt-handling routine is
executed is the value given for item No. 3 in table 6-6.
123
Table 6-6 Number of States before Interrupt Service
No. Reason for Wait
1
Interrupt priority decision and comparison with
mask level in CPU status register
2
Maximum number of
Instruction is in on-chip
states to completion
memory
of current instruction
Instruction is in external
memory
3
Saving of PC and SR Stack is in on-chip RAM
or PC, CP, and SR
and instruction prefetch Stack is in external memory
Number of States
Minimum Mode
Maximum Mode
2 states
38
(LDM instruction specifying all registers)
74 + 16m
(LDM instruction specifying all registers)
16
21
28 + 6m
41 + 10m
m: Number of wait states inserted in external memory access
6.4 Procedure for Using the DTC
A program that uses the DTC to transfer data must do the following:
1. Set the appropriate DTMR, DTSR, DTDR, and DTCR register information in the memory
location indicated in the DTC vector table.
2. Set the data transfer enable bit of the pertinent interrupt to “1,” and set the priority of the
interrupt source (in the interrupt priority register) and the interrupt mask level (in the CPU
status register) so that the interrupt can be accepted.
3. Set the interrupt enable bit in the control register for the interrupt source. (For IRQ0 and IRQ1,
the control register is the port 1 control register, P1CR.)
Following these preparations, the DTC will be started each time the interrupt occurs. When the
number of bytes or words designated by the DTCR value have been transferred, after transferring
the last byte or word, the DTC generates a CPU interrupt.
The user-coded interrupt-handling routine must take action to prepare for or disable further DTC
data transfer: by readjusting the data transfer count, for example, or clearing the interrupt enable
bit. If no action is taken, the next interrupt of the same type will start the DTC with an initial data
transfer count of 65,536.
124
6.5 Example
Purpose: To receive 128 bytes of serial data via the serial communication interface.
Conditions:
•
•
•
•
Operating mode: Minimum mode
Received data are to be stored in consecutive addresses starting at H'FC00.
DTC control register information for the RXI interrupt is stored at addresses H'FB80 to H'FB87.
Accordingly, the DTC vector table contains H'FB at address H'00AA and H'80 at address
H'00AB.
• The desired interrupt mask level in the CPU status register is 4, and the desired SCI interrupt
priority level is 5.
Procedure
1. The user program sets DTC control register information in addresses H'FB80 to H'FB87 as
shown in table 6-7.
Table 6-7 DTC Control Register Information Set in RAM
Address
Register
H'FB80
DTMR
H'FB82
H'FB84
H'FB86
DTSR
DTDR
DTCR
Description
Byte transfer
Source address fixed
Increment destination address
Address of SCI receive data register
Address H'FC00
Number of bytes to be received: 128
Value Set
H'2000
H'FFDD
H'FC00
H'0080
2. The program sets the RI (SCI Receive Interrupt) bit in the data transfer enable register (bit 5 of
register DTED) to “1.”
3. The program sets the interrupt mask in the CPU status register to 4, and the SCI interrupt
priority in bits 6 to 4 of interrupt priority register IPRD to 5.
4. The program sets the SCI to the appropriate receive mode, and sets the receive interrupt enable
(RIE) bit in the serial control register (SCR) to “1” to enable receive interrupts.
5. Thereafter, each time the SCI receives one byte of data, it requests an RXI interrupt, which the
interrupt controller directs toward the DTC. The DTC transfers the byte from the SCI’s receive
data register (RDR) into RAM, and clears the interrupt request before ending.
125
6. When 128 bytes have been transferred (DTCR = 0), the DTC generates a CPU interrupt. The
interrupt type is RXI.
7. The user-coded RXI interrupt-handling routine processes the received data and disables further
data transfer (by clearing the RIE bit, for example).
Figure 6-6 shows the DTC vector table and data in RAM for this example.
DTC vector table
Address
RAM
Address
H'FB80
H'20
H'FB81
H'00
Mode
H'00AA
H'FB
H'00AB
H'80
H'FF
Source address
H'DD
H'FC
Destination address
H'00
H'00
Counter
H'FB87
H'80
H'FC00
Receive data 1
Receive data 2
Transferred
by DTC
H'FC7F
Receive data 128
RDR
SCI
Figure 6-6 Use of DTC to Receive Data via Serial Communication Interface
126
Section 7 Wait-State Controller
7.1 Overview
To simplify interfacing to low-speed external devices, the H8/532 has an on-chip wait-state
controller (WSC) that can insert wait states (TW) to prolong bus cycles.
The wait-state function can be used in CPU and DTC access cycles to external addresses. It is not
used in access to on-chip supporting modules. The TW states are inserted between the T2 state
and T3 state in the bus cycle. The number of wait states can be selected by a value set in the waitstate control register (WCR), or by holding the WAIT pin Low for the required interval.
7.1.1 Features
The main features of the wait-state controller are:
• Selection of three operating modes
Programmable wait mode, pin wait mode, or pin auto-wait mode
• 0, 1, 2, or 3 wait states can be inserted.
And in the pin wait mode, 4 or more states can be inserted by holding the WAIT pin Low.
127
7.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 7-1 shows a block diagram of the wait-state controller.
Internal data bus
WCR
—
—
—
—
WMS1 WMS0
WC1
WC0
Wait counter
WAIT request
Control logic
WAIT input
WCR:
Wait-state Control Register
WMS1, 0: Wait Mode Select 1, 0
WC1, 0: Wait Count 1, 0
Figure 7-1 Block Diagram of Wait-State Controller
7.1.3 Register Configuration
The wait-state controller has one control register: the wait-state control register described in
table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Register Configuration
Name
Wait-state control register
Abbreviation
WCR
Read/Write
R/W
128
Initial Value
H'F3
Address
H'FFF8
7.2 Wait-State Control Register
The wait-state control register (WCR) is an 8-bit register that specifies the wait mode and the
number of wait states to be inserted. A reset initializes the WCR to specify the programmable
wait mode with three wait states. The WCR is not initialized in the software standby mode.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
WMS1
WMS0
WC1
WC0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as “1.”
Bits 3 and 2—Wait Mode Select 1 and 0 (WMS1 and WMS0): These bits select the wait mode
as shown below.
Bit 3
WMS1
0
0
1
1
Bit 2
WMS0
0
1
0
1
Description
Programmable wait mode (Initial value)
No wait states are inserted, regardless of the wait count.
Pin wait mode
Pin auto-wait mode
Bits 1 and 0—Wait Count (WC1 and WC0): These bits specify the number of wait states to be
inserted.
Wait states are inserted only in bus cycles in which the CPU or DTC accesses an external address.
Bit 1
WC1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
WC0
0
1
0
1
Description
No wait states are inserted, except in pin wait mode.
1 Wait state in inserted.
2 Wait states are inserted.
3 Wait states are inserted. (Initial value)
129
7.3 Operation in Each Wait Mode
Table 7-2 summarizes the operation of the three wait modes.
Table 7-2 Wait Modes
Mode
Programmable
wait mode
WMS1 = “0”
WMS0 = “0”
Pin wait mode
WMS1 = “1”
WMS0 = “0”
Pin auto-wait
mode
WMS1 = “1”
WMS0 = “1”
WAIT
Insertion
Pin Function Conditions
Disabled
Inserted on access to
an off-chip address
Enabled
Enabled
Number of Wait
States Inserted
1 to 3 wait states are inserted, as
specified by bits WC0 and WC1.
Inserted on access to 0 to 3 wait states are inserted, as
an off-chip address
specified by bits WC0 and WC1,
plus additional wait states while the
WAIT pin is held Low.
Inserted on access to 1 to 3 wait states are inserted, as
an off-chip address if specified by bits WC0 and WC1.
the WAIT pin is Low
7.3.1 Programmable Wait Mode
The programmable wait mode is selected when WMS1 = “0” and WMS0 = “0.”
Whenever the CPU or DTC accesses an off-chip address, the number of wait states set in bits
WC1 and WC0 are inserted. The WAIT pin is not used for wait control; it is available as an I/O
pin.
130
Figure 7-2 shows the timing of the operation in this mode when the wait count is 1 (WC1 = “0,”
WC0 = “1”).
T2 state or T3
T1
T2
TW
T3
ø
A19 –A 0
Off-chip address
RD, AS,
DS (Read)
Read data
Read data
D7 –D0
WR, DS
(Write)
Write data
D7 –D0
Figure 7-2 Programmable Wait Mode
7.3.2 Pin Wait Mode
The pin wait mode is selected when WMS1 = “1” and WMS0 = “0.”
In this mode the WAIT function of the P14 /WAIT pin is used automatically.
The number of wait states indicated by bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted into any bus cycle in
which the CPU or DTC accesses an off-chip address. In addition, wait states continue to be
inserted as long as the WAIT pin is held low. In particular, if the wait count is 0 but the WAIT pin
is Low at the rising edge of the ø clock in the T2 state, wait states are inserted until the WAIT pin
goes High.
This mode is useful for inserting four or more wait states, or when different external devices
require different numbers of wait states.
131
Figure 7-3 shows the timing of the operation in this mode when the wait count is 1 (WC1 = “0,”
WC0 = “1”) and the WAIT pin is held Low to insert one additional wait state.
T1
T2
Wait
count
TW
WAIT
pin
TW
*
ø
T3
*
WAIT pin
A19 –A 0
Off-chip address
RD, AS,
DS (Read)
Read data
D7 –D0
WR, DS
(Write)
D7 –D0
Write data
* The arrowheads indicate the times at which the WAIT pin is sampled.
Figure 7-3 Pin Wait Mode
132
7.3.3 Pin Auto-Wait Mode
The pin auto-wait mode is selected when WMS1 = “1” and WMS0 = “1.”
In this mode the WAIT function of the P14 /WAIT pin is used automatically.
In this mode, the number of wait states indicated by bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted, but only if
there is a Low input at the WAIT pin.
Figure 7-4 shows the timing of this operation when the wait count is 1.
In the pin auto-wait mode, the WAIT pin is sampled only once, on the falling edge of the ø clock
in the T2 state. If the WAIT pin is Low at this time, the wait-state controller inserts the number of
wait states indicated by bits WC1 and WC0. The WAIT pin is not sampled during the Tw and T3
states, so no additional wait states are inserted even if the WAIT pin continues to be held Low.
This mode offers a simple way to interface a low-speed device: the wait states can be inserted by
routing an address decode signal to the WAIT pin.
T1
ø
T2
T3
T1
*
T2
TW
T3
*
WAIT
A19 –A 0
External address
External address
RD, AS,
DS (Read)
Read data
Read data
D7 –D0
WR, DS
(Write)
D7 –D0
Write data
Write data
* The arrowheads indicate the times at which the WAIT pin is sampled.
Figure 7-4 Pin Auto-Wait Mode
133
Section 8 Clock Pulse Generator
8.1 Overview
The H8/532 chip has a built-in clock pulse generator (CPG) consisting of an oscillator circuit, a
system (ø) clock divider, an E clock divider, and a group of prescalers. The prescalers generate
clock signals for the on-chip supporting modules.
8.1.1 Block Diagram
CPG
Prescaler
XTAL
EXTAL
Oscillator
circuit
Divider
÷2
Divider
÷8
ø
E
ø/2 to ø/4096
Figure 8-1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator
8.2 Oscillator Circuit
If an external crystal is connected across the EXTAL and XTAL pins, the on-chip oscillator circuit
generates a clock signal for the system clock divider. Alternatively, an external clock signal can
be applied to the EXTAL pin.
Connecting an External Crystal
(1) Circuit Configuration: An external crystal can be connected as in the example in figure 8-2.
An AT-cut parallel resonating crystal should be used.
135
CL1
EXTAL
XTAL
CL2
CL1 =C L2 =10 to 22pF
Figure 8-2 Connection of Crystal Oscillator (Example)
(2) Crystal Oscillator: The external crystal should have the characteristics listed in table 8-1.
CL
L
RS
XTAL
EXTAL
C0
AT-cut parallel resonating crystal
Figure 8-3 Crystal Oscillator Equivalent Circuit
Table 8-1 External Crystal Parameters
Frequency (MHz)
Rs max (Ω)
C0 (pF)
2
4
500
120
7pF max
8
60
12
40
16
30
20
20
(3) Note on Board Design: When an external crystal is connected, other signal lines should be
kept away from the crystal circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct
oscillation. See figure 8-4.
When the board is designed, the crystal and its load capacitors should be placed as close as
possible to the XTAL and EXTAL pins.
136
Not allowed
Signal A
Signal B
H8/532
CL2
XTAL
EXTAL
CL1
Figure 8-4 Notes on Board Design around External Crystal
Input of External Clock Signal
(1) Circuit Configuration: An external clock signal can be input at the EXTAL and XTAL pins
as shown in the example in figure 8-5.
EXTAL
74HC04
External clock input
XTAL
Figure 8-5 External Clock Input (Example)
Note: When using make ROM, an external clock can be input at the EXTAL pin while leaving
the XTAL pin open. Also when using ZTAT, an external clock under 16 MHz can be input
at the EXTAL pin while leaving the XTAL pin open.
137
(2) External Clock Input
Frequency
Duty factor
Double the system clock (ø) frequency
45% to 55%
8.3 System Clock Divider
The system clock divider divides the crystal oscillator or external clock frequency (fosc) by 2 to
create the ø clock.
An E clock signal is created by dividing the ø clock by 8. The E clock is used for interfacing to E
clock based devices.
Figure 8-6 shows the phase relationship of the E clock to the ø clock.
φ
ø
E
E
Figure 8-6 Phase Relationship of ø Clock and E Clock
138
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1 Overview
The H8/532 has nine ports. Ports 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, and 9 are eight-bit input/output ports. Port 2 is a
five-bit input/output port. Port 6 is a four-bit input/output port. Port 8 is an eight-bit input-only
port. Table 9-1 summarizes the functions of each port.
Input and output are memory-mapped. The CPU views each port as a data register (DR) located
in the register field at the high end of page 0 of the address space. Each port (except port 8) also
has a data direction register (DDR) which determines which pins are used for input and which for
output. Port 1 has an additional control register (P1CR) for enabling and disabling IRQ0 and
IRQ1 and setting other controls.
To read data from an I/O port, the CPU selects input in the data direction register and reads the
data register. This causes the input logic level at the pin to be placed directly on the internal data
bus. There is no intervening input latch.
To send data to an output port, the CPU selects output in the data direction register and writes the
desired data in the data register, causing the data to be held in a latch. The latch output drives the
pin through a buffer amplifier. If the CPU reads the data register of an output port, it obtains the
data held in the latch rather than the actual level of the pin.
As table 9-1 indicates, all of the I/O port pins have dual functions. For example, pin 7 of port 1
can be used either as a general-purpose I/O pin (P17), or for output of the TMO signal from the
on-chip 8-bit timer. The function is determined by the MCU operating mode, or by a value set in
a control register.
Outputs from ports 1 to 6 can drive one TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load. Outputs from ports
7 and 9 can drive one TTL load and a 30pF capacitive load.
Outputs from ports 1 to 7 and 9 can also drive a Darlington transistor pair. Outputs from port 4
can drive a light-emitting diode (with 10mA current sink). Ports 5 and 6 have built-in MOS pullups for each input. Port 7 has Schmitt inputs.
Schematic diagrams of the I/O port circuits are shown in appendix C.
139
Table 9-1 Input/Output Port Summary
Port
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Expanded Modes
Description
Pins
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4
8-Bit input/output P17 / TMO These input/output pins double as and
P16 / IRQ1 inputs and as IRQ0 and IRQ1 input and
P15 / IRQ0 output pin (TMO) for the 8-bit timer.
P14 / WAIT These pins function as WAIT, BREQ,
P13 / BREQ and BACK when necessary controlP12 / BACK register bits are set to “1.”
These pins function as input pins or as
P11 / E
P10 / ø
clock (E, ø) output pins, depending on
the data direction register setting.
5-Bit input/output P24 / WR
Bus control signal outputs
port
P23 / RD
(WR, RD, DS, R/W, AS)
P22 / DS
P21 / R/W
P20 / AS
8-Bit input/output P37 - P30 / Data bus (D7 – D0)
port
D7 – D0
8-Bit input/output P47 – P40 / Low address bits (A7 – A0)
port
A7 – A0
Can drive a LED
High
High
High
8-Bit input/output P57 – P50 / High
port
A15 – A8
address address address address
Built-in input
bus
bus if
bus
bus if
pull-up (MOS)
(A15 – DDR is (A15 – DDR is
A8)
set to “1” A8)
set to “1”
4-Bit input/output P63 –P60 / Input/output port Page
Page
port
A19 – A16
address address
Built-in input
bus
bus if DDR
pull-up (MOS)
(A19 – is set to “1,”
input port if
A16)
DDR is set
to “0”
140
Single-Chip Mode
(Mode 7)
Input/output
port
Input/output
port
Input/output
port
Input/output
port
Input/output
port
Input/output
port
Table 9-1 Input/Output Port Summary (cont)
Expanded Modes
Single-Chip Mode
Port Description
Pins
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 (Mode 7)
Port 7 8-Bit input/output P77 / FTOA1 Input/output for free-running timers 1,
port
P76 / FTOB3 / 2 and 3 (FTI1 to FTI3, FTCI1 to FTCI3,
FTOB1 to FTOB3, FTOA1),input for
(Schmitt inputs) FTCI3
P75 / FTOB2 / 8-bit timer input (TMCI, TMRI), and 8-bit
input/output port
FTCI2
P74 / FTOB1 / (P77 to P70)
FTCI1 /
P73 / FTI3
TMRI
P72 / FTI2
P71 / FTI1
P70 / TMCI
Analog input pins for A/D converter, and
Port 8 8-Bit input port
P80 - P87
AN7 – AN0
8-bit input port
Port 9 8-Bit input/output P97 / SCK
Output for free-running timers 2 and 3
(FTOA2, FTOA3), PWM timer output
port
P96 / RXD
P95 / TXD
(PW1, PW2, PW3), serial communication
P94 / PW3
interface (SCI) input/output (TXD, RXD,
P93 / PW2
SCK), and 8-bit input/output port
P92 / PW1
P91 / FTOA3
P90 / FTOA2
141
9.2 Port 1
9.2.1 Overview
Port 1 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-1. All pins have
dual functions, except that in the single-chip mode pins 4, 3, and 2 do not have the WAIT, BREQ,
and BACK functions. (because the CPU does not access an external bus.)
Outputs from port 1 can drive one TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair.
Port
1
Pin
P17 / TMO
P16 / IRQ1
P15 / IRQ0
P14 / WAIT
P13 / BREQ
P12 / BACK
P11 / E
P10 / ø
Expanded Modes
P17 (input/output) / TMO (output)
P16 (input/output) / IRQ1 (input)
P15 (input/output) / IRQ0 (input)
P14 (input/output) / WAIT (input)
P13 (input/output) / BREQ (input)
P12 (input/output) / BACK (output)
P11 (input) / E (output)
P10 (input) / ø (output)
Single-Chip Mode
P17 (input/output) / TMO (output)
P16 (input/output) / IRQ1 (input)
P15 (input/output) / IRQ0 (input)
P14 (input/output)
P13 (input/output)
P12 (input/output)
P11 (input) / E (output)
P10 (input) / ø (output)
Figure 9-1 Pin Functions of Port 1
9.2.2 Port 1 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-2 lists the registers of port 1.
Table 9-2 Port 1 Registers
Name
Port 1 data direction register
Port 1 data register
Port 1 control register
Abbreviation
P1DDR
P1DR
P1CR
Read/Write
W
R/W*1
R/W
*1 Bits 1 and 0 are read-only.
*2 Bits 1 and 0 are undetermined. Other bits are initialized to “0.”
142
Initial Value
H'03
Undetermined*2
H'87
Address
H'FF80
H'FF82
H'FFFC
1. Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)—H'FF80
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P1DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 1. A pin functions as an
output pin if the corresponding bit in P1DDR is set to “1,” and as an input pin if the bit is cleared
to “0.”
P1DDR can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as “1,” regardless of their true values.
A reset initializes P1DDR to H'03, so that pins P11 and P10 carry clock outputs and the other pins
are set for input. In the hardware standby mode, P1DDR is cleared to H'00, stopping the clock
outputs. P1DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P1DDR bit is set to “1”
when the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the
value in the port 1 data register (or the ø or E clock).
2. Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)—H'FF82
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
P1DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P17 to P10. When the CPU reads P1DR, for
output pins it reads the value in the P1DR latch, but for input pins, it obtains the pin status directly.
Note that when pins P11 and P10 are used for output, they output the clock signals (ø and E), not
the contents of P1DR. If the CPU reads Pl1 and Pl0 (when Pl1DDR = Pl0DDR = 1), it obtains the
clock values at the current instant.
3. Port 1 Control Register (P1CR)—H'FFFC
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
NMIEG
BRLE
—
—
—
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Read/Write
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
143
P1CR selects the functions of four of the port 1 pins. It also selects the input edge of the NMI pin.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P1CR is initialized to H'87. It is not initialized in
the software standby mode.
Bit 7—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as “1.”
Bit 6—Interrupt Request 1 Enable (IRQ1E): This bit selects the function of pin P16.
Bit 6
IRQ1E
0
1
Description
P16 functions as an input/output pin.
(Initial value)
P16 functions as the IRQ1 input pin, regardless of the value set in P16DDR. (However,
the CPU can still read the pin status by reading P1DR.)
Bit 5—Interrupt Request 0 Enable (IRQ0E): This bit selects the function of pin P15.
Bit 5
IRQ0E
0
1
Description
(Initial value)
P15 functions as an input/output pin.
P15 functions as the IRQ0 input pin, regardless of the value set in P15DDR. (However,
the CPU can still read the pin status by reading P1DR.)
Bit 4—Nonmaskable Interrupt Edge (NMIEG): This bit selects the input edge of the NMI pin.
It is not related to port 0.
Bit 4
NMIEG
0
1
Description
A nonmaskable interrupt is generated on the falling edge
of the input at the NMI pin.
A nonmaskable interrupt is generated on the rising edge
of the input at the NMI pin.
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Bus Release Enable (BRLE): This bit selects the functions of pins P12 and P13. It is
valid only in the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, and 4). In the single-chip mode, pins P12 and
P13 function as input/output pins regardless of the value of the BRLE bit.
144
Bit 3
BRLE
0
1
Description
P13 and P12 function as input/output pins.
P13 functions as the input pin. P12 functions as the output pin.
(Initial value)
Bits 2 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as “1.”
9.2.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port 1 operates differently in the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, and 4) and the single-chip mode
(mode 7). Table 9-3 explains how the pin functions are selected in the expanded mode. Table 9-4
explains how the pin functions are selected in the single-chip mode.
Table 9-3 Port 1 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes
Pin
Functions and How they are Selected
P17 / TMO The function depends on output select bits 3 to 0 (OS3 to OS0) of the 8-bit timer
control/status register (TCSR) and on the P17DDR bit as follows:
OS3 to OS0
P17DDR
Pin function
All four bits are “0”
0
1
P17 output
P17 input
At least one bit is “1”
0
1
TMO output
P16 / IRQ1 The function depends on the IRQ1E bit and the P16DDR bit as follows:
IRQ1E
P16DDR
Pin function
0
0
P16 input
1
1
P16 output
0
1
IRQ1 input
P15 / IRQ0 The function depends on the IRQ0E bit and the P15DDR bit as follows:
IRQ0E
P15DDR
Pin function
0
0
P15 input
1
1
P15 output
145
0
1
IRQ0 input
Table 9-3 Port 1 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes (cont)
Pin
P14 / WAIT
Functions and How they are Selected
The function depends on the wait mode select 1 bit (WMS1) of the wait-state control
register (WCR) and the P14DDR bit as follows:
WMS1
P14DDR
Pin function
P13 / BREQ
0
P14 input
1
1
P14 output
0
1
WAIT input
The function depends on the BRLE bit and the P13DDR bit as follows:
BRLE
P13DDR
Pin function
P12 / BACK
0
0
0
P13 input
1
P13 output
1
0
1
BREQ input
The function depends on the BRLE bit and the P12DDR bit as follows:
BRLE
P12DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
P12 input
P11DDR
Pin function
0
Input
1
E clock output
P10DDR
Pin function
0
Input
1
ø clock output
1
P12 output
P11 / E
P10 / ø
146
0
1
BACK input
Table 9-4 Port 1 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Modes
Pin
P17 / TMO
Selection of Pin Functions
The function depends on output select bits 3 to 0 (OS3 to OS0) of the 8-bit timer
control/status register (TCSR) and on the P17DDR bit as follows:
OS3 to OS0
P17DDR
Pin function
P16 / IRQ1
At least one bit is “1”
0
1
TMO output
The function depends on the IRQ1E bit and the P16DDR bit as follows:
IRQ1E
P16DDR
Pin function
P15 / IRQ0
All four bits are “0”
0
1
P17 output
P17 input
0
0
P16 input
1
1
P16 output
0
1
IRQ1 input
The function depends on the IRQ0E bit and the P15DDR bit as follows:
IRQ0E
P15DDR
Pin function
0
P15 input
0
1
P14DDR
Pin function
0
Input
1
Output
P13DDR
Pin function
0
Input
1
Output
1
P15 output
P14
P13
147
0
1
IRQ0 input
Table 9-4 Port 1 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Modes (cont)
Pin
P12
Selection of Pin Functions
P12DDR
Pin function
0
Input
1
Output
P11DDR
Pin function
0
Input
1
E clock output
P10DDR
Pin function
0
Input
1
ø clock output
P11 / E
P10 / ø
9.3 Port 2
9.3.1 Overview
Port 2 is a five-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-2. It functions as
an input/output port only in the single-chip mode. In the expanded modes it is used for output of
bus control signals.
Outputs from port 2 can drive one TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair.
Port
2
Pin
P24 / WR
P23 / RD
P22 / DS
P21 / R/W
P20 / AS
Expanded Modes
WR (output)
RD (output)
DS (output)
R/W (output)
AS (output)
Single-Chip Mode
P24 (input/output)
P23 (input/output)
P22 (input/output)
P21 (input/output)
P20 (input/output)
Figure 9-2 Pin Functions of Port 2
148
9.3.2 Port 2 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-5 lists the registers of port 2.
Table 9-5 Port 2 Registers
Name
Port 2 data direction register
Port 2 data register
Abbreviation
P2DDR
P2DR
Read/Write
W
R/W
Initial Value
H'E0
H'E0
Address
H'FF81
H'FF83
1. Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR)—H'FF81
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
Initial value
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
W
W
W
W
W
P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR
P2DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 2.
Single-Chip Mode: A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P2DDR is set
to “1,” and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to “0.”
Bits 4 to 0 can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as “1,” regardless of their true values.
Bits 7 to 5 are reserved. They cannot be modified and are always read as “1.”
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P2DDR is initialized to H'E0, making all five pins
input pins. P2DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P2DDR bit is set to “1”
when the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the
value in the port 2 data register.
Expanded Modes: All bits of P2DDR are fixed at “1” and cannot be modified.
149
2. Port 2 Data Register (P2DR)—H'FF83
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
Initial value
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P2DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P24 to P20.
Bits 7 to 5 are reserved. They cannot be modified and are always read as “1.”
When the CPU reads P2DR, for output pins it reads the value in the P2DR latch, but for input
pins, it obtains the pin status directly.
9.3.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port 2 has different functions in the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, 4) and the single-chip mode
(mode 7). Separate descriptions are given below.
Pin Functions in Expanded Modes: In the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, and 4), all pins of
P2DDR is automatically set to “1” for output. Port 2 outputs the bus control signals (AS, R/W,
DS, RD, WR).
Figure 9-3 shows the pin functions in the expanded modes.
Port
2
WR
RD
DS
R/W
AS
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
Figure 9-3 Port 2 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes
150
Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode: In the single-chip mode (mode 7), each of the port 2
pins can be designated as an input pin or an output pin, as indicated in figure 9-4, by setting the
corresponding bit in P2DDR to “1” for output or clearing it to “0” for input.
Port
2
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
Figure 9-4 Port 2 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode
9.4 Port 3
9.4.1 Overview
Port 3 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-5. In the
expanded modes it operates as the external data bus (D7 – D0). In the single-chip mode it operates
as a general-purpose input/output port.
Outputs from port 3 can drive one TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair.
Port
3
Pin
P37 / D7
P36 / D6
P35 / D5
P34 / D4
P33 / D3
P32 / D2
P31 / D1
P30 / D0
Expanded Modes
D7 (input/output)
D6 (input/output)
D5 (input/output)
D4 (input/output)
D3 (input/output)
D2 (input/output)
D1 (input/output)
D0 (input/output)
Single-Chip Mode
P37 (input/output)
P36 (input/output)
P35 (input/output)
P34 (input/output)
P33 (input/output)
P32 (input/output)
P31 (input/output)
P30 (input/output)
Figure 9-5 Pin Functions of Port 3
151
9.4.2 Port 3 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-6 lists the registers of port 3.
Table 9-6 Port 3 Registers
Name
Port 3 data direction register
Port 3 data register
Abbreviation
P3DDR
P3DR
Read/Write
W
R/W
Initial Value
H'00
H'00
Address
H'FF84
H'FF86
1. Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR)—H'FF84
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P3DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 3.
Single-Chip Mode: A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P3DDR is set
to “1,” and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to “0.”
P3DDR can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as “1,” regardless of their true values.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P3DDR is initialized to H'00, making all eight pins
input pins. P3DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P3DDR bit is set to “1”
when the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the
value in the port 3 data register.
Expanded Modes: P3DDR is not used.
152
2. Port 3 Data Register (P3DR)—H'FF86
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P3DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P37 to P30.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P3DR is initialized to H'00.
When the CPU reads P3DR, for output pins it reads the value in the P3DR latch, but for input
pins, it obtains the pin status directly.
9.4.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port 3 has different functions in the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, 4) and the single-chip mode
(mode 7). Separate descriptions are given below.
Pin Functions in Expanded Modes: In the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, and 4), port 3 is
automatically used as the data bus and P3DDR is ignored. Figure 9-6 shows the pin functions
for the expanded modes.
Port
3
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
Figure 9-6 Port 3 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes
153
Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode: In the single-chip mode (mode 7), each of the port 3 pins
can be designated as an input pin or an output pin, as indicated in figure 9-7, by setting the
corresponding bit in P3DDR to “1” for output or clearing it to “0” for input.
Port
3
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
Figure 9-7 Port 3 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode
9.5 Port 4
9.5.1 Overview
Port 4 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-8. In the
expanded modes it provides the low bits (A7 – A0) of the address bus. In the single-chip mode it
operates as a general-purpose input/output port.
Outputs from port 4 can drive one TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair or LED (with 8mA current sink).
Port
4
Pin
P47 / A7
P46 / A6
P45 / A5
P44 / A4
P43 / A3
P42 / A2
P41 / A1
P40 / A0
Expanded Modes
A7 (output)
A6 (output)
A5 (output)
A4 (output)
A3 (output)
A2 (output)
A1 (output)
A0 (output)
Single-Chip Mode
P47 (input/output)
P46 (input/output)
P45 (input/output)
P44 (input/output)
P43 (input/output)
P42 (input/output)
P41 (input/output)
P40 (input/output)
Figure 9-8 Pin Functions of Port 4
154
9.5.2 Port 4 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-7 lists the registers of port 4.
Table 9-7 Port 4 Registers
Name
Port 4 data direction register
Port 4 data register
Abbreviation
P4DDR
P4DR
Read/Write
W
R/W
Initial Value
H'00
H'00
Address
H'FF85
H'FF87
1. Port 4 Data Direction Register (P4DDR)—H'FF85
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P4DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 4.
Single-Chip Mode: A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P4DDR is set
to “1,” and as in input pin if the bit is cleared to “0.”
P4DDR can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as “1,” regardless of their true values.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P4DDR is initialized to H'00, making all eight pins
input pins. P4DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P4DDR bit is set to “1”
when the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the
value in the port 4 data register.
Expanded Modes: All bits of P4DDR are fixed at “1” and cannot be modified.
155
2. Port 4 Data Register (P4DR)—H'FF87
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P4DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P47 to P40.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P4DR is initialized to H'00.
When the CPU reads P4DR, for output pins it reads the value in the P4DR latch, but for input
pins, it obtains the pin status directly.
9.5.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port 4 has different functions in the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, 4) and the single-chip mode
(mode 7). Separate descriptions are given below.
Pin Functions in Expanded Modes: In the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, and 4), port 4 is
used for output of the low bits (A7 – A0) of the address bus. P4DDR is automatically set for
output. Figure 9-9 shows the pin functions for the expanded modes.
Port
4
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
Figure 9-9 Port 4 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes
Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode: In the single-chip mode (mode 7), each of the port 4
pins can be designated as an input pin or an output pin, as indicated in figure 9-10, by setting
the corresponding bit in P4DDR to “1” for output or clearing it to “0” for input.
156
Port
4
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
Figure 9-10 Port 4 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode
9.6 Port 5
9.6.1 Overview
Port 5 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-11. In the
expanded modes that use the on-chip ROM (modes 2 and 4), the pins of port 5 function either as
general-purpose input pins or as bits A15 – A8 of the address bus, depending on the port 5 data
direction register (P5DDR).
Port 5 has built-in MOS pull-ups that can be turned on or off under program control.
Outputs from port 5 can drive one TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair.
Port
5
Pin
P57 / A15
P56 / A14
P55 / A13
P54 / A12
P53 / A11
P52 / A10
P51 / A9
P50 / A8
Modes 1 and 3
A15 (output)
A14 (output)
A13 (output)
A12 (output)
A11 (output)
A10 (output)
A9 (output)
A8 (output)
Modes 2 and 4
P57 (input) / A15 (output)
P56 (input) / A14 (output)
P55 (input) / A13 (output)
P54 (input) / A12 (output)
P53 (input) / A11 (output)
P52 (input) / A10 (output)
P51 (input) / A9 (output)
P50 (input) / A8 (output)
Figure 9-11 Pin Functions of Port 5
157
Single-Chip Mode
P57 (input/output)
P56 (input/output)
P55 (input/output)
P54 (input/output)
P53 (input/output)
P52 (input/output)
P51 (input/output)
P50 (input/output)
9.6.2 Port 5 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-8 lists the registers of port 5.
Table 9-8 Port 5 Registers
Name
Port 5 data direction register
Port 5 data register
Abbreviation
P5DDR
P5DR
Read/Write
W
R/W
Initial Value
H'00
H'00
Address
H'FF88
H'FF8A
1. Port 5 Data Direction Register (P5DDR)—H'FF88
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P57DDR P56DDR P55DDR P54DDR P53DDR P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P5DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 5.
Single-Chip Mode: A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P5DDR is set
to “1,” and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to “0.”
P5DDR can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error,
but all bits are read as “1,” regardless of their true values.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P5DDR is initialized to H'00, making all eight
pins input pins. P5DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P5DDR bit is
set to “1” when the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to
output the value in the port 5 data register.
Expanded Modes Using On-Chip ROM (Modes 2 and 4): If a “1” is set in P5DDR, the
corresponding pin is used for address output. If a “0” is set in P5DDR, the pin is used for
general-purpose input. P5DDR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the hardware standby
mode.
Expanded Modes Not Using On-Chip ROM (Modes 1 and 3): All bits of P5DDR are fixed
at “1” and cannot be modified.
158
Port 5 Data Register (P5DR)—H'FF8A
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P5DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P57 to P50.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P5DR is initialized to H'00.
When the CPU reads P5DR, for output pins it reads the value in the P5DR latch, but for input
pins, it obtains the pin status directly.
9.6.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port 5 operates in one way in modes 1 and 3, in another way in modes 2 and 4, and in a third way
in mode 7. Separate descriptions are given below.
Pin Functions in Modes 1 and 3: In modes 1 and 3 (expanded modes in which the on-chip ROM
is not used), all bits of P5DDR are automatically set to “1” for output, and the pins of port 5 carry
bits A15 – A8 of the address bus. Figure 9-12 shows the pin functions for modes 1 and 3.
Port
5
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
Figure 9-12 Port 5 Pin Functions in Modes 1 and 3
159
Pin Functions in Modes 2 and 4: In modes 2 and 4, (expanded modes in which the on-chip
ROM is used), software can select whether to use port 5 for general-purpose input, or for
output of bits A15 – A8 of the address bus.
If a bit in P5DDR is set to “1,” the corresponding pin is used for address output. If the bit is
cleared to “0,” the pin is used for input. A reset clears all P5DDR bits to “0,” so before the
address bus is used, all necessary bits in P5DDR must be set to “1.”
Figure 9-13 shows the pin functions in modes 2 and 4.
Port
5
When P5DDR
Bit is Set to “1”
A15 (output)
A14 (output)
A13 (output)
A12 (output)
A11 (output)
A10 (output)
A9 (output)
A8 (output)
When P5DDR Bit
is Cleared to “0”
P57 (input)
P56 (input)
P55 (input)
P54 (input)
P53 (input)
P52 (input)
P51 (input)
P50 (input)
Figure 9-13 Port 5 Pin Functions in Modes 2 and 4
Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode: In the single-chip mode (mode 7), each of the port 5
pins can be designated as an input pin or an output pin, as indicated in figure 9-14, by setting
the corresponding bit in P5DDR to “1” for output or clearing it to “0” for input.
Port
5
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
Figure 9-14 Port 5 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode
160
9.6.4 Built-In MOS Pull-Up
The MOS input pull-ups of port 5 are turned on by clearing the corresponding bit in P5DDR to
“0” and writing a “1” in P5DR. These pull-ups are turned off at a reset and in the hardware
standby mode. Table 9-9 indicates the status of the MOS pull-ups in various modes.
Table 9-9 Status of MOS Pull-Ups for Port 5
Mode
Reset
Hardware Standby Mode
1
OFF
OFF
2
3
4
7
* Including the software standby mode.
Notation:
OFF:
ON/OFF:
Other Operating States*
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
The MOS pull-up is always off.
The MOS pull-up is on when P5DDR = 0 and P5DR = 1, and off otherwise.
Note on Usage of MOS Pull-Ups
If the bit manipulation instructions listed below are executed on input/output ports 5 and 6 which
have selectable MOS pull-ups, the logic levels at input pins will be transferred to the DR latches,
causing the MOS pull-ups to be unintentionally switched on or off.
This can occur with the following bit manipulation instructions: BSET, BCLR, BNOT
(1)
Specific Example (BSET Instruction): An example will be shown in which the BSET
instruction is executed for port 5 under the following conditions:
P57:
Input pin, low, MOS pull-up transistor on
P56:
Input pin, high, MOS pull-up transistor off
P55 – P50: Output pins, low
The intended purpose of this BSET instruction is to switch the output level at P50 from low
to high.
161
A: Before Execution of BSET Instruction
Input/output
Pin state
DDR
DR
Pull-up
P57
Input
Low
0
1
On
P56
Input
High
0
0
Off
P55
Output
Low
1
0
Off
P54
Output
Low
1
0
Off
P53
Output
Low
1
0
Off
P52
Output
Low
1
0
Off
P51
Output
Low
1
0
Off
P50
Output
Low
1
0
Off
P51
Output
Low
1
0
Off
P50
Output
High
1
1
Off
B: Execution of BSET Instruction
BSET.B
#0
;set bit 0 in data register
@PORT5
C: After Execution of BSET Instruction
Input/output
Pin state
DDR
DR
Pull-up
P57
Input
Low
0
0
Off
P56
Input
High
0
1
On
P55
Output
Low
1
0
Off
P54
Output
Low
1
0
Off
P53
Output
Low
1
0
Off
P52
Output
Low
1
0
Off
Explanation: To execute the BSET instruction, the CPU begins by reading port 5. Since P57 and
P56 are input pins, the CPU reads the level of these pins directly, not the value in the data register.
It reads P57 as low (0) and P56 as high (1).
Since P55 to P50 are output pins, for these pins the CPU reads the value in the data register (0).
The CPU therefore reads the value of port 5 as H'40, although the actual value in P5DR is H'80.
Next the CPU sets bit 0 of the read data to 1, changing the value to H'41.
Finally, the CPU writes this value (H'41) back to P5DR to complete the BSET instruction.
As a result, bit P50 is set to 1, switching pin P50 to high output. In addition, bits P57 and P56 are
both modified, changing the on/off settings of the MOS pull-up transistors of pins P57 and P56.
Programming Solution: The switching of the pull-ups for P57 and P56 in the preceding example
can be avoided by using a byte in RAM as a work area for P5DR, performing bit manipulations on
the work area, then writing the result to P5DR.
162
A: Before Execution of BSET Instruction
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.B
#80, R0
R0, @RAM0
R0, @PORT5
P57
Input
Low
0
1
On
1
Input/output
Pin state
DDR
DR
Pull-up
RAM0
P56
Input
High
0
0
Off
0
;write data (H'80) for data register
;write to work area (RAM0)
;write to P5DR
P55
Output
Low
1
0
Off
0
P54
Output
Low
1
0
Off
0
P53
Output
Low
1
0
Off
0
P52
Output
Low
1
0
Off
0
P51
Output
Low
1
0
Off
0
P50
Output
Low
1
0
Off
0
P51
Output
Low
1
0
Off
0
P50
Output
High
1
1
Off
0
B: Execution of BSET Instruction
BSET.B
#0, @RAM0
;set bit 0 in work area (RAM0)
C: After Execution of BSET Instruction
MOV.B @RAM0, R0
MOV.B R0, @PORT5
Input/output
Pin state
DDR
DR
Pull-up
RAM0
P57
Input
Low
0
1
On
1
;get value in work area (RAM0)
;write value to P5DR
P56
Input
High
0
0
Off
0
P55
Output
Low
1
0
Off
0
P54
Output
Low
1
0
Off
0
P53
Output
Low
1
0
Off
0
P52
Output
Low
1
0
Off
0
9.7 Port 6
9.7.1 Overview
Port 6 is a 4-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-15. In mode 4 (the
expanded maximum mode that uses the on-chip ROM), the pins of port 6 function either as
general-purpose input pins or as the page address bus, depending on the port 6 data direction
register (P6DDR).
Port 6 has built-in MOS pull-ups that can be turned on or off under program control.
Outputs from port 6 can drive one TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair.
163
Port
6
Pin
Mode 3
Mode 4
P63 / A19
P62 / A18
P61 / A17
P60 / A16
A19
A18
A17
A16
P63
P62
P61
P60
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
(input) / A19
(input) / A18
(input) / A17
(input) / A16
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
Mode 1 and 2 and
Single-Chip Mode
P63 (input/output)
P62 (input/output)
P61 (input/output)
P60 (input/output)
Figure 9-15 Pin Functions of Port 6
9.7.2 Port 6 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-10 lists the registers of port 6.
Table 9-10 Port 6 Registers
Name
Port 6 data direction register
Port 6 data register
Abbreviation
P6DDR
P6DR
Read/Write
W
R/W
Initial Value
H'F0
H'F0
Address
H'FF89
H'FF8B
1. Port 6 Data Direction Register (P6DDR)—H'FF89
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
Initial value
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
W
W
W
W
P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR
P6DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 6.
Single-Chip Mode and Expanded Minimum Modes: A pin functions as an output pin if the
corresponding bit in P6DDR is set to “1,” and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to “0.”
Bits 3 to 0 can be written but not read. An attempt to read these bits does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as “1,” regardless of their true values.
164
Bits 7 to 4 are reserved. They cannot be modified and are always read as “1.”
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P6DDR is initialized to H'F0, making all four pins
input pins. P6DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so in the single-chip mode, or
expanded minimum mode, if a P6DDR bit is set to “1” when the chip enters the software standby
mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the value in the port 6 data register.
Expanded Maximum Mode Using On-Chip ROM (Mode 4): If a “1” is set in P6DDR, the
corresponding pin is used for address output. If a “0” is set in P6DDR, the pin is used for
input. P6DDR is initialized to H'F0 at a reset and in the hardware standby mode.
Expanded Maximum Mode Not Using On-Chip ROM (Mode 3): All bits of P6DDR are
fixed at “1” and cannot be modified.
2. Port 6 Data Register (P6DR)—H'FF8B
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
P63
P62
P61
P60
Initial value
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P6DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P63 to P60.
Bits 7 to 4 are reserved. They cannot be modified and are always read as “1.”
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P6DR is initialized to H'F0.
When the CPU reads P6DR, for output pins it reads the value in the P6DR latch, but for input
pins, it obtains the pin status directly.
9.7.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode
The usage of port 6 depends on the MCU operating mode. Separate descriptions are given below.
Pin Functions in Mode 3: In mode 3 (the expanded maximum mode in which the on-chip ROM
is not used), P6DDR is automatically set for output, and the pins of port 6 carry the page address
bits (A19 – A16) of the address bus. Figure 9-16 shows the pin functions for mode 3.
165
Port
6
A19
A18
A17
A16
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
Figure 9-16 Port 6 Pin Functions in Mode 3
Pin Functions in Mode 4: In mode 4, (the expanded maximum mode in which the on-chip ROM
is used), software can select whether to use port 6 for general-purpose input, or for output of the
page address bits.
If a bit in P6DDR is set to “1,” the corresponding pin is used for page address output. If the bit is
cleared to “0,” the pin is used for input. A reset initializes these pins to the general-purpose input
function, so when the address bus is used, all necessary bits in P6DDR must first be set to “1.”
Figure 9-17 shows the pin functions in mode 4.
Port
6
When P6DDR Bit
Is Set to “1”
A19 (output)
A18 (output)
A17 (output)
A16 (output)
When P6DDR Bit
is Cleared to “0”
P63 (input)
P62 (input)
P61 (input)
P60 (input)
Figure 9-17 Port 6 Pin Functions in Mode 4
Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode and Expanded Minimum Modes: In the single-chip mode
(mode 7) and expanded minimum modes (modes 1 and 2), each of the port 6 pins can be
designated as an input pin or an output pin, as indicated in figure 9-18, by setting the
corresponding bit in P6DDR to “1” for output or clearing it to “0” for input.
166
Port
6
P63
P62
P61
P60
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
Figure 9-18 Port 6 Pin Functions in Modes 7, 2, and 1
9.7.4 Built-in MOS Pull-Up
Port 6 has programmable MOS input pull-ups which are turned on by clearing the corresponding
bit in P6DDR to “0” and writing a “1” in P6DR. These pull-ups are turned off at a reset and in the
hardware standby mode. Table 9-11 indicates the status of the MOS pull-ups in various modes.
Table 9-11 Status of MOS Pull-Ups for Port 5
Mode
Reset
Hardware Standby Mode
1
OFF
OFF
2
3
4
7
* Including the software standby mode.
Notation:
OFF:
ON/OFF:
Other Operating States*
ON/OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
The MOS pull-up is always off.
The MOS pull-up is on when P6DDR = 0 and P6DR = 1, and off otherwise.
Note: When using the built-in pull-ups, see the “Note on Usage of MOS Pull-Ups” in
section 9.6.4.
9.8 Port 7
9.8.1 Overview
Port 7 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-19. Its pins also
carry input and output signals for the on-chip free-running timers (FRT1, FRT2, and FRT3), and
two input signals for the on-chip 8-bit timer.
167
Port 7 has Schmitt inputs. Outputs from port 7 can drive one TTL load and a 30pF capacitive
load. They can also drive a Darlington transistor pair.
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
Port
7
(input/output) / FTOA1 (output)
(input/output) / FTOB3 (output) / FTCI3 (input)
(input/output) / FTOB2 (output) / FTCI2 (input)
(input/output) / FTOB1 (output) / FTCI1 (input)
(input/output) / FTI3 (input) /TMRI (input)
(input/output) / FTI2 (input)
(input/output) / FTI1 (input)
(input/output) / TMCI (input)
Figure 9-19 Pin Functions of Port 7
9.8.2 Port 7 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-12 lists the registers of port 7.
Table 9-12 Port 7 Registers
Name
Port 7 data direction register
Port 7 data register
Abbreviation
P7DDR
P7DR
Read/Write
W
R/W
Initial Value
H'00
H'00
Address
H'FF8C
H'FF8E
1. Port 7 Data Direction Register (P7DDR)—H'FF8C
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P77DDR P76DDR P75DDR P74DDR P73DDR P72DDR P71DDR P70DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P7DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 7. A pin functions as an
output pin if the corresponding bit in P7DDR is set to “1,” and as an input pin if the bit is cleared
to “0.”
P7DDR can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as “1,” regardless of their true values.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P7DDR is initialized to H'00, setting all pins for
input. P7DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P7DDR bit is set to “1”
when the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the
value in the port 7 data register.
168
A transition to the software standby mode initializes the on-chip supporting modules, so any pins
of port 7 that were being used by an on-chip timer when the transition occurs revert to generalpurpose input or output, controlled by P7DDR and P7DR.
2. Port 7 Data Register (P7DR)—H'FF8E
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P7DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P77 to P70. When the CPU reads P7DR, for
output pins it reads the value in the P7DR latch, but for input pins, it obtains the pin status directly.
9.8.3 Pin Functions
The pin functions of port 7 are the same in all MCU operating modes. As figure 9-19 indicated,
these pins are used for input and output of on-chip timer signals as well as for general-purpose
input and output. For some pins, two or more functions can be enabled simultaneously.
P77 can be used either for general-purpose input/output, or as the output pin for the output
compare A signal (FTOA) from free-running timer 1.
P76 to P74 can be used either for general-purpose input/output, or as the output pins for the output
compare B signals (FTOB) from free-running timers 3 to 1. When used for general-purpose input
and output, they can also provide external clock input (FTCI) to the free-running counters. This
additional function is selected when the clock select 1 and 0 bits (CKS1 and CKS0) in the freerunning timer control registers are both set to “1.”
P73 to P71 function simultaneously as general-purpose input/output pins and as input pins for the
input capture signals (FTI) of free-running timers 3 to 1.
169
P73 and P70 can be used for timer reset input (TMRI) and timer clock input (TMCI) for the 8-bit
timer, as well as for general-purpose input and output.
Table 9-13 shows how the functions of the pins of port 7 are selected.
Table 9-13 Port 7 Pin Functions
Pin
P77 /
FTOA1
Selection of Pin Functions
The function depends on the output enable A bit (OEA) of the FRT1 timer control
register (TCR) and on the P77DDR bit as follows:
OEA
P77DDR
Pin function
P76 /
FTOB3 /
FTCI3
1
0
1
FTOA1 output
0
1
0
1
P76 input
P76 output
FTCI3 input
0
1
FTOB3 output
The function depends on the output compare B bit (OEB) of the FRT2 timer control
register (TCR) and on the P75DDR bit as follows:
OEB
P75DDR
Pin function
P74 /
FTOB1 /
FTCI1
1
P77 output
The function depends on the output compare B bit (OEB) of the FRT3 timer control
register (TCR) and on the P76DDR bit as follows:
OEB
P76DDR
Pin function
P75 /
FTOB2 /
FTCI2
0
0
P77 input
0
1
0
1
P75 input
P75 output
FTCI2 input
0
1
FTOB2 output
The function depends on the output compare B bit (OEB) of the FRT1 timer control
register (TCR) and on the P74DDR bit as follows:
OEB
P74DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P74 input
P74 output
FTCI1 input
170
0
1
FTOB1 output
Table 9-13 Port 7 Pin Functions (cont)
Pin
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
Selection of Pin Functions
The function depends on the counter clear bits 1 and 0 (CCLR1 and CCLR0) in the
timer control register (TCR) of the 8-bit timer, and on the P73DDR bit as follows:
CCLR1, CCLR0: At least one bit is “0.” Both bits are set to “1”
P73DDR
Pin function
0
1
P73 input
P73 output
FTI3 input and TMRI input
P72DDR
Pin function
0
1
P72 input
P72 output
FTI2 input
P71DDR
Pin function
0
1
P71 output
P71 input
FTI1 input
P72 / FTI2
P71 / FTI1
P70 / TMCI
This pin always has a general-purpose input/output function, and can simultaneously
be used for external clock input for the 8-bit timer, depending on clock select bits 2 to
0 (CKS2, CKS1, and CKS0) in the timer control register (TCR). See section 11, “8bit Timer” for details.
P70DDR
Pin function
0
1
P70 input
P70 output
TMCI input
171
9.9 Port 8
9.9.1 Overview
Port 8 is an 8-bit input port that also receives inputs for the on-chip A/D converter. The pin
functions are the same in all MCU operating modes, as shown in figure 9-20.
P87
P86
P85
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
Port
8
(input) / AN7 (input)
(input) / AN6 (input)
(input) / AN5 (input)
(input) / AN4 (input)
(input) / AN3 (input)
(input) / AN2 (input)
(input) / AN1 (input)
(input) / AN0 (input)
Figure 9-20 Pin Functions of Port 8
9.9.2 Port 8 Registers
Register Configuration: Port 8 has only the data register described in table 9-14. Since it is
exclusively an input port, there is no data direction register.
Table 9-14 Port 8 Registers
Name
Port 8 data register
Abbreviation
P8DR
Read/Write
R
Address
H'FF8F
1. Port 8 Data Register (P8DR)—H'FF8F
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P87
P86
P85
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
When the CPU reads P8DR it always reads the current status of each pin, except that during A/D
conversion the pin currently being converted reads “1” regardless of the actual input voltage at that
pin.
172
9.10 Port 9
9.10.1 Overview
Port 9 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-21. In addition to
general-purpose input and output, its pins are used for the output compare A signals from freerunning timers 2 and 3, for PWM timer output, and for input and output by the on-chip serial
communication interface 9 (SCI). The pin functions are the same in all MCU operating modes.
Outputs from port 9 can drive one TTL load and a 30pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair.
P97
P96
P95
P94
P93
P92
P91
P90
Port
9
(input/output) / SCK (input/output)
(input/output) / RXD (input)
(input/output) / TXD (output)
(input/output) / PW3 (output)
(input/output) / PW2 (output)
(input/output) / PW1 (output)
(input/output) / FTOA3 (output)
(input/output) / FTOA2 (output)
Figure 9-21 Pin Functions of Port 9
9.10.2 Port 9 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-15 lists the registers of port 9.
Table 9-15 Port 9 Registers
Name
Port 9 data direction register
Port 9 data register
Abbreviation
P9DDR
P9DR
Read/Write
W
R/W
173
Initial Value
H'00
H'00
Address
H'FFFE
H'FFFF
1. Port 9 Data Direction Register (P9DDR)—H'FFFE
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P97DDR P96DDR P95DDR P94DDR P93DDR P92DDR P91DDR P90DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P9DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 9. A pin functions as an
output pin if the corresponding bit in P9DDR is set to “1,” and as an input pin if the bit is cleared
to “0.”
P9DDR can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as “1,” regardless of their true values.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P9DDR is initialized to H'00, setting all pins for
input. P9DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P9DDR bit is set to “1”
when the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the
value in the port 9 data register.
A transition to the software standby mode initializes the on-chip supporting modules, so any pins
of port 9 that were being used by an on-chip module (example: free-running timer output) when
the transition occurs revert to general-purpose input or output, controlled by P9DDR and P9DR.
2. Port 9 Data Register (P9DR)—H'FFFF
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P97
P96
P95
P94
P93
P92
P91
P90
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P9DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P97 to P90. When the CPU reads P9DR, for
output pins it reads the value in the P9DR latch, but for input pins, it obtains the pin status directly.
9.10.3 Pin Functions
The pin functions of port 9 are the same in all MCU operating modes. As figure 9-21 indicated,
these pins are used for output of on-chip timer signals and for input and output of serial data and
clock signals as well as for general-purpose input and output. Specifically, they carry output
signals for free-running timers 2 and 3, output signals for the pulse-width modulation (PWM)
timer, and input and output signals for the serial communication interface.
174
Table 9-16 shows how the functions of the pins of port 9 are selected.
Table 9-16 Port 9 Pin Functions
Pin
P97 /
SCK
Selection of Pin Functions
The function depends on the communication mode bit (C/A) and the clock enable 1
and 2 bits (CKE1 and CKE0) of the serial control register (SCR) of the serial
communication interface as follows:
C/A
0
CKE1
0
1
0
CKE0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Pin function P97
SCI
SCI external
SCI internal
input internal clock input
clock output
or
clock
output* output
* Input or output is selected by the P97DDR bit.
P96 / RXD
1
0
1
SCI external
clock input
The function depends on the receive enable bit (RE) of the serial control register
(SCR) and on the P96DDR bit as follows:
RE
P96DDR
Pin function
P95 / TXD
1
0
0
P96 input
1
1
P96 output
0
1
RXD input
The function depends on the transmit enable bit (TE) of the serial control register
(SCR) and on the P95DDR bit as follows:
TE
P95DDR
Pin function
0
0
P95 input
1
1
P95 output
175
0
1
TXD output
Table 9-16 Port 9 Pin Functions (cont)
Pin
P94 / PW3
Selection of Pin Functions
The function depends on the output enable bit (OE) of the timer control register of
PWM timer channel 3 and on the P94DDR bit as follows:
OE
P94DDR
Pin function
P93 / PW2
0
1
PW3 output
0
0
P93 input
1
1
P93 output
0
1
PW2 output
0
0
P92 input
1
1
P92 output
0
1
PW1 output
The function depends on the output compare A bit (OEA) of the FRT3 timer control
FTOA3 register (TCR) and on the P91DDR bit as follows:
OEA
P91DDR
Pin function
P90 /
FTOA2
1
P94 output
The function depends on the output enable bit (OE) of the timer control register of
PWM timer channel 1 and on the P92DDR bit as follows:
OE
P92DDR
Pin function
P91 /
FTOA3
0
P94 input
1
The function depends on the output enable bit (OE) of the timer control register of
PWM timer channel 2 and on the P93DDR bit as follows:
OE
P93DDR
Pin function
P92 / PW1
0
0
0
P91 input
1
P91 output
1
0
1
FTOA3 output
The function depends on the output compare A bit (OEA) of the FRT3 timer control
FTOA2 register (TCR) and on the P90DDR bit as follows:
OEA
P90DDR
Pin function
0
0
P90 input
1
1
P90 output
176
0
1
FTOA2 output
Section 10 16-Bit Free-Running Timers
10.1 Overview
The H8/532 has an on-chip 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) module with three independent
channels (FRT1, FRT2, and FRT3). All three channels are functionally identical.
Each channel has a 16-bit free-running counter that it uses as a time base. Applications of the
FRT module include rectangular-wave output (up to two independent waveforms per channel),
input pulse width measurement, and measurement of external clock periods.
10.1.1 Features
The features of the free-running timer module are listed below.
• Selection of four clock sources
The free-running counters can be driven by an internal clock source (ø/4, ø/8, or ø/32), or an
external clock input (enabling use as an external event counter).
• Two independent comparators
Each free-running timer channel can generate two independent waveforms.
• Input capture function
The current count can be captured on the rising or falling edge (selectable) of an input signal.
• Four types of interrupts
Compare-match A and B, input capture, and overflow interrupts can be requested
independently.
The compare-match and input capture interrupts can be served by the data transfer controller
(DTC), enabling interrupt-driven data transfer with minimal CPU programming.
• Counter can be cleared under program control
The free-running counters can be cleared on compare-match A.
177
10.1.2. Block Diagram
Figure 10-1 shows a block diagram of one free-running timer channel.
External clock
Internal clock
ø/4
ø/8
FTCI
ø/32
Clock
Clock select
OCRA
Compare-match A
Comparator A
Bus interface
FTOA
Overflow
FTOB
FRC
Clear
FTI
Compare-match B
Comparator B
Control
OCRB
logic
Module
data
bus
Capture
ICR
TCSR
TCR
ICI
OCIA
OCIB
FOVI
Interrupt signals
OCRA:
OCRB:
FRC:
ICR:
TCSR:
TCR:
Output Compare Register A
Output Compare Register B
Free Running Counter
Input Capture Register
Timer Control/Status Register
Timer Control Register
Figure 10-1 Block Diagram of 16-Bit Free-Running Timer
178
Internal
data bus
10.1.3 Input and Output Pins
Table 10-1 lists the input and output pins of the free-running timer module.
Table 10-1 Input and Output Pins of Free-Running Timer Module
Channel Name
1
Output compare A
Output compare B or
counter clock input
Input capture
2
Output compare A
Output compare B or
counter clock input
Input capture
3
Output compare A
Output compare B or
counter clock input
Input capture
Abbreviation
FTOA1
FTOB1 /
FTCI1
FTI1
FTOA2
FTOB2 /
FTCI2
FTI2
FTOA3
FTOB3 /
FTCI3
FTI3
I/O
Output
Output /
Input
Input
Output
Output /
Input
Input
Output
Output /
Input
Input
179
Function
Output controlled by comparator A of FRT1
Output controlled by comparator B of FRT1,
or input of external clock source for FRT1
Trigger for capturing current count of FRT1
Output controlled by comparator A of FRT2
Output controlled by comparator B of FRT2,
or input of external clock source for FRT2
Trigger for capturing current count of FRT2
Output controlled by comparator A of FRT3
Output controlled by comparator B of FRT3,
or input of external clock source for FRT3
Trigger for capturing current count of FRT3
10.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 10-2 lists the registers of each free-running timer channel.
Table 10-2 Register Configuration
Initial
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Value
Timer control register
TCR
R/W
H'00
Timer control/status register
TCSR
R/(W)* H'00
Free-running counter (High)
FRC (H)
R/W
H'00
Free-running counter (Low)
FRC (L)
R/W
H'00
1
Output compare register A (High)
OCRA (H)
R/W
H'FF
Output compare register A (Low)
OCRA (L)
R/W
H'FF
Output compare register B (High)
OCRB (H)
R/W
H'FF
Output compare register B (Low)
OCRB (L)
R/W
H'FF
Input capture register (High)
ICR (H)
R
H'00
Input capture register (Low)
ICR (L)
R
H'00
Timer control register
TCR
R/W
H'00
Timer control/status register
TCSR
R/(W)* H'00
Free-running counter (High)
FRC (H)
R/W
H'00
Free-running counter (Low)
FRC (L)
R/W
H'00
2
Output compare register A (High)
OCRA (H)
R/W
H'FF
Output compare register A (Low)
OCRA (L)
R/W
H'FF
Output compare register B (High)
OCRB (H)
R/W
H'FF
Output compare register B (Low)
OCRB (L)
R/W
H'FF
Input capture register (High)
ICR (H)
R
H'00
Input capture register (Low)
ICR (L)
R
H'00
* Software can write a “0” to clear bits 7 to 4, but cannot write a “1” in these bits.
Channel
180
Address
H'FF90
H'FF91
H'FF92
H'FF93
H'FF94
H'FF95
H'FF96
H'FF97
H'FF98
H'FF99
H'FFA0
H'FFA1
H'FFA2
H'FFA3
H'FFA4
H'FFA5
H'FFA6
H'FFA7
H'FFA8
H'FFA9
Table 10-2 Register Configuration (cont)
Initial
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Value
Timer control register
TCR
R/W
H'00
Timer control/status register
TCSR
R/(W)* H'00
Free-running counter (High)
FRC (H)
R/W
H'00
Free-running counter (Low)
FRC (L)
R/W
H'00
3
Output compare register A (High)
OCRA (H)
R/W
H'FF
Output compare register A (Low)
OCRA (L)
R/W
H'FF
Output compare register B (High)
OCRB (H)
R/W
H'FF
Output compare register B (Low)
OCRB (L)
R/W
H'FF
Input capture register (High)
ICR (H)
R
H'00
Input capture register (Low)
ICR (L)
R
H'00
* Software can write a “0” to clear bits 7 to 4, but cannot write a “1” in these bits.
Address
H'FFB0
H'FFB1
H'FFB2
H'FFB3
H'FFB4
H'FFB5
H'FFB6
H'FFB7
H'FFB8
H'FFB9
10.2 Register Descriptions
10.2.1 Free-Running Counter (FRC)—H'FF92, H'FFA2, H'FFB2
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/WriteR/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Each FRC is a 16-bit readable/writable up-counter that increments on an internal pulse generated
from a clock source. The clock source is selected by the clock select 1 and 0 bits (CKS1 and
CKS0) of the timer control register (TCR).
The FRC can be cleared by compare-match A.
When the FRC overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, the overflow flag (OVF) in the timer
control/status register (TCSR) is set to “1.”
Because the FRC is a 16-bit register, a temporary register (TEMP) is used when the FRC is
written or read. See section 10.3, “CPU Interface” for details.
The FRCs are initialized to H'0000 at a reset and in the standby modes.
181
10.2.2 Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA and OCRB)—H'FF94 and H'FF96,
H'FFA4 and H'FFA6, H'FFB4 and H'FFB6
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/WriteR/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
OCRA and OCRB are 16-bit readable/writable registers, the contents of which are continually
compared with the value in the FRC. When a match is detected, the corresponding output
compare flag (OCFA or OCFB) is set in the timer control/status register (TCSR).
In addition, if the output enable bit (OEA or OEB) in the timer control register (TCR) is set to “1,”
when the output compare register and FRC values match, the logic level selected by the output
level bit (OLVLA or OLVLB) in the timer control status register (TCSR) is output at the output
compare pin (FTOA or FTOB).
The FTOA and FTOB output are “0” before the first compare-match.
Because OCRA and OCRB are 16-bit registers, a temporary register (TEMP) is used when they
are written. See section 10.3, “CPU Interface” for details.
OCRA and OCRB are initialized to H'FFFF at a reset and in the standby modes.
10.2.3 Input Capture Register (ICR)—H'FF98, H'FFA8, H'FFB8
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
The ICR is a 16-bit read-only register.
When the rising or falling edge of the signal at the input capture input pin is detected, the current
value of the FRC is copied to the ICR. At the same time, the input capture flag (ICF) in the timer
control/status register (TCSR) is set to “1.” The input capture edge is selected by the input edge
select bit (IEDG) in the TCSR.
Because the ICR is a 16-bit register, a temporary register (TEMP) is used when the ICR is written
or read. See section 10.3, “CPU Interface” for details.
182
To ensure input capture, the pulse width of the input capture signal should be at least 1.5 system
clock periods (1.5·ø).
ø
FTI
Minimum FTI Pulse Width
The ICR is initialized to H'0000 at a reset and in the standby modes.
Note: When input capture is detected, the FRC value is transferred to the ICR even if the input
capture flag (ICF) is already set.
10.2.4 Timer Control Register (TCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICIE
OCIEB
OCIEA
OVIE
OEB
OEA
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the FRC clock source, enables the
output compare signals, and enables interrupts.
The TCR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—Input Capture Interrupt Enable (ICIE): This bit selects whether to request an input
capture interrupt (ICI) when the input capture flag (ICF) in the timer status/control register
(TCSR) is set to “1.”
Bit 7
ICIE
0
1
Description
The input capture interrupt request (ICI) is disabled.
The input capture interrupt request (ICI) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Output Compare Interrupt Enable B (OCIEB): This bit selects whether to request
output compare interrupt B (OCIB) when output compare flag B (OCFB) in the timer
status/control register (TCSR) is set to “1.”
183
Bit 6
OCIEB
0
1
Description
Output compare interrupt request B (OCIB) is disabled.
Output compare interrupt request B (OCIB) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 5—Output Compare Interrupt Enable A (OCIEA): This bit selects whether to request
output compare interrupt A (OCIA) when output compare flag A (OCFA) in the timer
status/control register (TCSR) is set to “1.”
Bit 5
OCIEA
0
1
Description
Output compare interrupt request A (OCIA) is disabled.
Output compare interrupt request A (OCIA) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Timer overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): This bit selects whether to request a freerunning timer overflow interrupt (FOVI) when the timer overflow flag (OVF) in the timer
status/control register (TCSR) is set to “1.”
Bit 4
OVIE
0
1
Description
The free-running timer overflow interrupt request (FOVI) is disabled.
The free-running timer overflow interrupt request (FOVI) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Output Enable B (OEB): This bit selects whether to enable or disable output of the logic
level selected by the OLVLB bit in the timer status/control register (TCSR) at the output compare
B pin when the FRC and OCRB values match.
Bit 3
OEB
0
1
Description
Output compare B output is disabled.
Output compare B output is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 2—Output Enable A (OEA): This bit selects whether to enable or disable output of the logic
level selected by the OLVLA bit in the timer status/control register (TCSR) at the output compare
A pin when the FRC and OCRA values match.
184
Bit 2
OEA
0
1
Description
Output compare A output is disabled.
Output compare A output is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Select (CKS1 and CKS0): These bits select external clock input or one of
three internal clock sources for the FRC. External clock pulses are counted on the rising edge.
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKS1
CKS0
Description
0
0
Internal clock source (ø/4)
(Initial value)
0
1
Internal clock source (ø/8)
1
0
Internal clock source (ø/32)
1
1
External clock source (counted on the rising edge)*
* Output enable bit (bit 3) must be cleared to “0.”
10.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICF
OCFB
OCFA
OVF
OLVLB
OLVLA
IEDG
CCLRA
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The TCSR is an 8-bit readable and partially writable* register that selects the input capture edge
and output compare levels, and specifies whether to clear the counter on compare-match A. It also
contains four status flags.
The TCSR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes.
* Software can write a “0” in bits 7 to 4 to clear the flags, but cannot write a “1” in these bits.
Bit 7—Input Capture Flag (ICF): This status flag is set to “1” to indicate an input capture
event. It signifies that the FRC value has been copied to the ICR.
185
Bit 7
ICF
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when: (Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the ICF bit, then writes a “0” in this bit.
2. The data transfer controller (DTC) serves an input capture interrupt.
This bit is set to 1 when an input capture signal causes the FRC value to be copied to the ICR.
Bit 6—Output Compare Flag B (OCFB): This status flag is set to “1” when the FRC value
matches the OCRB value.
Bit 6
OCFB
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when: (Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the OCFB bit, then writes a “0” in this bit.
2. The data transfer controller (DTC) serves output compare interrupt B.
This bit is set to 1 when FRC = OCRB.
Bit 5—Output Compare Flag A (OCFA): This status flag is set to “1” when the FRC value
matches the OCRA value.
Bit 5
OCFA
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when: (Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the OCFA bit, then writes a “0” in this bit.
2. The data transfer controller (DTC) serves output compare interrupt A.
This bit is set to 1 when FRC = OCRA.
Bit 4—Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag is set to “1” when the FRC overflows
(changes from H'FFFF to H'0000).
Bit 4
OVF
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when the CPU reads (Initial value)
the OVF bit, then writes a “0” in this bit.
This bit is set to 1 when FRC changes from H'FFFF to H'0000.
Bit 3—Output Level B (OLVLB): This bit selects the logic level to be output at the FTOB pin
when the FRC and OCRB values match.
186
Bit 3
OLVLB
0
1
Description
A “0” logic level (Low) is output for compare-match B.
A “1” logic level (High) is output for compare-match B.
(Initial value)
Bit 2—Output Level A (OLVLA): This bit selects the logic level to be output at the FTOA pin
when the FRC and OCRA values match.
Bit 2
OLVLA
0
1
Description
A “0” logic level (Low) is output for compare-match A.
A “1” logic level (High) is output for compare-match A.
(Initial value)
Bit 1—Input Edge Select (IEDG): This bit selects whether to capture the count on the rising or
falling edge of the input capture signal.
Bit 1
IEDG
0
1
Description
The FRC value is copied to the ICR on the falling edge
of the input capture signal.
The FRC value is copied to the ICR on the rising edge
of the input capture signal.
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Counter Clear A (CCLRA): This bit selects whether to clear the FRC at compare-match
A (when the FRC and OCRA values match).
Bit 0
CCLRA Description
0
The FRC is not cleared. (Initial value)
1
The FRC is cleared at compare-match A.
187
10.3 CPU Interface
The FRC, OCRA, OCRB, and ICR are 16-bit registers, but they are connected to an 8-bit data bus.
When the CPU accesses these four registers, to ensure that both bytes are written or read
simultaneously, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP).
These registers are written and read as follows.
• Register Write
When the CPU writes to the upper byte, the upper byte of write data is placed in TEMP. Next,
when the CPU writes to the lower byte, this byte of data is combined with the byte in TEMP
and all 16 bits are written in the register simultaneously.
• Register Read
When the CPU reads the upper byte, the upper byte of data is sent to the CPU and the lower
byte is placed in TEMP. When the CPU reads the lower byte, it receives the value in TEMP.
Programs that access these four registers should normally use word access. Equivalently, they
may access first the upper byte, then the lower byte. Data will not be transferred correctly if the
bytes are accessed in reverse order, or if only one byte is accessed.
Coding Examples : Write the contents of R0 into OCRA in FRT1
MOV.W R0, @H'FF94
: Read ICR of FRT2
MOV.W, @H'FFA8, R0
The same considerations apply to access by the DTC.
Figure 10-2 shows the data flow when the FRC is accessed. The other registers are accessed in
the same way, except that when OCRA or OCRB is read, the upper and lower bytes are both
transferred directly to the CPU without using the temporary register.
188
< Upper byte write >
Module data bus
CPU wites
data H’AA
Bus interface
TEMP
[H’AA]
FRCH
[
]
FRCL
[
]
< Lower byte write >
Module data bus
CPU wites
data H’55
Bus interface
TEMP
[H’AA]
FRCH
[H’AA]
FRCL
[H’55]
Figure 10-2 (a) Write Access to FRC (When CPU Writes H'AA55)
189
< Upper byte read >
Module data bus
CPU wites
data H’AA
Bus interface
TEMP
[H’55]
FRCH
[H’AA]
FRCL
[H’55]
< Lower byte read >
Module data bus
CPU wites
data H’55
Bus interface
TEMP
[H’55]
FRCH
[
]
FRCL
[
]
Figure 10-2 (b) Read Access to FRC (When FRC Contains H'AA55)
10.4 Operation
10.4.1 FRC Incrementation Timing
The FRC increments on a pulse generated once for each period of the selected (internal or
external) clock source.
If external clock input is selected, the FRC increments on the rising edge of the clock signal.
Figure 10-3 shows the increment timing.
190
The pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5·ø clock periods. The counter will
not increment correctly if the pulse width is shorter than 1.5·ø clock periods.
ø
FTCI
Minimum FTCI Pulse Width
ø
External clock
source
FRC clock pulse
FRC
N
N+1
Figure 10-3 Increment Timing for External Clock Input
10.4.2 Output Compare Timing
Setting of Output Compare Flags A and B (OCFA and OCFB): The output compare flags are
set to “1” by an internal compare-match signal generated when the FRC value matches the OCRA
or OCRB value. This compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which the two values
match, just before the FRC increments to a new value.
Accordingly, when the FRC and OCR values match, the compare-match signal is not generated
until the next period of the clock source. Figure 10-4 shows the timing of the setting of the output
compare flags.
191
ø
Ø
FRC
N
OCR
N
N+1
Internal comparematch signal
OCF
Figure 10-4 Setting of Output Compare Flags
Output Timing: When a compare-match occurs, the logic level selected by the output level bit
(OLVLA or OLVLB) in the TCSR is output at the output compare pin (FTOA or FTOB).
Figure 10-5 shows the timing of this operation for compare-match A.
ø
Internal comparematch A signal
OLYLA
FTOA
Figure 10-5 Timing of Output Compare A
192
FRC Clear Timing: If the CCLRA bit is set to “1,” the FRC is cleared when compare-match A
occurs. Figure 10-6 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
Internal comparematch A signal
FRC
N
H’0000
Figure 10-6 Clearing of FRC by Compare-Match A
10.4.3 Input Capture Timing
1. Input Capture Timing: An internal input capture signal is generated from the rising or falling
edge of the input at the input capture pin (FTI), as selected by the IEDG bit in the TCSR.
Figure 10-7 shows the usual input capture timing when the rising edge is selected
(IEDG = “1”).
ø
Input at FTI pin
Internal input
capture signal
Figure 10-7 Input Capture Timing (Usual Case)
But if the upper byte of the ICR is being read when the input capture signal arrives, the internal
input capture signal is delayed by one state. Figure 10-8 shows the timing for this case.
193
Read cycle: CPU reads upper byte of ICR
T1
T2
T3
ø
Input at FTI pin
Internal input
capture signal
Figure 10-8 Input Capture Timing (1-State Delay)
Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICF) Setting: The input capture flag (ICF) is set to “1” by the
internal input capture signal. Figure 10-9 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
Internal input
capture signal
ICF
FRC
N–1
N
ICR
N+1
N
Figure 10-9 Setting of Input Capture Flag
194
10.4.4 Setting of FRC Overflow Flag (OVF)
The FRC overflow flag (OVF) is set to “1” when the FRC overflows (changes from H'FFFF to
H'0000). Figure 10-10 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
FRC
H’FFFF
H’0000
Internal overflow
signal
OVF
Figure 10-10 Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)
10.5 CPU Interrupts and DTC Interrupts
Each free-running timer channel can request four types of interrupts: input capture (ICI), output
compare A and B (OCIA and OCIB), and overflow (FOVI). Each interrupt is requested when the
corresponding enable and flag bits are set. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller
for each type of interrupt. Table 10-3 lists information about these interrupts.
Table 10-3 Free-Running Timer Interrupts
Interrupt
ICI
OCIA
OCIB
FOVI
Description
Requested when ICF is set
Requested when OCFA is set
Requested when OCFB is set
Requested when OVF is set
DTC Service Available?
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Priority
High
Low
The ICI, OCIA, and OCIB interrupts can be directed to the data transfer controller (DTC) to have
a data transfer performed in place of the usual interrupt-handling routine.
When the DTC serves one of these interrupts, it automatically clears the ICF, OCFA, or OCFB
flag to “0.” See section 6, “Data Transfer Controller” for further information on the DTC.
195
10.6 Synchronization of Free-Running Timers 1 to 3
10.6.1 Synchronization after a Reset
The three free-running timer channels are synchronized at a reset and remained synchronized
until:
• the clock source is changed;
• FRC contents are rewritten; or
• an FRC is cleared.
After a reset, each free-running counter operates on the ø/4 internal clock source.
10.6.2 Synchronization by Writing to FRCs
When synchronization among free-running timers 1 to 3 is lost, it can be restored by writing to the
free-running counters.
Synchronization on Internal Clock Source: When an internal clock is selected, free-running
timers 1 to 3 can be synchronized by writing data to their free-running counters as indicated in
table 10-4.
Table 10-4 Synchronization by Writing to FRCs
Clock Source
Write Interval
ø/4
4n + 1 (states)
ø/8
8n + 1 (states)
ø/32
32n + 1 (states)
m, n: Arbitrary integers
Write Data
m
(FRC1)
m+n
(FRC2)
m + 2n (FRC3)
After writing these data, synchronization can be checked by reading the three free-running
counters at the same interval as the write interval. If the read data have the same relative
differences as the write data, the three free-running timers are synchronized.
196
Example a: ø/4 clock source, 12-state write interval (n = 3), on-chip memory
LA: LDC.B #H'FF,BR
; Initialize base register for short-format instruction (MOV:S)
LDC.W #H'0700,SR
; Raise interrupt mask level to 7
MOV.W #m,R1
; Data for free-running timer 1
MOV.W #m+3,R2
; Data for free-running timer 2 (m + n = m + 3)
MOV.W #m+6,R3
; Data for free-running timer 3 (m + 2n = m + 2 × 3)
BSR
SET4
; Call write routine
.ALIGN 2
SET4:MOV:S.W R1,@H'92:8
BRN SET4:8
MOV:S.W R2,@H'A2:8
BRN SET4:8
MOV:S.W R3,@H'B2:8
RTS
; Align write instructions (MOV:S) at even address
; Write to FRC 1 (address H'FF92) 9 states
; 2-Byte dummy instruction
3 states
; Write to FRC 2 (address H'FFA2)
Total 12 states
; 2-Byte dummy instruction
; Write to FRC 3 (address H'FFB2)
Example b: ø/8 clock source, 16-state write interval (n = 2), on-chip memory
LB:
LDC.B
LDC.W
MOV.W
MOV.W
MOV.W
BSR
#H'FF,BR
#H'0700,SR
#m,R1
#m+2,R2
#m+4,R3
SET8
.ALIGN 2
SET8:MOV:S.W R1,@H'92:8
BRN SET8:8
XCH R1,R1
MOV:S.W R2,@H'A2:8
BRN SET8:8
XCH R2,R2
MOV:S.W R3,@H'B2:8
RTS
; 9 States
; 3 States
; 4 States
197
Total 16 states
Example c: ø/32 clock source, 32-state write interval (n = 1), on-chip memory
LC:
LDC.B #H'FF,BR
LDC.W #H'0700,SR
MOV.W #m,R1
MOV.W #m+1,R2
MOV.W #m+2,R3
BSR
SET32
; Align on even address
; 2 Bytes, 9 states
; 2 Bytes, 9 states
.ALIGN 2
SET32: MOV:S.W R1,@H'92:8
BSR WAIT:8
MOV:S.W R2,@H'A2:8
BSR WAIT:8
MOV:S.W R3,@H'B2:8
RTS
WAIT:
Total 32 states
; Align on even address
; 2 States
; 4 States
; 8 States
.ALIGN 2
NOP
XCH R1,R1
RTS
Note: The stack is assumed to be in on-chip RAM.
Example d: ø/4 clock source, 20-state write interval (n = 5), external memory
LD:
LDC.B #H'FF,BR
LDC.W #H'0700,SR
; Set interrupt mask level to 7
CLR.B @H'F8:8
; Disable wait states
MOV.W #m,R1
MOV.W #m+5,R2
MOV.W #m+10,R3
MOV:S.W R1,@H'92:8
; 13 States
Total 20 states
BRN
LD:8
; 2 Bytes, 7 states
MOV:S.W R2,@H'A2:8
BRN
LD:8
MOV:S.W R3,@H'B2:8
198
Example e: ø/8 clock source, 24-state write interval (n = 3), external memory
LE: LDC.B #H'FF,BR
LDC.W #H'0700,SR
CLR.B @H'F8"8
MOV.W #m,R1
MOV.W #m+3,R2
MOV.W #m+6,R3
MOV:S.W R1,@H'92:8
; 13 States
BRN
LE:8
; 2 Bytes,
7 states
Total 24 states
NOP
; 1 Byte,
4 states
MOV:S.W R2,@H'A2:8
BRN
LE:8
NOP
MOV:S.W R3,@H'B2:8
Example f: ø/32 clock source, 32-state write interval (n = 1), external memory
LF: LDC.B #H'FF,BR
LDC.W #H'0700,SR
CLR.B @H'F8:8
MOV.W #m,R1
MOV.W #m+1,R2
MOV.W #m+2,R3
MOV:S.W R1,@H'92:8
; External memory, so 13 states
XCH
R0,R0
;
8 states
Total 32 states
BRN
LF:8
; 2 Bytes,
7 states
NOP
;
4 states
MOV:S.W R2,@H'A2:8
XCH
R0,R0
BRN
LF:8
NOP
MOV:S.W R3,@H'B2:8
199
Synchronization on External Clock Source: When the external clock source is selected, the
free-running timers can be synchronized by halting their external clock inputs, then writing
identical values in their free-running counters.
10.7 Sample Application
In the example below, one free-running timer channel is used to generate two square-wave outputs
with a 50% duty factor and arbitrary phase relationship. The programming is as follows:
1. The CCLRA bit in the TCSR is set to “1.”
2. Each time a compare-match interrupt occurs, software inverts the corresponding output level
bit in the TCSR.
FRC
H’FFFF
Clear counter
OCRA
------
------
------
H’0000
------
OCRB
FTOA pin
FTOB pin
Figure 10-11 Square-Wave Output (Example)
10.8 Application Notes
Application programmers should note that the following types of contention can occur in the freerunning timers.
Contention between FRC Write and Clear: If an internal counter clear signal is generated
during the T3 state of a write cycle to the lower byte of a free-running counter, the clear signal
takes priority and the write is not performed.
200
Figure 10-12 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU write to lower byte of FRC
T2
T1
T3
ø
Internal address bus
FRC address
Internal write signal
FRC clear signal
FRC
N
H’0000
Figure 10-12 FRC Write-Clear Contention
Contention between FRC Write and Increment: If an FRC increment pulse is generated during
the T3 state of a write cycle to the lower byte of a free-running counter, the write takes priority and
the FRC is not incremented.
201
Figure 10-13 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU write to lower byte of FRC
T2
T1
T3
ø
Internal address bus
FRC address
Internal write signal
FRC clock pulse
FRC
N
M
Write data
Figure 10-13 FRC Write-Increment Contention
202
Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match: If a compare-match occurs during the
T3 state of a write cycle to the lower byte of OCRA or OCRB, the write takes precedence and the
compare-match signal is inhibited.
Figure 10-14 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU write to lower byte of OCRA or OCRB
T2
T1
T3
ø
Internal address bus
OCR address
Internal write signal
FRC
N
N+1
OCRA or OCRB
N
M
Write data
Compare-match
A or B signal
Inhibited
Figure 10-14 Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match
Incrementation Caused by Changing of Internal Clock Source: When an internal clock
source is changed, the changeover may cause the FRC to increment. This depends on the time at
which the clock select bits (CKS1 and CKS0) are rewritten, as shown in table 10-5.
The pulse that increments the FRC is generated at the falling edge of the internal clock source. If
clock sources are changed when the old source is High and the new source is Low, as in case No.
3 in table 10-5, the changeover generates a falling edge that triggers the FRC increment pulse.
Switching between an internal and external clock source can also cause the FRC to increment.
203
Table 10-5 Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources
No.
1
Description
Low → Low:
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while both
clock sources are Low.
Timing Chart
Old clock
source
New clock
source
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
N
N+1
CKS rewrite
2
Low → High:
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while old
clock source is Low and
new clock source is High.
Old clock
source
New clock
source
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
3
High → Low:
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while old
clock source is High and
new clock source is Low.
N
N+1
N+2
Old clock
source
New clock
source
*
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
N
N+1
N+2
CKS rewrite
∗ The switching of clock sources is regarded as a falling edge that increments the FRC.
204
Table 10-5 Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources (cont)
No.
4
Description
High → High:
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while both
clock sources are High.
Timing Chart
Old clock
source
New clock
source
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
N
N+1
N+2
CKS rewrite
205
Section 11 8-Bit Timer
11.1 Overview
The H8/532 chip includes a single 8-bit timer based on an 8-bit counter (TCNT). The timer has
two time constant registers (TCORA and TCORB) that are constantly compared with the TCNT
value to detect compare-match events. One application of the 8-bit timer is to generate a
rectangular-wave output with an arbitrary duty factor.
11.1.1 Features
The features of the 8-bit timer are listed below.
• Selection of four clock sources
The counter can be driven by an internal clock signal (ø/8, ø/64, or ø/1024) or an external clock
input (enabling use as an external event counter).
• Selection of three ways to clear the counter
The counter can be cleared on compare-match A or B, or by an external reset signal.
• Timer output controlled by two time constants
The single timer output (TMO) is controlled by two independent time constants, enabling the
timer to generate output waveforms with an arbitrary duty factor.
• Three types of interrupts
Compare-match A and B and overflow interrupts can be requested independently.
The compare match interrupts can be served by the data transfer controller (DTC), enabling
interrupt-driven data transfer with minimal CPU programming.
207
11.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 11-1 shows a block diagram of 8-bit timer.
External clocks
Internal clocks
ø/8
ø/64
TMCI
ø/1024
Clock
Clock select
TCORA
Compare-match A
Comparator A
TMO
TCNT
Clear
Control
logic
Comparator B
Compare-match B
TCORB
TCSR
TCR
CMIA
CMIB
OVI
Interrupt signals
TCORA:
TCORB:
TCNT:
TCSR:
TCR:
Bus interface
Overflow
TMRI
Time Constant Register A
Time Constant Register B
Timer Counter
Timer Control/Status Register
Timer Control Register
Figure 11-1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer
208
Module
data
bus
Internal
data bus
11.1.3 Input and Output Pins
Table 11-1 lists the input and output pins of the 8-bit timer.
Table 11-1 Input and Output Pins of 8-Bit Timer
Name
Timer output
Timer clock input
Timer reset input
Abbreviation
TMO
TMCI
TMRI
I/O
Output
Input
Input
Function
Output controlled by compare-match
External clock source for the counter
External reset signal for the counter
11.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 11-2 lists the registers of the 8-bit timer.
Table 11-2 8-Bit Timer Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Timer control register
TCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFD0
Timer control/status register
TCSR
R/(W)*
H'10
H'FFD1
Timer constant register A
TCORA
R/W
H'FF
H'FFD2
Timer constant register B
TCORB
R/W
H'FF
H'FFD3
Timer counter
TCNT
R/W
H'00
H'FFD4
* Software can write a “0” to clear bits 7 to 5, but cannot write a “1” in these bits.
11.2 Register Descriptions
11.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)—H'FFD4
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The timer counter (TCNT) is an 8-bit up-counter that increments on a pulse generated from one of
four clock sources. The clock source is selected by clock select bits 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0) of the
timer control register (TCR). The CPU can always read or write the timer counter.
209
The timer counter can be cleared by an external reset input or by an internal compare-match signal
generated at a compare-match event. Clock clear bits 1 and 0 (CCLR1 and CCLR0) of the timer
control register select the method of clearing.
When the timer counter overflows from H'FF to H'00, the overflow flag (OVF) in the timer
control/status register (TCSR) is set to “1.”
The timer counter is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes.
11.2.2 Time Constant Registers A and B (TCORA and TCORB)—H'FFD2 and H'FFD3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TCORA and TCORB are 8-bit readable/writable registers. The timer count is continually
compared with the constants written in these registers. When a match is detected, the
corresponding compare-match flag (CMFA or CMFB) is set in the timer control/status register
(TCSR).
The timer output signal (TMO) is controlled by these compare-match signals as specified by
output select bits 1 to 0 (OS1 to OS0) in the timer status/control register (TCSR).
TCORA and TCORB are initialized to H'FF at a reset and in the standby modes.
11.2.3 Timer Control Register (TCR)—H'FFD0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CMIEB
CMIEA
OVIE
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the clock source and the time at which
the timer counter is cleared, and enables interrupts.
The TCR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes.
210
Bit 7—Compare-match Interrupt Enable B (CMIEB): This bit selects whether to request
compare-match interrupt B (CMIB) when compare-match flag B (CMFB) in the timer
status/control register (TCSR) is set to “1.”
Bit 7
CMIEB
0
1
Description
Compare-match interrupt request B (CMIB) is disabled.
Compare-match interrupt request B (CMIB) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Compare-match Interrupt Enable A (CMIEA): This bit selects whether to request
compare-match interrupt A (CMIA) when compare-match flag A (CMFA) in the timer
status/control register (TCSR) is set to “1.”
Bit 6
CMIEA
0
1
Description
Compare-match interrupt request A (CMIA) is disabled.
Compare-match interrupt request A (CMIA) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 5—Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): This bit selects whether to request a timer
overflow interrupt (OVI) when the overflow flag (OVF) in the timer status/control register (TCSR)
is set to “1.”
Bit 5
OVIE
0
1
Description
The timer overflow interrupt request (OVI) is disabled.
The timer overflow interrupt request (OVI) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bits 4 and 3—Counter Clear 1 and 0 (CCLR1 and CCLR0): These bits select how the timer
counter is cleared: by compare-match A or B or by an external reset input.
Bit 4
CCLR1
0
0
1
1
Bit 3
CCLR0
0
1
0
1
Description
Not cleared.
(Initial value)
Cleared on compare-match A.
Cleared on compare-match B.
Cleared on rising edge of external reset input signal.
211
Bits 2, 1, and 0—Clock Select (CKS2, CKS1, and CKS0): These bits select the internal or
external clock source for the timer counter. For the external clock source they select whether to
increment the count on the rising or falling edge of the clock input, or on both edges.
Bit 2
CKS2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Bit 1
CKS1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
CKS0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Description
No clock source (timer stopped).
(Initial value)
Internal clock source (ø/8).
Internal clock source (ø/64).
Internal clock source (ø/1024).
No clock source (timer stopped).
External clock source, counted on the rising edge.
External clock source, counted on the falling edge.
External clock source, counted on both the rising
and falling edges.
11.2.4 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CMFB
CMFA
OVF
—
OS3
OS2
OS1
OS0
Initial value
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The TCSR is an 8-bit readable and partially writable* register that indicates compare-match and
overflow status and selects the effect of compare-match events on the timer output signal (TMO).
The TCSR is initialized to H'10 at a reset and in the standby modes.
* Software can write a “0” in bits 7 to 5 to clear the flags, but cannot write a “1” in these bits.
Bit 7—Compare-Match Flag B (CMFB): This status flag is set to “1” when the timer count
matches the time constant set in TCORB.
212
Bit 7
CMFB
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
(Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the CMFB bit, then writes a “0” in this bit.
2. Compare-match interrupt B is served by the data transfer controller (DTC).
This bit is set to 1 when TCNT = TCORB.
Bit 6—Compare-Match Flag A (CMFA): This status flag is set to “1” when the timer count
matches the time constant set in TCORA.
Bit 6
CMFA
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
(Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the CMFA bit, then writes a “0” in this bit.
2. Compare-match interrupt A is served by the data transfer controller (DTC).
This bit is set to 1 when TCNT = TCORA.
Bit 5—Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag is set to “1” when the timer count
overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00).
Bit 5
OVF
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when the CPU reads (Initial value)
the OVF bit, then writes a “0” in this bit.
This bit is set to 1 when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00.
Bit 4—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as “1.”
Bits 3 to 0—Output Select 3 to 0 (OS3 to OS0): These bits specify the effect of compare-match
events on the timer output signal (TMO). Bits OS3 and OS2 control the effect of compare-match B
on the output level. Bits OS1 and OS0 control the effect of compare-match A on the output level.
When all four output select bits are cleared to “0” the TMO signal is not output. The TMO output
is “0” before the first compare-match.
Bit 3
OS3
0
0
1
1
Bit 2
OS2
0
1
0
1
Description
No change when compare-match B occurs.
(Initial value)
Output changes to “0” when compare-match B occurs.
Output changes to “1” when compare-match B occurs.
Output inverts (toggles) when compare-match B occurs.
213
Bit 1
OS1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
OS0
0
1
0
1
Description
No change when compare-match A occurs. (Initial value)
Output changes to “0” when compare-match A occurs.
Output changes to “1” when compare-match A occurs.
Output inverts (toggles) when compare-match A occurs.
11.3 Operation
11.3.1 TCNT Incrementation Timing
The timer counter increments on a pulse generated once for each period of the selected (internal or
external) clock source.
If external clock input (TMCI) is selected, the timer counter can increment on the rising edge, the
falling edge, or both edges of the external clock signal.
The external clock pulse width must be at least 1.5·ø clock periods for incrementation on a single
edge, and at least 2.5·ø clock periods for incrementation on both edges. The counter will not
increment correctly if the pulse width is shorter than these values.
ø
TMCI
Minimum TMCI Pulse Width
(Single-Edge Incrementation)
ø
TMCI
Minimum TMCI Pulse Width
(Double-Edge Incrementation)
214
ø
Ø
External clock
External
source clock
source
TCNT
TCNTclock
clock
pulse
pulse
TCNT
TCNT
N–1
N
N+1
Figure 11-2 Count Timing for External Clock Input
11.3.2 Compare Match Timing
Setting of Compare-Match Flags A and B (CMFA and CMFB): The compare-match flags are
set to “1” by an internal compare-match signal generated when the timer count matches the time
constant in TCORA or TCORB. The compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which
the match is true, just before the timer counter increments to a new value.
Accordingly, when the timer count matches one of the time constants, the compare-match signal is
not generated until the next period of the clock source. Figure 11-3 shows the timing of the
setting of the compare-match flags.
215
ø
Ø
TCNT
N
TCOR
N
N+1
Internal
compare-match
signal
CMF
Figure 11-3 Setting of Compare-Match Flags
Output Timing: When a compare-match event occurs, the timer output (TMO) changes as
specified by the output select bits (OS3 to OS0) in the TCSR. Depending on these bits, the output
can remain the same, change to “0,” change to “1,” or toggle.
Figure 11-4 shows the timing when the output is set to toggle on compare-match A.
ø
Internal
compare-match
A signal
Timer output
(TMO)
Figure 11-4 Timing of Timer Output
216
Timing of Compare-Match Clear
Depending on the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in the TCR, the timer counter can be cleared when
compare-match A or B occurs. Figure 11-5 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
Internal
compare-match
signal
N
TCNT
H’00
Figure 11-5 Timing of Compare-Match Clear
11.3.3 External Reset of TCNT
When the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in the TCR are both set to “1,” the timer counter is cleared on
the rising edge of an external reset input. Figure 11-6 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
External reset
input (TMRI)
Internal clear
pulse
TCNT
N–1
N
Figure 11-6 Timing of External Reset
217
H’00
11.3.4 Setting of TCNT Overflow Flag
The overflow flag (OVF) is set to “1” when the timer count overflows (changes from H'FF to
H'00). Figure 11-7 shows the timing of this operation.
Ø
ø
TCNT
H’FF
H’00
Internal overflow
signal
OVF
Figure 11-7 Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)
11.4 CPU Interrupts and DTC Interrupts
The 8-bit timer can generate three types of interrupts: compare-match A and B (CMIA and
CMIB), and overflow (OVI). Each interrupt is requested when the corresponding enable and flag
bits are set in the TCR and TCSR. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each
type of interrupt. Table 11-3 lists information about these interrupts.
Table 11-3 8-Bit Timer Interrupts
Interrupt
CMIA
CMIB
OVI
Description
Requested when CMFA is set
Requested when CMFB is set
Requested when OVF is set
DTC Service Available?
Yes
Yes
No
Priority
High
Low
The CMIA and CMIB interrupts can be served by the data transfer controller (DTC) to have a data
transfer performed.
When the DTC serves one of these interrupts, it automatically clears the CMFA or CMFB flag to
“0.” See section 6, “Data Transfer Controller” for further information on the DTC.
218
11.5 Sample Application
In the example below, the 8-bit timer is used to generate a pulse output with a selected duty factor.
The control bits are set as follows:
1. In the TCR, CCLR1 is cleared to “0” and CCLR0 is set to “1” so that the timer counter is
cleared when its value matches the constant in TCORA.
2. In the TCSR, bits OS3 to OS0 are set to “0110,” causing the output to change to “1” on
compare-match A and to “0” on compare-match B.
With these settings, the 8-bit timer provides output of pulses at a rate determined by TCORA with
a pulse width determined by TCORB. No software intervention is required.
TCNT
H’FF
Clear counter
TCORA
TCORB
H’00
TMO pin
Figure 11-8 Example of Pulse Output
219
11.6 Application Notes
Application programmers should note that the following types of contention can occur in the 8-bit
timer.
Contention between TCNT Write and Clear: If an internal counter clear signal is generated
during the T3 state of a write cycle to the timer counter, the clear signal takes priority and the write
is not performed.
Figure 11-9 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU writes to TCNT
T2
T1
T3
ø
Internal Address
bus
TCNT address
Internal write
signal
Counter clear
signal
TCNT
N
H'00
Figure 11-9 TCNT Write-Clear Contention
220
Contention between TCNT Write and Increment: If a timer counter increment pulse is
generated during the T3 state of a write cycle to the timer counter, the write takes priority and the
timer counter is not incremented.
Figure 11-10 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU writes to TCNT
T2
T1
T3
ø
Internal Address
bus
TCNT address
Internal write
signal
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N
M
Write data
Figure 11-10 TCNT Write-Increment Contention
221
Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match: If a compare-match occurs during the
T3 state of a write cycle to TCORA or TCORB, the write takes precedence and the comparematch signal is inhibited.
Figure 11-11 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU writes to TCORA
or TCORB
T2
T1
T3
ø
Internal address
bus
TCNT address
Internal write
signal
TCNT
N
TCORA or
TCORB
N
N+1
M
TCOR write
data
Compare-match
A or B signal
Inhibited
Figure 11-11 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match
Contention between Compare-Match A and Compare-Match B: If identical time constants
are written in TCORA and TCORB, causing compare-match A and B to occur simultaneously,
any conflict between the output selections for compare-match A and B is resolved by following
the priority order in table 11-4.
222
Table 11-4 Priority Order of Timer Output
Output Selection
Toggle
“1” Output
“0” Output
No change
Priority
High
Low
Incrementation Caused by Changing of Internal Clock Source: When an internal clock
source is changed, the changeover may cause the timer counter to increment. This depends on the
time at which the clock select bits (CKS2 to CKS0) are rewritten, as shown in table 11-5.
The pulse that increments the timer counter is generated at the falling edge of the internal clock
source signal. If clock sources are changed when the old source is High and the new source is
Low, as in case No. 3 in table 11-5, the changeover generates a falling edge that triggers the
TCNT clock pulse and increments the timer counter.
Switching between an internal and external clock source can also cause the timer counter to
increment.
Table 11-5 Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources
No.
1
Description
Low → Low*1:
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while both
clock sources are Low.
Timing Chart
Old clock
source
New clock
source
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N
N+1
CKS rewrite
Note: *1 Including a transition from Low to the stopped state (CKS1 = 0, CKS0 = 0), or a
transition from the stopped state to Low.
223
Table 11-5 Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources (cont)
No.
2
Description
Timing Chart
*1
Low → High :
Old clock
CKS1 and CKS0 are
source
rewritten while old
clock source is Low and
New clock
new clock source is High. source
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
CKS rewrite
3
High → Low*2:
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while old
clock source is High and
new clock source is Low.
Old clock
source
New clock
source
*3
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
CKS rewrite
Note: *1 Including a transition from the stopped state to High.
*2 Including a transition from High to the stopped state.
*3 The switching of clock sources is regarded as a falling edge that increments the TCNT.
224
Table 11-5 Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources (cont)
No.
4
Description
High → High:
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while both
clock sources are High.
Timing Chart
Old clock
source
New clock
source
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
CKS rewrite
225
Section 12 PWM Timer
12.1 Overview
The H8/532 has an on-chip pulse-width modulation (PWM) timer module with three independent
channels (PWM1, PWM2, and PWM3). All three channels are functionally identical. Using an
8-bit timer counter, each PWM channel generates a rectangular output pulse with a duty factor of
0 to 100%. The duty factor is specified in an 8-bit duty register (DTR).
12.1.1 Features
The PWM timer module has the following features:
• Selection of eight clock sources
• Duty factors from 0 to 100% with 1/250 resolution
• Output with positive or negative logic
12.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 12-1 shows a block diagram of one PWM timer channel.
227
DTR
Output
control
Comparematch
Comparator
Bus interface
PW
TCNT
Internal
data bus
Module
data bus
TCR
Internal clock source
ø/2
ø/8
ø/32
Clock
Clock
select
ø/128
ø/256
ø/1024
DTR: Duty Register
TCNT: Timer Counter
TCR: Timer Control Register
ø/2048
ø/4096
Figure 12-1 Block Diagram of PWM Timer
12.1.3 Input and Output Pins
Table 12-1 lists the output pins of the PWM timer module. There are no input pins.
Table 12-1 Output Pins of PWM Timer Module
Name
PWM1 output
PWM2 output
PWM3 output
Abbreviation
PW1
PW2
PW3
I/O
Output
Output
Output
Function
Pulse output from PWM timer channel 1.
Pulse output from PWM timer channel 2.
Pulse output from PWM timer channel 3.
228
12.1.4 Register Configuration
The PWM timer module has three registers for each channel as listed in table12-2.
Table 12-2 PWM Timer Registers
Initial
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Value
Address
Timer control register
TCR
R/W
H'38
H'FFC0
Duty register
DTR
R/W
H'FF
H'FFC1
Timer counter
TCNT
R/(W)*
H'00
H'FFC2
2
Timer control register
TCR
R/W
H'38
H'FFC4
Duty register
DTR
R/W
H'FF
H'FFC5
Timer counter
TCNT
R/(W)*
H'00
H'FFC6
3
Timer control register
TCR
R/W
H'38
H'FFC8
Duty register
DTR
R/W
H'FF
H'FFC9
Timer counter
TCNT
R/(W)*
H'00
H'FFCA
* The timer counters are read/write registers, but the write function is for test purposes only.
Application programs should never write to these registers.
Channel
1
12.2 Register Descriptions
12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)—H'FFC2, H'FFC4, H'FFCA
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The PWM timer counters (TCNT) are 8-bit up-counters. When the output enable bit (OE) in the
timer control register (TCR) is set to 1, the timer counter starts counting pulses of an internal
clock source selected by clock select bits 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0). After counting from H'00 to
H'F9, the timer counter repeats from H'00.
The PWM timer counters can be read and written, but the write function is for test purposes only.
Application software should never write to a PW timer counter, because this may have
unpredictable effects.
229
The PWM timer counters are initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes, and when the
OE bit is cleared to 0.
12.2.2 Duty Register (DTR)—H'FFC1, H'FFC5, H'FFC9
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The duty registers (DTR) specify the duty factor of the output pulse. Any duty factor from 0 to
100% can be selected, with a resolution of 1/250. Writing 0 (H'00) in a DTR gives a 0% duty
factor; writing 125 (H'7D) gives a 50% duty factor; writing 250 (H'FA) gives a 100% duty factor.
The timer count is continually compared with the DTR contents. If the DTR value is not 0, when
the count increments from H'00 to H'01 the PWM output signal is set to 1. When the count
increments to the DTR value, the PWM output returns to 0. If the DTR value is 0 (duty factor
0%), the PWM output remains constant at 0.
The DTRs are double-buffered. A new value written in a DTR while the timer counter is running
does not become valid until after the count changes from H'F9 to H'00. When the timer counter is
stopped (while the OE bit is 0), new values become valid as soon as written. When a DTR is
read, the value read is the currently valid value.
The DTRs are initialized to H'FF at a reset and in the standby modes.
12.2.3 Timer Control Register (TCR)—H'FFC0, H'FFC4, H'FFC8
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OE
OS
—
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
The TCRs are 8-bit readable/writable registers that select the clock source and control the PWM
outputs.
The TCRs are initialized to H'38 at a reset and in the standby modes.
230
Bit 7—Output Enable (OE): This bit enables the timer counter and the PWM output.
Bit 7
OE
0
1
Description
PWM output is disabled. TCNT is cleared to H'00 and stopped. (Initial value)
PWM output is enabled. TCNT runs.
Bit 6—Output Select (OS): This bit selects positive or negative logic for the PWM output.
Bit 6
OS
0
1
Description
Positive logic; positive-going PWM pulse, 1 = High
Negative logic; negative-going PWM pulse, 1 = Low
(Initial value)
Bits 5 to 3—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 2, 1, and 0—Clock Select (CKS2, CKS1, and CKS0): These bits select one of eight clock
sources obtained by dividing the system clock (ø).
Bit 2
CKS2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Bit 1
CKS1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
CKS0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Description
ø/2 (Initial value)
ø/8
ø/32
ø/128
ø/256
ø/1024
ø/2048
ø/4096
From the clock source frequency, the resolution, period, and frequency of the PWM output can be
calculated as follows.
Resolution
= 1/clock source frequency
PWM period
= resolution × 250
PWM frequency = 1/PWM period
If the ø clock frequency is 10MHz, then the resolution, period, and frequency of the PWM output
for each clock source are given in table12-3.
231
Table 12-3
PWM Timer Parameters for 10MHz System Clock
Internal Clock Frequency
ø/2
ø/8
ø/32
ø/128
ø/256
ø/1024
ø/2048
ø/4096
Resolution
200ns
800ns
3.2µs
12.8µs
25.6µs
102.4µs
204.8µs
409.6µs
PWM Period
50µs
200µs
800µs
3.2ms
6.4ms
25.6ms
51.2ms
102.4ms
PWM Frequency
20kHz
5kHz
1.25kHz
312.5Hz
156.3Hz
39.1Hz
19.5Hz
9.8Hz
12.3 Operation
Figure 12-2 shows the timing of the PWM timer operation.
1. Positive Logic (OS = “0”)
(1) When OE = “0”—(a) in figure 12-2: The timer count is held at H'00 and PWM output is
inhibited. (The pin is used for port 9 input/output, and its state depends on the corresponding
port 9 data register and data direction register.) Any value (such as N in figure 12-2) written
in the DTR becomes valid immediately.
(2) When OE = “1”
i) The timer counter begins incrementing, and the PWM output goes High. [(b) in figure 12-2]
ii) When the count reaches the DTR value, the PWM output goes Low. [(c) in figure 12-2]
iii)If the DTR value is changed (by writing the data “M” in figure 12-2), the new value
becomes valid after the timer count changes from H'F9 to H'00. [(d) in figure 12-2]
2. Negative Logic (OS = “1”): The operation is the same except that High and Low are reversed
in the PWM output. [(e) in figure 12-2]
232
Figure 12-2 PWM Timing
233
(e)
(a)
N written in DTR
H’FF
(a) H’00
*
*
(b)
(b) H’01
M written in DTR
H’02
(c)
N
N
N–1
(c)
H’F9
N+1
* Used for port 9 input/output: state depends on values in data register and data direction register.
(OS = “1”)
PWM output
(OS = “0”)
DTR
TCNT
OE
TCNT clock
pulses
ø
(d) M
(d) H’00
H’01
12.4 Application Notes
Two notes on the use of the PWM timer module are given below.
1. Any necessary changes to the clock select bits (CKS2 to CKS0) and output select bit (OS)
should be made before the output enable bit (OE) is set to 1.
2. If the DTR value is H'00, the duty factor is 0% and PWM output remains constant at 0. If the
DTR value is H'FA to H'FF, the duty factor is 100% and PWM output remains constant at 1.
(For positive logic, 0 is Low and 1 is High. For negative logic, 0 is High and 1 is Low.)
234
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
13.1 Overview
The H8/532 has an on-chip watchdog timer (WDT) module. This module can monitor system
operation by requesting a nonmaskable interrupt if a system crash allows the timer count to
overflow.
When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT module can be used as an interval timer. In
the interval timer mode, an IRQ0 interrupt is requested at each counter overflow.
The WDT module is also used in recovering from the software standby mode.
13.1.1 Features
The basic features of the watchdog timer module are summarized as follows:
• Selection of eight clock sources
• Selection of two modes: watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode
• Counter overflow generates an interrupt request
NMI request in the watchdog timer mode; IRQ0 request in the interval timer mode.
235
13.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 13-1 is a block diagram of the watchdog timer.
NMI
(Watchdog timer mode)
Interrupt
signals
IRQ 0
(Interval timer mode)
Overflow
TCNT
Interrupt
control
Read/
write
control
Internal data bus
TCSR
Internal clock source
Ø/2
ø/2
Ø/32
ø/32
Ø/64
ø/64
Clock
Clock
select
Ø/128
ø/128
Ø/256
ø/256
Ø512
ø/512
Ø2048
ø/2048
TCNT: Timer Counter
TCSR:Timer Control/Status Register
Ø4096
ø/4096
Figure 13-1 Block Diagram of Timer Counter
13.1.3 Register Configuration
Table 13-1 lists information on the watchdog timer registers.
Table 13-1 Register Configuration
Initial
Addresses
Name
Abbreviation R/W
Value
Write
Read
Timer control/status register
TCSR
R/(W)* H'18
H'FFED
H'FFEC
Timer counter
TCNT
R/W
H'00
H'FFED
H'FFED
* Software can write a 0 to clear the status flag bits, but cannot write 1.
236
13.2 Register Descriptions
13.2.1 Timer Counter TCNT—H'FFED
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The watchdog timer counter (TCNT) is a readable/writable* 8-bit up-counter. When the timer
enable bit (TME) in the timer control/status register (TCSR) is set to 1, the timer counter starts
counting pulses of an internal clock source selected by clock select bits 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0) in
the TCSR. When the count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), an overflow flag (OVF) in the
TCSR is set to 1.
The watchdog timer counter is initialized to H'00 at a reset and when the TME bit is cleared to 0.
* TCNT is write-protected by a password. See section 13.2.3, “Notes on Register Access” for details.
13.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)—H'FFEC (Read), H'FFED (Write)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVF
WT/IT
TME
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*1
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
The watchdog timer control/status register (TCSR) is an 8-bit readable/writable*2 register that
selects the timer mode and clock source and performs other functions.
Bits 7 to 5 are initialized to 0 at a reset and in the standby modes. Bits 2 to 0 are initialized to 0 at
a reset, but retain their values in the standby modes.
*1 Software can write a 0 in bit 7 to clear the flag, but cannot set this bit to 1.
*2 The TCSR is write-protected by a password. See section 13.2.3, “Notes on Register Access”
for details.
237
Bit 7—Overflow Flag (OVF): This bit indicates that the watchdog timer count has overflowed.
Bit 7
OVF
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared to from 1 to 0 when the CPU reads (Initial value)
the OVF bit, then writes a 0 in this bit.
This bit is set to 1 when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00.
Bit 6—Timer Mode Select (WT/IT): This bit selects whether to operate in the watchdog timer
mode or interval timer mode.
Bit 6
WT/IT
0
1
Description
Interval timer mode (IRQ0 request)
Watchdog timer mode (NMI request)
(Initial value)
Bit 5—Timer Enable (TME): This bit enables or disables the timer.
Bit 5
TME
0
1
Description
TCNT is initialized to H'00 and stopped.
(Initial value)
TCNT runs. An interrupt is requested when the count overflows.
Bits 4 and 3—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 2, 1, and 0—Clock Select (CKS2, CKS1, and CKS0): These bits select one of eight clock
sources obtained by dividing the system clock (ø).
The overflow interval listed in the table below is the time from when the watchdog timer counter
begins counting from H'00 until an overflow occurs.
In the interval timer mode, IRQ0 interrupts are requested at this interval.
238
Bit 2
CKS2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Bit 1
CKS1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
CKS0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Clock Source
ø/2
ø/32
ø/64
ø/128
ø/256
ø/512
ø/2048
ø/4096
Description
Overflow Interval (ø = 10MHz)
51.2µs (Initial value)
819.2µs
1.6ms
3.3ms
6.6ms
13.1ms
52.4ms
104.9ms
13.2.3 Notes on Register Access
The watchdog timer’s TCNT and TCSR registers differ from other registers in being more difficult
to write. The procedures for writing and reading these registers are given below.
1. Writing to TCNT and TCSR: These registers must be written by word access. Programs
cannot write to them by byte access. The word must contain the write data and a password.
The watchdog timer’s TCNT and TCSR registers both have the same write address. The write
data must be contained in the lower byte of the word written at this address. The upper byte
must contain H'5A (password for TCNT) or H'A5 (password for TCSR). See figure 13-2.
The result of the access depicted in figure 13-2 is to transfer the write data from the lower byte
to the TCNT or TCSR.
15
Write to TCNT
H'FFEC
8
H'5A
15
Write to TCSR
7
H'FFEC
Write data
8
7
H'A5
Figure 13-2 Writing to TCNT and TCSR
239
0
0
Write data
Coding Examples:
To clear TCNT to 00:
To write H'4F in TCSR:
MOV.W #H'5A00, @H'FFEC
MOV.W #H'A54F, @H'FFEC
2. Reading TCNT and TCSR: The read addresses are H'FFEC for TCSR and H'FFED for
TCNT, as indicated in table 13-2.
These two registers are read like other registers. Byte access instructions can be used.
Table 13-2 Read Addresses of TCNT and TCSR
Read Address
H'FFEC
H'FFED
Register
TCSR
TCNT
13.3 Operation
13.3.1 Watchdog Timer Mode
The watchdog timer function begins operating when software sets the WT/IT and TME bits to 1 in
the TCSR. Thereafter, software should periodically rewrite the contents of the timer counter
(normally by writing H'00) to prevent the count from overflowing. If a program crash allows the
timer count to overflow, the watchdog timer requests a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) as shown in
figure 13-3.
NMI requests from the watchdog timer have the same vector as NMI requests from the NMI pin,
so the NMI interrupt-handling routine must check the OVF bit in the TCSR to determine the
source of the interrupt.
240
H’FF
TCNT
count
Time t
H’00
WT/IT = 1
TIME = 1
H'00 written
to TCNT
OVF = 1
NMI requested
Figure 13-3 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode
13.3.2 Interval Timer Mode
Interval timer operation begins when the WT/IT bit is cleared to 0 and the TME bit is set to 1.
In the interval timer mode, an IRQ0 request is generated each time the timer count overflows.
This function can be used to generate IRQ0 requests at regular intervals. See figure 13-4.
IRQ0 requests from the watchdog timer module have the same vector as IRQ0 requests from the
IRQ0 pin, so the IRQ0 interrupt-handling routine must check the OVF bit in the TCSR to
determine the source of the interrupt.
241
H’FF
TCNT
count
Time t
H’00
WT/IT = 0
IRQ0
IRQ0
IRQ0
IRQ0
IRQ0
TME = 1
request
request
request
request
request
Figure 13-4 Operation in Interval Timer Mode
13.3.3 Operation in Software Standby Mode
The watchdog timer has a special function in the software standby mode. Specific watchdog timer
settings are required when the software standby mode is used.
1. Before Transition to the Software Standby Mode: The TME bit must be cleared to 0 to stop
the watchdog timer counter before a transition to the software standby mode. The chip cannot
enter the software standby mode while the TME bit is set to 1. Before entering the software
standby mode, software should also set the clock select bits (CKS2 to CKS0) to a value that
makes the timer overflow interval equal to or greater than the settling time of the clock
oscillator.
2. Recovery from the Software Standby Mode: Recovery from the software standby mode can
be triggered by an NMI request. In this case the recovery proceeds as follows:
When an NMI request signal is received, the clock oscillator starts running and the watchdog
timer starts counting at the rate selected by the clock select bits before the software standby
mode was entered. When the count overflows (H'FF → H'00), the ø clock is presumed to be
stable and usable, clock signals are supplied to all modules on the chip, and the NMI interrupthandling routine starts executing. This timer overflow does not set the OVF flag, and the TME
bit remains cleared to 0.
242
13.3.4 Setting of Overflow Flag
The OVF bit is set to 1 when the timer count overflows. Simultaneously, the WDT module
requests an NMI or IRQ0 interrupt. The timing is shown in figure 13-5.
ø
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Internal overflow
signal
OVF
Figure 13-5 Setting of OVF Bit
13.4 Application Notes
1. Contention between TCNT Write and Increment: If a timer counter clock pulse is
generated during the T3 state of a write cycle to the timer counter, the write takes priority and
the timer counter is not incremented. See figure 13-6.
243
Write cycle: CPU writes to TCNT
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal address bus
TCNT address
Internal write signal
TCNT clock pulse
TCNT
N
M
Counter write data
Figure 13-6 TCNT Write-Increment Contention
2. Changing the Clock Select Bits (CKS2 to CKS0): Software should stop the watchdog timer
(by clearing the TME bit to 0) before changing the value of the clock select bits. If the clock
select bits are modified while the watchdog timer is running, the timer count may be
incremented incorrectly.
244
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface
14.1 Overview
The H8/532 chip includes a single-channel serial communication interface (SCI) for transferring
serial data to and from other chips. The SCI supports both synchronous and asynchronous data
transfer. Communication control functions are provided by eight internal registers.
14.1.1 Features
The features of the on-chip serial communication interface are:
• Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode
— Asynchronous mode
The SCI can communicate with a UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter),
ACIA (Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter), or other chip that employs
standard asynchronous serial communication. Eight data formats are available.
— Data length: 7 or 8 bits
— Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits
— Parity: Even, odd, or none
— Error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors
— Synchronous mode
The SCI can communicate with chips able to synchronize data transfers with clock pulses.
— Data length: 8 bits
— Error detection: Overrun errors
• Full duplex communication
The transmitting and receiving sections are independent, so the SCI can transmit and receive
simultaneously. Both the transmit and receive sections use double buffering, so continuous data
transfer is possible in either direction.
• Built-in baud rate generator
Any specified bit rate can be generated.
• Internal or external clock source
The baud rate generator can operate on an internal clock source, or an external clock signal
input at the SCK pin.
• Three interrupts
Transmit-end, receive-end, and receive-error interrupts are requested independently. The
transmit-end and receive-end interrupts can be served by the on-chip data transfer controller
(DTC), providing a convenient way to transfer data with minimal CPU programming.
245
14.1.2 Block Diagram
Bus interface
Figure 14-1 shows a block diagram of serial communication interface.
Module data bus
RDR
TDR
SSR
Internal clock
source
ø
BRR
SCR
Baud-rate
generator
SMR
RXD
RSR
TSR
ø/4
ø/16
Communication
control
TXD
Internal
data bus
ø/64
Parity generator
Parity check
Clock
External clock
SCK
TXI
RXI
RDR: Receive Data Register
RSR: Receive Shift Register
TDR: Transmit Data Register
TSR: Transmit Shift Register
SSR: Serial Status Register
SCR: Serial Control Register
SMR: Serial Mode Register
BRR: Bit Rate Register
ERI
Interrupt signals
Figure 14-1 Block Diagram of Serial Communication Interface
246
14.1.3 Input and Output Pins
Table 14-1 lists the input and output pins used by the SCI module.
Table 14-1 SCI Input/Output Pins
Name
Serial clock
Receive data
Transmit data
Abbreviation
SCK
RXD
TXD
I/O
Input/output
Input
Output
Function
Serial clock input and output.
Receive data input.
Transmit data output.
14.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 14-2 lists the SCI registers.
Table 14-2 SCI Registers
Name
Abbreviation R/W
Initial Value
Address
Receive shift register
RSR
—
—
—
Receive data register
RDR
R
H'00
H'FFDD
Transmit shift register
TSR
—
—
—
Transmit data register
TDR
R/W
H'FF
H'FFDB
Serial mode register
SMR
R/W
H'04
H'FFD8
Serial control register
SCR
R/W
H'0C
H'FFDA
Serial status register
SSR
R/(W)*
H'87
H'FFDC
Bit rate register
BRR
R/W
H'FF
H'FFD9
* Software can write a “0” to clear the status flag bits, but cannot write a “1.”
14.2 Register Descriptions
14.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The RSR receives incoming data bits. When one data character has been received, it is transferred
to the receive data register (RDR).
The CPU cannot read or write the RSR directly.
247
14.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)—H'FFDD
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
The RDR stores received data. As each character is received, it is transferred from the RSR to the
RDR, enabling the RSR to receive the next character. This double-buffering allows the SCI to
receive data continuously.
The CPU can read but not write the RDR. The RDR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the
standby modes.
14.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The TSR holds the character currently being transmitted. When transmission of this character is
completed, the next character is moved from the transmit data register (TDR) to the TSR and
transmission of that character begins. If the TDR does not contain valid data, the SCI stops
transmitting.
The CPU cannot read or write the TSR directly.
14.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)—H'FFDB
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The TDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that holds the next character to be transmitted.
When the TSR becomes empty, the character written in the TDR is transferred to the TSR.
Continuous data transmission is possible by writing the next byte in the TDR while the current
byte is being transmitted from the TSR.
The TDR is initialized to H'FF at a reset and in the standby modes.
248
14.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)—H'FFD8
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
—
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
The SMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the communication format and selects
the clock rate for the internal clock source. It is initialized to H'04 at a reset and in the standby
modes.
Bit 7—Communication Mode (C/A): This bit selects the asynchronous or synchronous
communication mode.
Bit 7
C/A
0
1
Description
Asynchronous communication.
(Initial value)
Communication is synchronized with the serial clock.
Bit 6—Character Length (CHR): This bit selects the character length in asynchronous mode. It
is ignored in synchronous mode.
Bit 6
CHR
0
1
Description
8 Bits per character.
7 Bits per character.
(Initial value)
Bit 5—Parity Enable (PE): This bit selects whether to add a parity bit in asynchronous mode. It
is ignored in synchronous mode.
Bit 5
PE
0
1
Description
Transmit: No parity bit is added.
Receive: Parity is not checked.
Transmit: A parity bit is added.
Receive: Parity is not checked.
(Initial value)
249
Bit 4—Parity Mode (O/E): In asynchronous mode, when parity is enabled (PE = 1), this bit
selects even or odd parity.
Even parity means that a parity bit is added to the data bits for each character to make the total
number of 1’s even. Odd parity means that the total number of 1’s is made odd.
This bit is ignored when PE = 0 and in the synchronous mode.
Bit 4
O/E
0
1
Description
Even parity.
Odd parity.
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Stop Bit Length (STOP): This bit selects the number of stop bits. It is ignored in the
synchronous mode.
Bit 3
STOP
0
1
Description
1 Stop bit.
2 Stop bits.
(Initial value)
Bit 2—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1 and CKS0): These bits select the internal clock
source when the baud rate generator is clocked from within the H8/532 chip.
Bit 1
CKS1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
CKS0
0
1
0
1
Description
ø clock
ø/4 clock
ø/16 clock
ø/64 clock
(Initial value)
250
14.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR)—H'FFDA
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
—
—
CKE1
CKE0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
The SCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables various SCI functions. It is
initialized to H'0C at a reset and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): This bit enables or disables the transmit-end interrupt
(TXI) requested when the transmit data register empty (TDRE) bit in the serial status register
(SSR) is set to 1.
Bit 7
TIE
0
1
Description
The transmit-end interrupt request (TXI) is disabled.
The transmit-end interrupt request (TXI) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): This bit enables or disables the receive-end interrupt
(RXI) requested when the receive data register full (RDRF) bit in the serial status register (SSR) is
set to 1. It also enables and disables the receive-error interrupt (ERI) request.
Bit 6
RIE
0
1
Description
The receive-end interrupt (RXI) and receive-error interrupt (ERI)
(Initial value)
requests are disabled.
The receive-end interrupt (RXI) and receive-error interrupt (ERI) requests are enabled.
Bit 5—Transmit Enable (TE): This bit enables or disables the transmit function. When the
transmit function is enabled, the TXD pin is automatically used for output. When the transmit
function is disabled, the TXD pin can be used as a general-purpose I/O port.
Bit 5
TE
0
1
Description
The transmit function is disabled. The TXD pin can be
used as a general-purpose I/O port.
The transmit function is enabled. The TXD pin is used for output.
251
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Receive Enable (RE): This bit enables or disables the receive function. When the receive
function is enabled, the RXD pin is automatically used for input. When the receive function is
disabled, the RXD pin is available as a general-purpose I/O port.
Bit 4
RE
0
1
Description
The receive function is disabled. The RXD pin can be
used as a general-purpose I/O port.
The receive function is enabled. The RXD pin is used for input.
(Initial value)
Bits 3 and 2—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 1—Clock Enable 1 (CKE1): This bit selects the internal or external clock source for the
baud rate generator. When the external clock source is selected, the SCK pin is automatically
used for input of the external clock signal.
Bit 1
CKE1
0
1
Description
Internal clock source.
External clock source. (The SCK pin is used for input.)
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Clock Enable 0 (CKE0): When an internal clock source is used in synchronous mode,
this bit enables or disables serial clock output at the SCK pin.
This bit is ignored when the external clock is selected, or when the asynchronous mode is
selected.
For further information on the communication format and clock source selection, see tables 14-5
and 14-6 in section 14.3, “Operation.”
Bit 0
CKE0
0
1
Description
The SCK pin is not used by the SCI (and is available as
a general-purpose I/O port).
The SCK pin is used for serial clock output.
252
(Initial value)
14.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR)—H'FFDC
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
—
—
—
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
—
—
—
* Software can write a 0 to clear the flags, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
The SSR is an 8-bit register that indicates transmit and receive status. It is initialized to H'87 at a
reset and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): This bit indicates when the TDR contents have
been transferred to the TSR and the next character can safely be written in the TDR.
Bit 7
TDRE
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. The CPU reads the TDRE bit, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. The data transfer controller (DTC) writes data in the TDR.
This bit is set to 1 at the following times:
1. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
2. When TDR contents are transferred to the TSR.
3. When TDRE = 0 and the TE bit is cleared to 0.
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): This bit indicates when one character has been
received and transferred to the RDR.
Bit 6
RDRF
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
(Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the RDRF bit, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. The data transfer controller (DTC) reads the RDR.
3. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
This bit is set to 1 when one character is received without error and transferred from the
RSR to the RDR.
253
Bit 5—Overrun Error (ORER): This bit indicates an overrun error during reception.
Bit 5
ORER
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
(Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the ORER bit, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
This bit is set to 1 if reception of the next character ends while the receive data register is
still full (RDRF = 1).
Bit 4—Framing Error (FER): This bit indicates a framing error during data reception in the
synchronous mode. It has no meaning in the asynchronous mode.
Bit 4
FER
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared to from 1 to 0 when:
1. The CPU reads the FER bit, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
This bit is set to 1 if a framing error occurs (stop bit = 0).
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Parity Error (PER): This bit indicates a parity error during data reception in the
asynchronous mode, when a communication format with parity bits is used.
This bit has no meaning in the synchronous mode, or when a communication format without
parity bits is used.
Bit 3
PER
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
(Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the PER bit, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
This bit is set to 1 when a parity error occurs (the parity of the received data does not
match the parity selected by the bit in the SMR).
Bits 2 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
254
14.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR)—H'FFD9
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The BRR is an 8-bit register that, together with the CKS1 and CKS0 bits in the SMR, determines
the bit rate output by the baud rate generator.
The BRR is initialized to H'FF (the slowest rate) at a reset and in the standby modes.
Tables 14-3 and 14-4 show examples of BRR (N) and CKS (n) settings for commonly used bit
rates.
Table 14-3 Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (1)
2
Bit
Rate
110
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
n
1
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
N
70
207
103
51
25
12
—
—
—
—
—
Error
(%)
+0.03
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
—
—
—
—
—
n
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
XTAL Frequency (MHz)
2.4576
4
Error
N
(%)
n
N
86
+0.31
1
141
255
0
1
103
127
0
0
207
63
0
0
103
31
0
0
51
15
0
0
25
7
0
0
12
3
0
— —
1
0
— —
—
—
0
1
0
0
— —
255
Error
(%)
+0.03
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
—
—
0
—
n
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
4.194304
Error
N
(%)
148
–0.04
108
+0.21
217
+0.21
108
+0.21
54
–0.70
26
+1.14
13
–2.48
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Table 14-3 Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (2)
Bit
Rate
110
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
n
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
4.9152
Error
N
(%)
174 –0.26
127 0
255 0
127 0
63
0
31
0
15
0
7
0
3
0
—
—
1
0
n
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
—
—
0
—
XTAL Frequency (MHz)
6
7.3728
Error
Error
N
(%)
n
N
(%)
52
+0.50
2
64
+0.70
155
+0.16
1
191 0
77
+0.16
1
95
0
155
+0.16
0
191 0
77
+0.16
0
95
0
38
+0.16
0
47
0
19
–2.34
0
23
0
—
—
0
11
0
—
—
0
5
0
2
0
— —
—
—
—
0
2
0
8
Error
(%)
+0.03
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
—
0
—
n
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
—
N
70
207
103
207
103
51
25
12
—
3
—
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12.288
Error
N
(%)
108
+0.08
79
0
159
0
79
0
159
0
79
0
39
0
19
0
9
0
5
+2.40
4
0
Table 14-3 Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (3)
Bit
Rate
110
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
n
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9.8304
Error
N
(%)
86
+0.31
255 0
127 0
255 0
127 0
63
0
31
0
15
0
7
0
4
–1.70
3
0
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
XTAL Frequency (MHz)
10
12
Error
N
(%)
n
N
88
–0.25
2
106
64
+0.16
2
77
129
+0.16
1
155
64
+0.16
1
77
129
+0.16
0
155
64
+0.16
0
77
32
–1.36
0
38
15
+1.73
0
19
7
+1.73
— —
4
0
0
5
3
+1.73
— —
256
Error
(%)
–0.44
0
0
0
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
–2.34
—
0
—
Table 14-3 Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (4)
Bit
Rate
110
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
14.7456
Error
N
(%)
130 –0.07
95
0
191 0
95
0
191 0
95
0
47
0
23
0
11
0
—
—
5
0
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
XTAL Frequency (MHz)
16
19.6608
Error
Error
N
(%)
n
N
(%)
141
+0.03
2
174 –0.26
103
+0.16
2
127 0
207
+0.16
1
255 0
103
+0.16
1
127 0
207
+0.16
0
255 0
103
+0.16
0
127 0
51
+0.16
0
63
0
25
+0.16
0
31
0
12
+0.16
0
15
0
7
0
0
9
–1.70
—
—
0
7
0
B = OSC × 106/[64 × 22n × (N + 1)]
B:
N:
OSC :
n:
Bit rate
BRR value (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
Crystal oscillator frequency in MHz
Internal clock source (0, 1, 2, or 3)
The meaning of n is given by the table below:
n
0
1
2
3
CKS1
0
0
1
1
CKS0
0
1
0
1
Clock
ø
ø/4
ø/16
ø/64
257
20
n
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
43
129
64
129
64
129
64
32
15
9
7
Error
(%)
+0.88
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
–1.36
+1.73
0
+1.73
Table 14-4 Examples of BRR Settings in Synchronous Mode
Bit
Rate
100
250
500
1K
2.5M
5K
10K
25K
50K
100K
250K
500K
1M
2.5M
2
n
—
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
4
N
—
249
124
249
99
49
24
9
4
—
0
n
—
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
—
124
249
124
199
99
49
19
9
4
1
0
XTAL Frequency (MHz)
8
10
n
N
n
N
—
—
—
—
2
249
—
—
2
124
—
—
1
249
—
—
1
99
1
124
0
199
0
249
0
99
0
124
0
39
0
49
0
19
0
24
0
9
—
—
0
3
0
4
0
1
—
—
0
0
—
—
Notes:
Blank: No setting is available.
—: A setting is available, but the bit rate is inaccurate.
B = OSC/[8 × 22n × (N + 1)]
B:
N:
OSC :
n:
Bit rate
BRR value (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
Crystal oscillator frequency in MHz
Internal clock source (0, 1, 2, or 3)
The meaning of n is given by the table below:
n
0
1
2
3
CKS1
0
0
1
1
CKS0
0
1
0
1
Clock
ø
ø/4
ø/16
ø/64
258
16
n
—
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
20
N
—
124
249
124
199
99
199
79
39
19
7
3
1
n
—
—
—
—
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
N
—
—
—
—
249
124
249
99
49
24
9
4
—
0
14.3 Operation
14.3.1 Overview
The SCI supports serial data transfer in both asynchronous and synchronous modes.
The communication format depends on settings in the SMR as indicated in table 14-5. The clock
source and usage of the SCK pin depend on settings in the SMR and SCR as indicated in table 14-6.
Table 14-5 Communication Formats Used by SCI
C/A
0
SMR
CHR
PE
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
—
—
STOP
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
—
Mode
Asynchronous
Format
8-Bit data
Parity
None
Yes
7-Bit data
None
Yes
Synchronous
8-Bit data
—
Stop Bit
Length
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
—
Table 14-6 SCI Clock Source Selection
SMR
C/A
0
(Async
mode)
SCR
Clock
CKE1 CKE0
Source
0
0
Internal
1
1
0
External
1
1
0
0
Internal
(Sync
1
mode) 1
0
External
1
* Cannot be used by the SCI.
SCK Pin
I/O port*
Clock output at same frequency as baud rate
Clock input at 16 times the baud rate frequency
Serial clock output
Serial clock input
Transmitting and receiving operations in the two modes are described next.
259
14.3.2 Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, each character is individually synchronized by framing it with a start bit
and stop bit.
Full duplex data transfer is possible because the SCI has independent transmit and receive
sections. Double buffering in both sections enables the SCI to be programmed for continuous data
transfer.
Figure 14-2 shows the general format of one character sent or received in the asynchronous mode.
The communication channel is normally held in the mark state (High). Character transmission or
reception starts with a transition to the space state (Low).
The first bit transmitted or received is the start bit (Low). It is followed by the data bits, in which
the least significant bit (LSB) comes first. The data bits are followed by the parity bit, if present,
then the stop bit or bits (High) confirming the end of the frame.
In receiving, the SCI synchronizes on the falling edge of the start bit, and samples each bit at the
center of bit (at the 8th cycle of the internal serial clock, which runs at 16 times the bit rate).
Idle state
Start bit
1 bit
D0
D1
Dn
7 or 8 bits
Parity bit
Stop bit
0 or 1 bit
1 or 2 bits
One character
Figure 14-2 Data Format in Asynchronous Mode
1. Data Format: Table 14-7 lists the data formats that can be sent and received in asynchronous
mode. Eight formats can be selected by bits in the SMR.
260
Table 14-7 Data Formats in Asynchronous Mode
SMR Bits
CHR
PE
STOP
Data Format
0
0
0
START
8-Bit data
STOP
0
0
1
START
8-Bit data
STOP
STOP
0
1
0
START
8-Bit data
P
STOP
0
1
1
START
8-Bit data
P
STOP
1
0
0
START
7-Bit data
STOP
1
0
1
START
7-Bit data
STOP
STOP
1
1
0
START
7-Bit data
P
STOP
1
1
1
START
7-Bit data
P
STOP
STOP
STOP
Note:
START: Start bit
STOP: Stop bit
P: Parity bit
2. Clock: In the asynchronous mode it is possible to select either an internal clock created by the
on-chip baud rate generator, or an external clock input at the SCK pin. Refer to table 14-6.
If an external clock is input at the SCK pin, its frequency should be 16 times the desired baud
rate.
If the internal clock provided by the on-chip baud rate generator is selected and the SCK pin is
used for clock output, the output clock frequency is equal to the baud rate, and the clock pulse
rises at the center of the transmit data bits. Figure 14-3 shows the phase relationship between
the output clock and transmit data.
Output clock
Transmit data
Start bit
D0
D1
D2
Figure 14-3 Phase Relationship between Clock Output and Transmit Data
261
3. Data Transmission and Reception
• SCI Initialization: Before data can be transmitted or received, the SCI must be initialized
by software. To initialize the SCI, software must clear the TE and RE bits to 0, then execute
the following procedure.
(1) Set the desired communication format in the SMR.
(2) Write the value corresponding to the desired bit rate in the BRR. (This step is not
necessary if an external clock is used.)
(3) Select the clock and enable desired interrupts in the SCR.
(4) Set the TE and/or RE bit in the SCR to 1.
The TE and RE bits must both be cleared to 0 whenever the operating mode or data format is
changed.
After changing the operating mode or data format, before setting the TE and RE bits to 1
software must wait for at least the transfer time for 1 bit at the selected baud rate, to make sure
the SCI is initialized. If an external clock is used, the clock must not be stopped.
When clearing the TDRE bit during data transmission, to assure transfer of the correct data, do
not clear the TDRE bit until after writing data in the TDR. Similarly, in receiving data, do not
clear the RDRF bit until after reading data from the RDR.
• Data Transmission: The procedure for transmitting data is as follows.
(1) Set up the desired transmitting conditions in the SMR, SCR, and BRR.
(2) Set the TE bit in the SCR to 1.
The TXD pin will automatically be switched to output and one frame* of all 1’s will be
transmitted, after which the SCI is ready to transmit data.
(3) Check that the TDRE bit is set to 1, then write the first byte of transmit data in the TDR.
Next clear the TDRE bit to 0.
* A frame is the data for one character, including the start bit and stop bit(s).
262
(4) The first byte of transmit data is transferred from the TDR to the TSR and sent in the
designated format as follows.
i) Start bit (one 0 bit)
ii) Transmit data (seven or eight bits, starting from bit 0)
iii) Parity bit (odd or even parity bit, or no parity bit)
iv) Stop bit (one or two consecutive 1 bits)
(5) Transfer of the transmit data from the TDR to the TSR makes the TDR empty, so the
TDRE bit is set to 1.
If the TIE bit is set to 1, a transmit-end interrupt (TXI) is requested.
When the transmit function is enabled but the TDR is empty (TDRE = 1), the output at the
TXD pin is held at 1 until the TDRE bit is cleared to 0.
• Data Reception: The procedure for receiving data is as follows.
(1) Set up the desired receiving conditions in the SMR, SCR, and BRR.
(2) Set the RE bit in the SCR to 1.
The RXD pin will automatically be switched to input and the SCI is ready to receive data.
(3) The SCI synchronizes with the incoming data by detecting the start bit, and places the
received bits in the RSR. At the end of the data, the SCI checks that the stop bit is 1.
If the stop bit length is 2 bits, in ZTAT versions the SCI checks that both bits are 1, but in
masked-ROM versions, only the first bit is checked.
(4) When a complete frame has been received, the SCI transfers the received data to the RDR
so that it can be read. If the character length is 7 bits, the most significant bit of the RDR
is cleared to 0. At the same time, the SCI sets the RDRF bit in the SSR to 1. If the RIE bit
is set to 1, a receive-end interrupt (RXI) is requested.
(5) The RDRF bit is cleared to 0 when the CPU reads the SSR, then writes a 0 in the RDRF
bit, or when the RDR is read by the data transfer controller (DTC). The RDR is then ready
to receive the next character from the RSR.
When a frame is not received correctly, a receive error occurs. There are three types of receive
errors, listed in table 14-8.
If a receive error occurs, the RDRF bit in the SSR is not set to 1. The corresponding error flag
is set to 1 instead. If the RIE bit in the SCR is set to 1, a receive-error interrupt (ERI) is
requested.
263
When a framing or parity error occurs, the RSR contents are transferred to the RDR. If an
overrun error occurs, however, the RSR contents are not transferred to the RDR.
If multiple receive errors occur simultaneously, all the corresponding error flags are set to 1.
To clear a receive-error flag (ORER, FER, or PER), software must read the SSR, then write a 0
in the flag bit.
Table 14-8 Receive Errors
Name
Overrun error
Abbreviation
ORER
Framing error
FER
Parity error
PER
Description
Reception of the next frame ends while the RDRF bit is still
set to 1.
The RSR contents are not transferred to the RDR.
A stop bit is 0.
The RSR contents are transferred to the RDR.
The parity of a frame does not match the value selected by the bit
in the SMR.
The RSR contents are transferred to the RDR.
14.3.3 Synchronous Mode
The synchronous mode is suited for high-speed, continuous data transfer. Each bit of data is
synchronized with a serial clock pulse.
Continuous data transfer is enabled by the double buffering employed in both the transmit and
receive sections of the SCI. Full duplex communication is possible because the transmit and
receive sections are independent.
1. Data Format: Figure 14-4 shows the communication format used in the synchronous mode.
The data length is 8 bits for both the transmit and receive directions. The least significant bit
(LSB) is sent and received first. Each bit of transmit data is output from the falling edge of the
serial clock pulse to the next falling edge. Received bits are latched on the rising edge of the
serial clock pulse.
264
Transmission direction
Serial clock
Data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Don’t-care
Don’t-care
Figure 14-4 Data Format in Synchronous Mode
2. Clock: Either the internal serial clock created by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external
clock input at the SCK pin can be selected in the synchronous mode. See table 14-6 for details.
3. Data Transmission and Reception
• SCI Initialization: Before data can be transmitted or received, the SCI must be initialized
by software. To initialize the SCI, software must clear the TE and RE bits to 0 to disable
both the transmit and receive functions, then execute the following procedure.
(1) Write the value corresponding to the desired bit rate in the BRR. (This step is not
necessary if an external clock is used.)
(2) Select the clock in the SCR.
(3) Select the synchronous mode in the SMR*.
(4) Set the TE and/or RE bit to 1, and enable desired interrupts in the SCR.
The TE and RE bits must both be cleared to 0 whenever the operating mode or data format is
changed. After changing the operating mode or data format, before setting the TE and RE bits
to 1 software must wait for at least 1 bit transfer time at the selected communication speed, to
make sure the SCI is initialized.
* The SCK pin is used for input or output according to the C/A bit in the serial mode register
(SMR) and the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in the serial control register (SCR). (See table 14-6.)
To prevent unwanted output at the SCK pin, pay attention to the order in which you set SMR
and SCR.
265
When clearing the TDRE bit during data transmission, to assure correct data transfer, do not
clear the TDRE bit until after writing data in the TDR. Similarly, in receiving data, do not
clear the RDRF bit until after reading data from the RDR.
• Data Transmission: The procedure for transmitting data is as follows.
(1) Set up the desired transmitting conditions in the SMR, BRR, and SCR.
(2) Set the TE bit in the SCR to 1.
The TXD pin will automatically be switched to output, after which the SCI is ready to
transmit data.
(3) Check that the TDRE bit is set to 1, then write the first byte of transmit data in the TDR.
Next clear the TDRE bit to 0.
(4) The first byte of transmit data is transferred from the TDR to the TSR and sent, each bit
synchronized with a clock pulse. Bit 0 is sent first.
Transfer of the transmit data from the TDR to the TSR makes the TDR empty, so the
TDRE bit is set to 1. If the TIE bit is set to 1, a transmit-end interrupt (TXI) is
requested.
The TDR and TSR function as a double buffer. Continuous data transmission can be achieved
by writing the next transmit data in the TDR and clearing the TDRE bit to 0 while the SCI is
transmitting the current data from the TSR.
If an internal clock source is selected, after transferring the transmit data from the TDR to the
TSR, while transmitting the data from the TSR the SCI also outputs a serial clock signal at the
SCK pin. When all data bits in the TSR have been transmitted, if the TDR is empty (TDRE =
1), serial clock output is suspended until the next data byte is written in the TDR and the TDRE
bit is cleared to 0. During this interval the TXD pin is held at the value of the last bit
transmitted.
If the external clock source is selected, data transmission is synchronized with the clock signal
input at the SCK pin. When all data bits in the TSR have been transmitted, if the TDR is
empty (TDRE = 1) but external clock pulses continue to arrive, the TXD pin outputs a string of
bits equal to the last bit transmitted.
• Data Reception: The procedure for receiving data is as follows.
(1) Set up the desired receiving conditions in the SMR, BRR, and SCR.
266
(2) Set the RE bit in the SCR to 1.
The RXD pin will automatically be switched to input and the SCI is ready to receive
data.
(3) Incoming data bits are latched in the RSR on eight clock pulses.
When 8 bits of data have been received, the SCI sets the RDRF bit in the SSR to 1. If
the RIE bit is set to 1, a receive-end interrupt (RXI) is requested.
(4) The SCI transfers the received data byte to the RDR so that it can be read.
The RDRF bit is cleared when the program reads the RDRF bit in the SSR, then writes a
0 in the RDRF bit, or when the data transfer controller (DTC) reads the RDR.
The RDR and RSR function as a double buffer. Data can be received continuously by reading
each byte of data from the RDR and clearing the RDRF bit to 0 before the last bit of the next
byte is received.
In general, an external clock source should be used for receiving data.
If an internal clock source is selected, the SCI starts receiving data as soon as the RE bit is set
to 1. The serial clock is also output at the SCK pin. The SCI continues receiving until the RE
bit is cleared to 0.
If the last bit of the next data byte is received while the RDRF bit is still set to 1, an overrun
error occurs and the ORER bit is set to 1. If the RIE bit is set to 1, a receive-error interrupt
(ERI) is requested. The data received in the RSR are not transferred to the RDR when an
overrun error occurs.
After an overrun error, reception of the next data is enabled when the ORER bit is cleared to 0.
• Simultaneous Transmit and Receive: The procedure for transmitting and receiving
simultaneously is as follows:
(1) Set up the desired communication conditions in the SMR, BRR, and SCR.
(2) Set the TE and RE bits in the SCR to 1.
The TXD and RXD pins are automatically switched to output and input, respectively,
and the SCI is ready to transmit and receive data.
(3) Data transmitting and receiving start when the TDRE bit in the SSR is cleared to 0.
(4) Data are sent and received in synchronization with eight clock pulses.
267
(5) First, the transmit data are transferred from the TDR to the TSR. This makes the TDR
empty, so the TDRE bit is set to 1. If the TIE bit is set to 1, a transmit-end interrupt
(TXI) is requested.
If continuous data transmission is desired, the CPU must read the TDRE bit in the SSR,
write the next transmit data in the TDR, then clear the TDRE bit to 0. Alternatively, the
DTC can write the next transmit data in the TDR, in which case the TDRE bit is cleared
automatically.
If the TDRE bit is not cleared to 0 by the time the SCI finishes sending the current byte
from the TSR, the TXD pin continues to output the last bit in the TSR.
(6) In the receiving section, when 8 bits of data have been received they are transferred from
the RSR to the RDR and the RDRF bit in the SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit is set to 1, a
receive-end interrupt (RXI) is requested.
(7) To clear the RDRF bit software read the RDRF bit in the SSR, read the data in the RDR,
then write a 0 in the RDRF bit. Alternatively, the DTC can read the RDR, in which case
the RDRF bit is cleared automatically.
For continuous data reception, the RDRF bit must be cleared to 0 before the last bit of
the next byte of data is received.
If the last bit of the next byte is received while the RDRF bit is still set to 1, an overrun error
occurs. The error is handled as described under “Data Reception” above. The overrun error
does not affect the transmit section of the SCI, which continues to transmit normally.
14.4 CPU Interrupts and DTC Interrupts
The SCI can request three types of interrupts: transmit-end (TXI), receive-end (RXI), and
receive-error (ERI). Interrupt requests are enabled or disabled by the TIE and RIE bits in the
SCR. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each type of interrupt. The
transmit-end and receive-end interrupt request signals are obtained from the TDRE and RDRF
flags. The receive-error interrupt request signal is the logical OR of the three error flags: overrun
error (ORER), framing error (FER), and parity error (PER). Table 14-9 lists information about
these interrupts.
268
Table 14-9 SCI Interrupts
Interrupt
ERI
RXI
TXI
Description
Receive-error interrupt, requested when
ORER, FER, or PER is set.
Receive-end interrupt, requested when
RDRF is set.
Transmit-end interrupt, requested when
TDRE is set.
DTC Service
Available?
No
Priority
High
Yes
Yes
Low
The TXI and RXI interrupts can be served by the data transfer controller (DTC) to have a data
transfer performed. When the DTC serves one of these interrupts, it clears the TDRE or RDRF bit
to 0 under the following conditions, which differ between the two bits.
When invoked by a TXI request, if the DTC writes to the TDR, it automatically clears the TDRE
bit to 0. When invoked by an RXI request, if the DTC reads from the RDR, it automatically clears
the RDRF bit to 0.
See section 6, “Data Transfer Controller” for further information on the DTC.
14.5 Application Notes
Application programmers should note the following features of the SCI.
1. TDR Write: The TDRE bit in the SSR is simply a flag that indicates that the TDR contents
have been transferred to the TSR. The TDR contents can be rewritten regardless of the TDRE
value. If a new byte is written in the TDR while the TDRE bit is 0, before the old TDR
contents have been moved into the TSR, the old byte will be lost. Normally, software should
check that the TDRE bit is set to 1 before writing to the TDR.
2. Multiple Receive Errors: Table 14-10 lists the values of flag bits in the SSR when multiple
receive errors occur, and indicates whether the RSR contents are transferred to the RDR.
269
Table 14-10 SSR Bit States and Data Transfer When Multiple Receive Errors Occur
SSR Bits
ORER
FER
PER
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Receive Error
RDRF
Overrun error
1*1
Framing error
0
Parity error
0
Overrun + framing errors
1*1
Overrun + parity errors
1*1
Framing + parity errors
0
Overrun + framing + parity errors
1*1
*1 Set to 1 before the overrun error occurs.
*2 Yes: The RSR contents are transferred to the RDR.
No: The RSR contents are not transferred to the RDR.
RSR to RDR*2
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
3. Line Break Detection: When the RXD pin receives a continuous stream of 0’s in the
asynchronous mode (line-break state), a framing error occurs because the SCI detects a 0 stop
bit. The value H'00 is transferred from the RSR to the RDR. Software can detect the linebreak state as a framing error accompanied by H'00 data in the RDR.
The SCI continues to receive data, so if the FER bit is cleared to 0 another framing error will
occur.
4. Sampling Timing and Receive Margin in Asynchronous Mode: The serial clock used by
the SCI in asynchronous mode runs at 16 times the bit rate. The falling edge of the start bit is
detected by sampling the RXD input on the falling edge of this clock. After the start bit is
detected, each bit of receive data in the frame (including the start bit, parity bit, and stop bit or
bits) is sampled on the rising edge of the serial clock pulse at the center of the bit.
See figure 14-5.
It follows that the receive margin can be calculated as in equation (1).
When the absolute frequency deviation of the clock signal is 0 and the clock duty factor is 0.5,
data can theoretically be received with distortion up to the margin given by equation (2). This
is a theoretical limit, however. In practice, system designers should allow a margin of 20% to
30%.
270
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5
Basic clock
–7.5 pulses
Receive data
+7.5 pulses
D0
Start bit
D1
Sync sampling
Data sampling
Figure 14-5 Sampling Timing (Asynchronous Mode)
M = {(0.5 – 1/2N) – (D – 0.5)/N – (L – 0.5)F} × 100 [%]
N:
N:
D:
L:
F:
(1)
Receive margin
Ratio of basic clock to bit rate (16)
Duty factor of clock—ratio of High pulse width to Low width (0.5 to 1.0)
Frame length (9 to 12)
Absolute clock frequency deviation
When D = 0.5 and F= 0
M = (0.5 –1/2 × 16) × 100 [%] = 46.875%
271
(2)
Section 15 A/D Converter
15.1 Overview
The H8/532 chip includes an analog-to-digital converter module which can be programmed for
input of analog signal on up to eight channels. A/D conversion is performed by the successive
approximations method with 10-bit resolution.
15.1.1 Features
The features of the on-chip A/D module are:
•
•
•
•
Eight analog input channels
Sample and hold circuit
10-Bit resolution
Rapid conversion
Conversion time is 13.8µs per channel (at ø = 10MHz)
• Single and scan modes
— Single mode: A/D conversion is performed once.
— Scan mode: A/D conversion is performed in a repeated cycle on one to four channels.
• Four 16-bit data registers
These registers store A/D conversion results for up to four channels.
• A CPU interrupt (ADI) can be requested at the completion of each A/D conversion cycle.
This interrupt can also be served by the on-chip data transfer controller (DTC), providing a
convenient way to move results into memory.
273
15.1.2 Block Diagram
Bus interface
Figure 15-1 shows a block diagram of A/D converter.
AVSS
Internal
data bus
ADCSR
ADDRD
ADDRC
10-Bit D/A
ADDRB
AVCC
ADDRA
Successive approximations
register
Module data bus
AN0
AN1
AN3
AN4
AN5
AN6
+
Analog multiplexer
AN2
ø/8
–
Control circuit
ø/16
Sample & hold
circuit
AN7
ADI
Interrupt signal
ADDRA:
ADDRB:
ADDRC:
ADDRD:
ADCSR:
A/D Data Register A
A/D Data Register B
A/D Data Register C
A/D Data Register D
A/D Control/Status Register
Figure 15-1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter
274
15.1.3 Input Pins
Table 15-1 lists the input pins used by the A/D converter module.
The eight analog input pins are divided into two groups, consisting of analog inputs 0 to 3 (AN0 to
AN3) and analog inputs 4 to 7 (AN4 to AN7), respectively.
Table 15-1 A/D Input Pins
Name
Analog supply
voltage
Analog ground
Analog input 0
Analog input 1
Analog input 2
Analog input 3
Analog input 4
Analog input 5
Analog input 6
Analog input 7
Abbreviation
AVCC
I/O
Input
AVSS
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
AN5
AN6
AN7
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Function
Power supply and reference voltage for the
analog circuits.
Ground and reference voltage for the analog circuits.
Analog input pins, group 0
Analog input pins, group 1
15.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 15-2 lists the registers of the A/D converter module.
Table 15-2 A/D Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
A/D data register A (High)
ADDRA (H)
R
H'00
A/D data register A (Low)
ADDRA (L)
R
H'00
A/D data register B (High)
ADDRB (H)
R
H'00
A/D data register B (Low)
ADDRB (L)
R
H'00
A/D data register C (High)
ADDRC (H)
R
H'00
A/D data register C (Low)
ADDRC (L)
R
H'00
A/D data register D (High)
ADDRD (H)
R
H'00
A/D data register D (Low)
ADDRD (L)
R
H'00
A/D control/status register
ADCSR
R/(W)* H'00
* Software can write “0” to clear the status flag bits but cannot write 1.
275
Address
H'FFE0
H'FFE1
H'FFE2
H'FFE3
H'FFE4
H'FFE5
H'FFE6
H'FFE7
H'FFE8
15.2 Register Descriptions
15.2.1 A/D Data Registers (ADDR)—H'FFE0 to H'FFE7
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADDRn H
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
(n = A to D)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADDRn H
AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
(n = A to D)
The four A/D data registers (ADDRA to ADDRD) are 16-bit read-only registers that store the
results of A/D conversion.
Each result consist of 10 bits. The first 8 bits are stored in the upper byte of the data register
corresponding to the selected channel. The last two bits are stored in the lower data register byte.
Each data register is assigned to two analog input channels as indicated in table 15-3.
The A/D data registers are always readable by the CPU. The upper byte can be read directly. The
lower byte is read via a temporary register. See section 15-3, “CPU Interface” for details.
The unused bits (bits 5 to 0) of the lower data register byte are always read as 0.
The A/D data registers are initialized to H'0000 at a reset and in the standby modes.
Table 15-3 Assignment of Data Registers to Analog Input Channels
Analog Input Channel
Group 0
Group 1
AN0
AN4
AN1
AN5
AN2
AN6
AN3
AN7
A/D Data Register
ADDRA
ADDRB
ADDRC
ADDRD
276
15.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)—H'FFE8
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADF
ADIE
ADST
SCAN
CKS
CH2
CH1
CH0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
* Software can write a 0 in bit 7 to clear the flag, but cannot write a 1 in this bit.
The A/D control/status register (ADCSR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the
operation of the A/D converter module.
The ADCSR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—A/D End Flag (ADF): This status flag indicates the end of one cycle of A/D conversion.
Bit 7
ADF
0
1
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
(Initial value)
1. The chip is reset or placed in a standby mode.
2. The CPU reads the ADF bit, then writes a “0” in this bit.
3. An A/D interrupt is served by the data transfer controller (DTC).
This bit is set to 1 at the following times:
1. Single mode: when one A/D conversion is completed.
2. Scan mode: when inputs on all selected channels have been converted.
Bit 6—A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): This bit selects whether to request an A/D interrupt
(ADI) when A/D conversion is completed.
Bit 6
ADIE
0
1
Description
The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is disabled.
The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is enabled.
277
(Initial value)
Bit 5—A/D Start (ADST): The A/D converter operates while this bit is set to 1. In the single
mode, this bit is automatically cleared to 0 at the end of each A/D conversion.
Bit 5
ADST
0
1
Description
A/D conversion is halted.
(Initial value)
1. Single mode: One A/D conversion is performed. The ADST bit is automatically
cleared to 0 at the end of the conversion.
2. Scan mode: A/D conversion starts and continues cyclically on the selected channels
until the ADST bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 4—Scan Mode (SCAN): This bit selects the scan mode or single mode of operation.
See section 15.4, “Operation” for descriptions of these modes.
The mode should be changed only when the ADST bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 4
SCAN
0
1
Description
Single mode
Scan mode
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Clock Select (CKS): This bit controls the A/D conversion time.
The conversion time should be changed only when the ADST bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 3
CKS
0
1
Description
Conversion time = 274 states
Conversion time = 138 states
(Initial value)
Bits 2 to 0—Channel Select 2 to 0 (CH2 to CH0): These bits and the SCAN bit combine to
select one or more analog input channels.
The channel selection should be changed only when the ADST bit is cleared to 0.
278
Group Select
CH2
0
1
CH1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Channel Select
CH0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Selected Channels
Single Mode Scan Mode
AN0
AN0
AN1
AN0 and AN1
AN2
AN0 to AN2
AN3
AN0 to AN3
AN4
AN4
AN5
AN4 and AN5
AN6
AN4 to AN6
AN7
AN4 to AN7
15.3 CPU Interface
The A/D data registers (ADDRA to ADDRD) are 16-bit registers. The upper byte of each register
can be read directly, but the lower byte is accessed through an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP).
When the CPU or DTC reads the upper byte of an A/D data register, at the same time as the upper
byte is placed on the internal data bus, the lower byte is transferred to TEMP. When the lower
byte is accessed, the value in TEMP is placed on the internal data bus.
A program that requires all 10 bits of an A/D result should perform word access, or should read
first the upper byte, then the lower byte of the A/D data register. Either way, it is assured of
obtaining consistent data. Consistent data are not assured if the program reads the lower byte first.
A program that requires only 8-bit A/D accuracy should perform byte access to the upper byte of
the A/D data register. The value in TEMP can be left unread.
Figure 15-2 shows the data flow when the CPU (or DTC) reads an A/D data register.
279
< Upper byte read >
Module data bus
CPU
receives
data H’AA
Bus interface
TEMP
[H’40]
ADDRn H
[H’AA]
ADDRn L
[H’40]
(n = A to D)
< Lower byte read >
Module data bus
CPU
receives
data H’40
Bus interface
TEMP
[H’40]
ADDRn H
[H’AA]
ADDRn L
[H’40]
(n = A to D)
Figure 15-2 Read Access to A/D Data Register (When Register Contains H'AA40)
15.4 Operation
The A/D converter performs 10 successive approximations to obtain a result ranging from H'0000
(corresponding to AVSS) to H'FFC0 (corresponding to AVCC). Only the first 10 bits of the result
are significant.
The A/D converter module can be programmed to operate in single mode or scan mode as
explained below.
280
15.4.1 Single Mode
The single mode is suitable for obtaining a single data value from a single channel. A/D
conversion starts when the ADST bit is set to 1. During the conversion process the ADST bit
remains set to 1. When conversion is completed, the ADST bit is automatically cleared to 0.
When the conversion is completed, the ADF bit is set to 1. If the interrupt enable bit (ADIE) is
also set to 1, an A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) is requested, so that the converted data can be
processed by an interrupt-handling routine. Alternatively, the interrupt can be served by the data
transfer controller (DTC).
When an A/D interrupt is served by the DTC, the DTC automatically clears the ADF bit to 0.
When an A/D interrupt is served by the CPU, however, the ADF bit remains set until the CPU
reads the ADCSR, then writes a 0 in the ADF bit.
Before selecting the single mode, clock, and analog input channel, software should clear the
ADST bit to 0 to make sure the A/D converter is stopped. Changing the mode, clock, or channel
selection while A/D conversion is in progress can lead to conversion errors.
The following example explains the A/D conversion process in single mode when channel 1
(AN1) is selected. Figure 15-3 shows the corresponding timing chart.
1. Software clears the ADST bit to 0, then selects the single mode (SCAN = 0) and channel 1
(CH2 to CH0 = “001”), enables the A/D interrupt request (ADIE = 1), and sets the ADST bit to
1 to start A/D conversion. (Selection of mode, clock channel and setting the ADST bit can be
done at same time.)
Coding Example: (when using the slow clock, CKS = 0)
BCLR #5, @H'FFE8
MOV.B #H'61, @H'FFE8
2. The A/D converter samples the AN1 input and converts the voltage level to a digital value. At
the end of the conversion process the A/D converter transfers the result to register ADDRB,
sets the ADF bit is set to 1, clears the ADST bit to 0, and halts.
3. ADF = 1 and ADIE = 1, so an A/D interrupt is requested.
4. The user-coded A/D interrupt-handling routine is started.
5. The interrupt-handling routine reads the ADCSR value, then writes a 0 in the ADF bit to clear
this bit to 0.
6. The interrupt-handling routine reads and processes the A/D conversion result.
7. The routine ends.
281
Steps 2 to 7 can now be repeated by setting the ADST bit to 1 again.
If the data transfer enable (DTE) bit is set to 1, the interrupt is served by the data transfer
controller (DTC). Steps 4 to 7 then change as follows.
4’.
5’.
6’.
7’.
The DTC is started.
The DTC automatically clears the ADF bit to 0.
The DTC transfers the A/D conversion result from ADDRB to a specified destination address.
The DTC ends.
282
Figure 15-3 A/D Operation in Single Mode (When Channel 1 is Selected)
283
*
Waiting
Channel 3 (AN 3 )
A/D conversion ➀
Set*
Set*
indicates execution of a software instruction
ADDRD
ADDRC
ADDRB
ADDRA
Waiting
Waiting
Channel 1 (AN 1 )
Channel 2 (AN 2 )
Waiting
A/D conversion starts
Channel 0 (AN 0 )
ADF
ADST
ADIE
Interrupt (ADI)
Read result
A/D conversion result ➀
Waiting
Clear*
A/D conversion ➁
Set*
Read result
A/D conversion result ➁
Waiting
Clear*
15.4.2 Scan Mode
The scan mode can be used to monitor analog inputs on one or more channels. When the ADST
bit is set to 1, A/D conversion starts from the first channel selected by the CH bits. When
CH2 = 0 the first channel is AN0. When CH2 = 1 the first channel is AN4.
If the scan group includes more than one channel (i.e. if bit CH1 or CH0 is set), conversion of the
next channel begins as soon as conversion of the first channel ends.
Conversion of the selected channels continues cyclically until the ADST bit is cleared to 0. The
conversion results are placed in the data registers corresponding to the selected channels.
Before selecting the scan mode, clock, and analog input channels, software should clear the ADST
bit to 0 to make sure the A/D converter is stopped. Changing the mode, clock, or channel
selection while A/D conversion is in progress can lead to conversion errors.
The following example explains the A/D conversion process when three channels in group 0 are
selected (AN0, AN1, and AN2). Figure 15-4 shows the corresponding timing chart.
1. Software clears the ADST bit to 0, then selects the scan mode (SCAN = 1), scan group 0
(CH2 = 0), and analog input channels AN0 to AN2 (CH1 and CH0 = 0) and sets the ADST bit
to 1 to start A/D conversion.
Coding Example: (with slow clock and ADI interrupt enabled)
BCLR #5, @H'FFE8
MOV.B #H'72, @FFE8
2. The A/D converter samples the input at AN0, converts the voltage level to a digital value, and
transfers the result to register ADDRA.
3. Next the A/D converter samples and converts AN1 and transfers the result to ADDRB. Then it
samples and converts AN2 and transfers the result to ADDRC.
4. After all selected channels (AN0 to AN2) have been converted, the AD converter sets the ADF
bit to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1, an A/D interrupt (ADI) is requested. Then the A/D
converter begins converting AN0 again.
5. Steps 2 to 4 are repeated cyclically as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1.
To stop the A/D converter, software must clear the ADST bit to 0.
284
Note on Scan Mode: If the ADST bit is cleared to 0 while two or more channels are being
converted in scan mode, incorrect values may be set in the A/D data registers.
This problem is limited to ZTAT versions. It does not occur in versions with masked ROM.
Solution: Read the A/D data registers only when the ADST bit is set to 1.
Example:
MOV.B
BSET.B
ADI:
#5B ,@ADCSR ; 4-channel scan mode
#5
,@ADCSR ; Start conversion (set ADST)
<A/D conversion continues>
MOV.W
@ADDRA , R0
; read ADDRA
MOV.W
@ADDRB , R1
; read ADDRB
MOV.W
@ADDRC , R2
; read ADDRC
MOV.W
@ADDRD , R3
; read ADDRD
BCLR.B #5
, @ADCSR
; clear ADST
BCLR.B #7
, @ADCSR
; clear ADF
The A/D data registers should be read before ADST is cleared, as in the preceding example. (It is
not necessary to clear ADST in order to read the A/D data registers.)
285
Figure 15-4 A/D Operation in Scan Mode (When Channels 0 to 2 are Selected)
286
*
Waiting
Waiting
Waiting
A/D conversion ➀
Set*
indicates execution of a software instruction
ADDRD
ADDRC
ADDRB
ADDRA
Channel 3 (AN 3 )
Channel 2 (AN 2 )
Channel 1 (AN 1 )
Channel 0 (AN 0 )
ADF
ADST
Transfer
A/D conversion ➁
Waiting
A/D conversion ➂
A/D conversion ➀
Waiting
Waiting
Waiting
Waiting
Clear*
A/D conversion ➃
A/D conversion ➄
A/D conversion ➂
A/D conversion ➁
A/D conversion ➃
A/D conversion
time
Waiting
Continuous A/D conversion
Clear*
15.5 Input Sampling Time and A/D Conversion Time
The A/D converter includes a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. Sampling of the input starts at a
time tD after the ADST bit is set to 1. The sampling process lasts for a time tSPL. The actual A/D
conversion begins after sampling is completed. Figure 15-5 shows the timing of these steps, and
table 15-4 lists the total conversion times (tCONV) for the single mode.
The total conversion time includes tD and tSPL. The purpose of tD is to synchronize the ADCSR
write time with the A/D conversion process, so the length of tD is variable. The total conversion
time therefore varies within the minimum to maximum ranges indicated in table 15-4.
In the scan mode, the ranges given in table 15-4 apply to the first conversion. The length of the
second and subsequent conversion processes is fixed at 256 states (when CKS = 0) or 128 states
(when CKS = 1).
287
(1)
ø
Internal address
bus
(2)
Write signal
Input sampling
timing
ADF
tD
t SPL
t CONV
(1)
(2)
tD
t SPL
t CONV
:
:
:
:
:
ADCSR write cycle
ADCSR address
Synchronization delay
Input sampling time
Total A/D conversion time
Figure 15-5 A/D Conversion Timing
Table 15-4 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)
Item
Synchronization delay
Input sampling time
Total A/D conversion time
Symbol
tD
tSPL
tCONV
Min
18
—
259
CKS = “0”
Typ
Max
—
33
63
—
—
274
Note: Values in the table are numbers of states.
288
Min
10
—
131
CKS = “1”
Typ
Max
—
17
31
—
—
138
15.6 Interrupts and the Data Transfer Controller
The ADI interrupt request is enabled or disabled by the ADIE bit in the ADCSR.
When the ADI bit in data transfer enable register DTED (bit 0 at address H'FFF7) is set to 1, the
ADI interrupt is served by the data transfer controller. The DTC can be used to transfer A/D
results to a buffer in memory, or to an I/O port. The DTC automatically clears the ADF bit to 0.
Note: In scan mode, the DTC can transfer data for only one channel per interrupt, even if two or
more channels are selected.
289
Section 16 RAM
16.1 Overview
The H8/532 includes 1K byte of on-chip static RAM, connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus.
Both byte and word access to the on-chip RAM are performed in two states, enabling rapid data
transfer and instruction execution.
The on-chip RAM is assigned to addresses H'FB80 to H'FF7F in the chip’s address space. A
RAM control register (RAMCR) can enable or disable the on-chip RAM, permitting these
addresses to be allocated to external memory instead, if so desired.
16.1.1 Block Diagram
Figure 16-1 shows the block diagram of the on-chip RAM.
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
Address
H'FB80
RAMCR
H'FB82
On-chip RAM
H'FF7E
Even addresses
Odd addresses
RAMCR: RAM Control Register
Figure 16-1 Block Diagram of On-Chip RAM
291
16.1.2 Register Configuration
The on-chip RAM is controlled by the register described in table 16-1.
Table 16-1 RAM Control Register
Name
RAM control register
Abbreviation
RAMCR
R/W
R/W
Initial Value
H'FF
Address
H'FFF9
16.2 RAM Control Register (RAMCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAME
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The RAM control register (RAMCR) is an 8-bit register that enables or disable the on-chip RAM.
Bit 7—RAM Enable (RAME): This bit enables or disables the on-chip RAM.
The RAME bit is initialized on the rising edge of the signal. It is not initialized in the software
standby mode.
Bit 7
RAME
0
1
Description
On-chip RAM is disabled.
On-chip RAM is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bits 6 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
16.3 Operation
16.3.1 Expanded Modes (Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4)
If the RAME bit is set to 1, accesses to addresses H'FB80 to H'FF7F are directed to the on-chip
RAM. If the RAME bit is cleared to 0, accesses to addresses H'FB80 to H'FF7F are directed to
the external data bus.
292
16.3.2 Single-Chip Mode (Mode 7)
If the RAME bit is set to 1, accesses to addresses H'FB80 to H'FF7F are directed to the on-chip
RAM. If the RAME bit is cleared to 0, access of any type (instruction fetch or data read or write)
to addresses H'FB80 to H'FF7F causes an address error and initiates the CPU’s exception-handling
sequence.
293
Section 17 ROM
17.1 Overview
The H8/532 includes 32K bytes of high-speed, on-chip ROM. The on-chip ROM is connected to
the CPU via a 16-bit data bus and is accessed in two states.
Users wishing to program the chip themselves can request electrically programmable ROM
(PROM). The PROM version of the H8/532 has a PROM mode in which the chip can be
programmed with a standard, external PROM writer. The chip is also available with masked
ROM.
The on-chip ROM is enabled or disabled depending on the MCU operating mode, which is
determined by the inputs at the mode pins when the chip comes out of the reset state.
See table 17-1.
Table 17-1 ROM Usage in Each MCU Mode
Mode
Mode 1 (expanded minimum mode)
Mode 2 (expanded minimum mode)
Mode 3 (expanded maximum mode)
Mode 4 (expanded maximum mode)
Mode 7 (single-chip mode)
Mode Pins
MD2 MD1 MD0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
17.1.1 Block Diagram
Figure 17-1 shows the block diagram of the on-chip ROM.
295
ROM
Disabled (external addresses)
Enabled
Disabled (external addresses)
Enabled
Enabled
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
Addresses
H'0000
H'0002
On-chip ROM
H'7FFF
Even addresses
Odd addresses
Figure 17-1 Block Diagram of On-Chip ROM
17.2 PROM Mode
17.2.1 PROM Mode Setup
The PROM version of the H8/532 has a PROM mode in which the usual microcomputer functions
are halted to allow the on-chip PROM to be programmed. The programming method is the same
as for the HN27C256.
To select the PROM mode, apply the signal inputs listed in table 17-2.
Table 17-2 Selection of PROM Mode
Pin
Mode pins (MD2, MD1, and MD0)
STBY pin
P61 and P60
Input
Low
Low
High
296
17.2.2 Socket Adapter Pin Arrangements and Memory Map
The H8/532 can be programmed with a general-purpose PROM writer by attaching a socket
adapter as listed in table 17-3. The socket adapter depends on the type of package. Figure 17-2
shows the socket adapter pin arrangements by giving the correspondence between H8/532 pins
and HN27C256 pin functions. Figure 17-3 is a memory map.
Table 17-3 Socket Adapter
Package
84-Pin PLCC (CP-84)
84-Pin windowed LCC (CG-84)
80-Pin plastic QFP (FP-80A)
Socket Adapter
HS538ESC01H
HS538ESG01H
HS538ESH01H
297
H8/532
FP-80A
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
60
5
42
6
7
8
9
51
12
29
71
—
—
—
EPROM socket
CG-84, CP-84
21
RES
22
NMI
25
P30
26
P31
27
P32
28
P33
29
P34
30
P35
31
P36
32
P37
33
P40
34
P41
35
P42
36
P43
37
P44
38
P45
39
P46
40
P47
43
P50
44
P51
45
P52
46
P53
47
P54
48
P55
49
P56
50
P57
51
P60
52
P61
74
AVCC
16
VCC
55
VCC
17
MD0
18
MD1
19
MD2
20
STBY
65
AVss
2
Vss
24
Vss
41
Vss
42
Vss
64
Vss
83
Vss
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
VPP
EA9
EO0
EO1
EO2
EO3
EO4
EO5
EO6
EO7
EA0
EA1
EA2
EA3
EA4
EA5
EA6
EA7
EA8
OE
EA10
EA11
EA12
EA13
EA14
CE
VCC
HN27C256 (28 pins)
1
24
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
22
21
23
2
26
27
20
28
Vss
14
VPP:
E7 to E0:
EA14 to EA0:
OE:
CE:
Programming power (12.5V)
Data input/output
Address input
Output enable
Chip enable
Note: All pins not shown in this figure should be left open.
Figure 17-2 Socket Adapter Pin Arrangements
298
Address in MCU mode
Address in PROM mode
H'0000
H'0000
On-chip ROM
H'7FFF
H'7FFF
Figure 17-3 Memory Map in PROM Mode
17.3 Programming
The write, verify, and inhibited sub-modes of the PROM mode are selected as shown in
table 17-4.
Table 17-4 Selection of Sub-Modes in PROM Mode
Pins
Mode
CE
OE
VPP
VCC
07 to 00
Write
Low
High
VPP
VCC
Data input
Verify
High
Low
VPP
VCC
Data output
VCC
High-impedance
Programming inhibited
High
High
VPP
Note: The VPP and VCC pins must be held at the VPP and VCC voltage levels.
A14 to A0
Address input
Address input
Address input
The H8/532 PROM uses the same, standard read/write specifications as the HN27C256 and
HN27256.
17.3.1 Writing and Verifying
An efficient, high-speed programming procedure can be used to write and verify PROM data.
This procedure writes data quickly without subjecting the chip to voltage stress and without
sacrificing data reliability. It leaves the data H'FF written in unused addresses.
299
Figure 17-4 shows the basic high-speed programming flowchart.
Tables 17-5 and 17-6 list the electrical characteristics of the chip in the PROM mode. Figure 17-5
shows a write/verify timing chart.
START
SET program mode
Vcc = 6.0V ±0.25V, Vpp = 12.5V ±0.3V
Address = 0
n=0
n + 1→1
Write time tpw = 1 ms ±5%
Y
N
SET verify mode
Vcc = 6.0V ±0.25V, Vpp = 12.5V ±0.3V
n<S
S = 25
N
Verify OK?
Address + 1 → Address
Y
SET program mode
Vcc = 6.0V ±0.25V, Vpp = 12.5V ±0.3V
Write topw = 3n ms
N
Last address?
Y
SET read mode
Vcc = 5.0V ±0.5V, Vpp = Vcc
NOGO
Error
All address read?
GO
END
Figure 17-4 High-Speed Programming Flowchart
300
Table 17-5 DC Characteristics
(When VCC = 6.0V ±0.25V, VPP = 12.5V ±0.3V, VSS = 0V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C)
Item
Input High voltage O7 to O0, A14 to A0, OE, CE
Input Low voltage O7 to O0, A14 to A0, OE, CE
Input High voltage O7 to O0
Input Low voltage
Input leakage
current
VCC current
VPP current
Symbol Min
VIH 2.4
VIL –0.3
VOH 2.4
VOL —
O7 to O0
O7 to O0, A14 to A0, OE, CE |ILI| —
ICC
IPP
—
—
Typ
—
—
—
Max
VCC + 0.3
0.8
—
—
—
0.45
2
—
—
40
40
Measurement
Unit Conditions
V
V
V
IOH =
–200µA
V
IOL = 1.6mA
µA Vin =
5.25V/0.5V
mA
mA
Table 17-6 AC Characteristics
(When VCC = 6.0V ±0.25V, VPP = 12.5V ±0.3V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C)
SymItem
bol Min Typ
2
—
Address setup time
tAS
OE setup time
tOES 2
—
Data setup time
tDS 2
—
—
Address hold time
tAH 0
Data hold time
tDH 2
—
Data output disable time
tDF
—
—
tVPS 2
—
VPP setup time
Program pulse width
tPW 0.95 1.0
OE pulse width for
tOPW 2.85 —
overwrite-programming
tVCS 2
—
VCC setup time
—
Data output delay time
tOE 0
* Input pulse level: 0.8V to 2.2V
Input rise/fall time ≤ 20ns
Timing reference levels: input—1.0V, 2.0V; output—0.8V, 2.0V
301
Max
—
—
—
—
—
130
—
1.05
78.75
Measurement
Unit Conditions
µs
See figure
µs
17-5*
µs
µs
µs
µs
µs
ms
ms
—
500
µs
ns
Write
Verify
Address
tAH
tAS
Data
Input data
tDH
tDS
Vpp Vpp
Vcc
Output data
tDF
tVPS
Vcc
Vcc
GND
tVCS
CE
tPW
OE
tOES
tOE
tOPW
Figure 17-5 PROM Write/Verify Timing
17.3.2 Notes on Writing
1. Write with the specified voltages and timing. The programming voltage (Vpp) in the
PROM mode is 12.5V.
Caution: Applied voltages in excess of the specified values can permanently destroy to the chip.
Be particularly careful about the PROM writer’s overshoot characteristics.
If the PROM writer is set to Intel specifications or Hitachi HN27256 or HN27C256 specifications,
Vpp will be 12.5V.
2. Before writing data, check that the socket adapter and chip are correctly mounted in the
PROM writer. Overcurrent damage to the chip can result if the index marks on the PROM
writer, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned.
302
3. Don’t touch the socket adapter or chip while writing. Touching either of these can cause
contact faults and write errors.
17.3.3 Reliability of Written Data
An effective way to assure the data holding characteristics of the programmed chips is to bake
them at 150°C, then screen them for data errors. This procedure quickly eliminates chips with
PROM memory cells prone to early failure.
Figure 17-6 shows the recommended screening procedure.
Write program
Bake with power off
150°C 48 Hr
Read and check program
VCC = 4.5V and 5.5V
Install
Figure 17-6 Recommended Screening Procedure
If a series of write errors occur while the same PROM writer is in use, stop programming and
check the PROM writer and socket adapter for defects, using a microcomputer with a windowed
package and on-chip EPROM.
Please inform Hitachi of any abnormal conditions noted during programming or in screening of
program data after high-temperature baking.
303
17.3.4 Erasing of Data
The windowed package enables data to be erased by illuminating the window with ultraviolet
light. Table 17-7 lists the erasing conditions.
Table 17-7 Erasing Conditions
Item
Ultraviolet wavelength
Minimum illumination
Value
253.7nm
15W·s/cm2
The conditions in table 17-7 can be satisfied by placing a 12000µW/cm2 ultraviolet lamp 2 or 3
centimeters directly above the chip and leaving it on for about 20 minutes.
17.4 Handling of Windowed Packages
1. Glass Erasing Window: Rubbing the glass erasing window of a windowed package with a
plastic material or touching it with an electrically charged object can create a static charge on
the window surface which may cause the chip to malfunction.
If the erasing window becomes charged, the charge can be neutralized by a short exposure to
ultraviolet light. This returns the chip to its normal condition, but it also reduces the charge
stored in the floating gates of the PROM, so it is recommended that the chip be reprogrammed
afterward.
Accumulation of static charge on the window surface can be prevented by the following
precautions:
(1) When handling the package, ground yourself. Don’t wear gloves. Avoid other possible
sources of static charge.
(2) Avoid friction between the glass window and plastic or other materials that tend to
accumulate static charge.
(3) Be careful when using cooling sprays, since they may have a slight ion content.
(4) Cover the window with an ultraviolet-shield label, preferably a label including a
conductive material. Besides protecting the PROM contents from ultraviolet light, the label
protects the chip by distributing static charge uniformly.
2. Handling after Programming: Fluorescent light and sunlight contain small amounts of
ultraviolet, so prolonged exposure to these types of light can cause programmed data to invert.
304
In addition, exposure to any type of intense light can induce photoelectric effects that may lead
to chip malfunction. It is recommended that after programming the chip, you cover the erasing
window with a light-proof label (such as an ultraviolet-shield label).
3. 84-Pin LCC Package Mounting: When mounted on a printed circuit board, the 84-pin LCC
package must be mounted in a socket. The recommended socket is listed in table 17-8.
Table 17-8 Socket for 84-Pin LCC Package
Manufacturer
Sumitomo 3-M
Product Code
284-1273-00-1102J
305
Section 18 Power-Down State
18.1 Overview
The H8/532 has a power-down state that greatly reduces power consumption by stopping the CPU
functions. The power-down state includes three modes:
1. Sleep mode—
a software-triggered mode in which the CPU halts but the rest of
the chip remains active
2. Software standby mode— a software-triggered mode in which the entire chip is inactive
3. Hardware standby mode— a hardware-triggered mode in which the entire chip is inactive
The sleep mode and software standby mode are entered from the program execution state by
executing the SLEEP instruction under the conditions given in table 18-1. The hardware standby
mode is entered from any other state by a Low input at the STBY pin.
Table 18-1 lists the conditions for entering and leaving the power-down modes. It also indicates
the status of the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, etc., in each power-down mode.
Table 18-1 Power-Down State
Clock
Run
CPU
Halt
CPU
Reg’s.
Held
Sup.
Mod’s.
Run
Halt
Halt
Held
HardHalt
Halt
Not
ware
held
standby
mode
* The watchdog timer must also be stopped.
Mode
Sleep
mode
Software
standby
mode
Entering
Procedure
Execute
SLEEP
instruction
Set SSBY bit
in SBYCR to
1, then
execute SLEEP
instruction*
Set STBY
pin to Low
level
Notes: SBYCR Software standby control register
SSBY Software standby bit
307
RAM
Held
I/O
Ports
Held
Halt
and
partly
initialized
Held
Held
Halt
and
partly
initialized
Held
High
impedance
state
Exiting
Methods
• Interrupt
• RES Low
• STBY Low
• NMI
• RES Low
• STBY Low
• STBY High,
then RES
Low → High
18.2 Sleep Mode
18.2.1 Transition to Sleep Mode
Execution of the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from the program execution state to the
sleep mode. After executing the SLEEP instruction, the CPU halts, but the contents of its internal
registers remain unchanged. The functions of the on-chip supporting modules do not stop in the
sleep mode.
18.2.2 Exit from Sleep Mode
The chip wakes up from the sleep mode when it receives an internal or external interrupt request,
or a Low input at the RES or STBY pin.
1. Wake-Up by Interrupt: An interrupt releases the sleep mode and starts either the CPU’s
interrupt-handling sequence or the data transfer controller (DTC).
If the interrupt is served by the DTC, after the data transfer is completed the CPU executes the
instruction following the SLEEP instruction, unless the count in the data transfer count register
(DTCR) is 0.
If an interrupt on a level equal to or less than the mask level in the CPU’s status register (SR) is
requested, the interrupt is left pending and the sleep mode continues. Also, if an interrupt from
an on-chip supporting module is disabled by the corresponding enable/disable bit in the
module’s control register, the interrupt cannot be requested, so it cannot wake the chip up.
2. Wake-Up by RES pin: When the RES pin goes Low, the chip exits from the sleep mode to the
reset state.
3. Wake-Up by STBY pin: When the STBY pin goes Low, the chip exits from the sleep mode to
the hardware standby mode.
18.3 Software Standby Mode
18.3.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode
A program enters the software standby mode by setting the standby bit (SSBY) in the software
standby control register (SBYCR) to 1, then executing the SLEEP instruction. Table 18-2 lists the
attributes of the software standby control register.
308
Table 18-2 Software Standby Control Register
Name
Software standby control register
Abbreviation
SBYCR
R/W
R/W
Initial Value
H'7F
Address
H'FFFB
In the software standby mode, the CPU, clock, and the on-chip supporting module functions all
stop, reducing power consumption to an extremely low level. The on-chip supporting modules
and their registers are reset to their initial state, but as long as a minimum necessary voltage
supply is maintained (at least 2V), the contents of the CPU registers and on-chip RAM remain
unchanged. The I/O ports also remain in their current states.
18.3.2 Software Standby Control Register (SBYCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSBY
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The software standby control register (SBYCR) is an 8-bit register that controls the action of the
SLEEP instruction.
Bit 7—Software Standby (SSBY): This bit enables or disables the transition to the software
standby mode.
Bit 7
SSBY
0
1
Description
The SLEEP instruction causes a transition to the sleep mode. (Initial value)
The SLEEP instruction causes a transition to the software standby mode.
The watchdog timer must be stopped before the chip can enter the software standby mode. To
stop the watchdog timer, clear the timer enable bit (TME) in the watchdog timer’s timer
control/status register (TCSR) to 0. The SSBY bit cannot be set to 1 while the TME bit is set to 1.
When the chip is recovered from the software standby mode by a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI),
the SSBY bit is automatically cleared to 0. It is also cleared to 0 by a reset or transition to the
hardware standby mode.
Bits 6 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
309
18.3.3 Exit from Software Standby Mode
The chip can be brought out of the software standby mode by an input at one of three pins: the
NMI pin, RES pin, or STBY pin.
1. Recovery by NMI Pin: When an NMI request signal is received, the clock oscillator begins
operating but clock pulses are supplied only to the watchdog timer (WDT). The watchdog
timer begins counting from H'00 at the rate determined by the clock select bits (CKS2 to
CKS0) in its timer status/control register (TCSR). This rate should be set slow enough to allow
the clock oscillator to stabilize before the count reaches H'FF. When the count overflows from
H'FF to H'00, clock pulses are supplied to the whole chip, the software standby mode ends, and
execution of the NMI interrupt-handling sequence begins.
The clock select bits (CKS2 to CKS0) should be set as follows.
(1) Crystal oscillator: Set CKS2 to CKS0 to a value that makes the watchdog timer interval
equal to or greater than 10ms, which is the clock stabilization time.
(2) External clock input: CKS2 to CKS0 can be set to any value. The minimum value
(CKS2 = CKS1 = CKS0 = 0) is recommended.
2. Recovery by RES Pin: When the RES pin goes Low, the clock oscillator starts. Next, when
the RES pin goes High, the CPU begins executing the reset sequence.
When the chip recovers from the software standby mode by a reset, clock pulses are supplied to
the entire chip at once. Be sure to hold the RES pin Low long enough for the clock to stabilize.
3. Recovery by STBY Pin: When STBY the pin goes Low, the chip exits from the software
standby mode to the hardware standby mode.
18.3.4 Sample Application of Software Standby Mode
In this example the chip enters the software standby mode on the falling edge of the NMI input
and recovers from the software standby mode on the rising edge of NMI. Figure 18-1 shows a
timing chart of the transitions.
The nonmaskable interrupt edge bit (NMIEG) in the port 1 control register (P1CR) is originally
cleared to 0, selecting the falling edge as the NMI trigger. After accepting an NMI interrupt in
this condition, software changes the NMIEG bit to 1, sets the SSBY bit to 1, and executes the
SLEEP instruction to enter the software standby mode. The chip recovers from the software
standby mode on the next rising edge at the NMI pin.
310
Oscillator
ø
NMI
NMEG
SSBY
Clock setting time
NMI interrupt handling
NMIEG = 1
SSBY = 1
SLEEP instruction
Software standby mode
(Power-down state)
NMI interrupt handling
WDT interval (tOSC2 )
Clock start-up
time
WDT overflow
Figure 18-1 NMI Timing of Software Standby Mode (Application Example)
18.3.5 Application Notes
(1) The I/O ports retain their current states in the software standby mode. If a port is in the High
output state, its output current is not reduced in the software standby mode.
(2) If the software standby mode is entered under either condition ➀ or condition ➁ below in a
ZTAT version of the H8/532, current dissipation is greater than in normal standby mode (ICC =
100 to 300µA). This problem does not occur in H8/532 versions with masked ROM.
➀ In single-chip mode (mode 3): if software standby mode is entered after even one
instruction not stored in on-chip ROM has been fetched (e.g. from on-chip RAM).
➁ In expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled (mode 2): if software standby mode is
entered after even one instruction not stored in on-chip ROM has been fetched (e.g. from
external memory or on-chip RAM).
This problem does not occur in the expanded mode when on-chip ROM is disabled (mode 1).
In applications in which the additional standby current must be avoided, take one of the
following actions:
311
•
Store program code only in on-chip ROM.
•
Use the hardware standby mode. There is never any additional current in hardware standby
mode.
18.4 Hardware Standby Mode
18.4.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode
Regardless of its current state, the chip enters the hardware standby mode whenever the STBY pin
goes Low.
The hardware standby mode reduces power consumption drastically by halting the CPU, stopping
all the functions of the on-chip supporting modules, and placing I/O ports in the high-impedance
state.
The registers of the on-chip supporting modules are reset to their initial values. Only the on-chip
RAM is held unchanged, provided the minimum necessary voltage supply is maintained (at least
2V).*
Notes: 1
2
The RAME bit in the RAM control register should be cleared to 0 before the STBY
pin goes Low, to disable the on-chip RAM during the hardware standby mode.
Do not change the inputs at the mode pins (MD2, MD1, MD0) during hardware
standby mode. Be particularly careful not to let all three mode inputs go low, since
that would place the chip in PROM mode, causing increased current dissipation.
18.4.2 Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode
Recovery from the hardware standby mode requires inputs at both the STBY and RES pins.
When the STBY pin goes High, the clock oscillator begins running. The RES pin should be Low
at this time and should be held Low long enough for the clock to stabilize. When the RES pin
changes from Low to High, the reset sequence is executed and the chip returns to the program
execution state.
312
18.4.3 Timing Sequence of Hardware Standby Mode
Figure 18-2 shows the usual sequence for entering and leaving the hardware standby mode.
First the RES pin goes Low, placing the chip in the reset state. Then the STBY pin goes Low,
placing the chip in the hardware standby mode and stopping the clock. In the recovery sequence
first the STBY pin goes High; then after the clock stabilizes, the RES pin is returned to the High
level.
Oscillator
RES
STBY
Clock setting time
Restart
Figure 18-2 Hardware Standby Sequence
313
Section 19 E Clock Interface
19.1 Overview
For interfacing to E clock based peripheral devices, the H8/532 can generate an E clock output.
Special instructions (MOVTPE, MOVFPE) perform data transfers synchronized with the E clock.
The E clock is created by dividing the system clock (ø) by 8. The E clock is output at the P11 pin
when the P11DDR bit in the port 1 data direction register (P1DDR) is set to 1.
When the CPU executes an instruction that synchronizes with the E clock, the address is output on
the address bus as usual, but the data bus and the R/W, DS, RD, and WR signal lines do not
become active until the falling edge of the E clock is detected. The length of the access cycle for
an instruction synchronized with the E clock is accordingly variable. Figures 19-1 and 19-2 show
the timing in the cases of maximum and minimum synchronization delay.
The wait state controller (WSC) does not insert any wait states (Tw) during the execution of an
instruction synchronized with the E clock.
315
Figure 19-1 Execution Cycle of Instruction Synchronized with E Clock in
Expanded Modes (Maximum Synchronization Delay)
316
D7 to D0
(Write access)
D7 to D0
(Read access)
WR
DS (Write access),
RD
DS (Read access),
AS,
R/W
A19 to A0
E
ø
Last state
T1
T2
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
T3
Last state
T1
T2
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
T3
ø
E
A19 to A0
R/W
AS,
DS (Read access),
RD
DS (Write access),
WR
D7 to D0
(Read access)
D7 to D0
(Write access)
Figure 19-2 Execution Cycle of Instruction Synchronized with E Clock in Expanded Modes
(Minimum Synchronization Delay)
317
Section 20 Electrical Specifications
20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 20-1 lists the absolute maximum ratings.
Table 20-1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Supply voltage
Programming voltage
Input voltage (except Port 8)
(Port 8)
Analog supply voltage
Analog input voltage
Operating temperature
Symbol
VCC
VPP
Vin
Vin
AVCC
VAN
Topr
Storage temperature
Tstg
Rating
–0.3 to +7.0
–0.3 to +13.5
–0.3 to VCC + 0.3
–0.3 to AVCC + 0.3
–0.3 to +7.0
–0.3 to AVCC + 0.3
Regular specifications: –20 to +75
Wide-range specifications: –40 to +85
–55 to +125
Unit
V
V
V
V
V
V
°C
°C
°C
Note: Permanent LSI damage may occur if maximum ratings are exceeded. Normal operation
should be under recommended operating conditions.
20.2 Electrical Characteristics
20.2.1 DC Characteristics
Table 20-2 lists the DC characteristics.
319
Table 20-2 DC Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 5.0V ±10%*1, AVCC = 5.0V ±10%,*1 VSS = AVSS = 0V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
Item
Input High voltage RES, STBY,
MD2, MD1, MD0
EXTAL
Port 8
Other input pins
(except port 7)
Input Low voltage RES, STBY,
MD2, MD1, MD0
Other input pins
(except port 7)
Schmitt trigger
Port 7
input voltage
Input leakage
current
Leakage current
in 3-state
(off state)
Input pull-up
MOS current
Output High
Voltage
Output Low
Voltage
Input capacitance
RES
STBY, NMI,
MD2, MD1, MD0
port 8
Symbol
VIH
VIL
VTVT+
VT+–VT| Iin |
Measurement
Unit Conditions
V
Min
VCC – 0.7
Typ
–
Max
VCC+0.3
VCC × 0.7
2.2
2.2
–
–
–
VCC+0.3 V
AVCC+0.3 V
VCC+0.3 V
–0.3
–
0.5
V
–0.3
–
0.8
V
1.0
2.0
0.4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2.5
3.5
–
10.0
1.0
V
V
V
µA
µA
–
–
1.0
µA
Vin = 0.5 to
VCC–0.5V
Vin = 0.5 to
AVCC–0.5V
Vin = 0.5 to
VCC–0.5V
Port 9,
ports 7 to 1
| ITSI |
–
–
1.0
µA
ports 6 and 5
–IP
50
–
200
µA
Vin = 0V
All output pins
VOH
All output pins
Port 4
VOL
VCC–0.5
3.5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0.4
1.0
1.2
60
30
15
V
V
V
V
V
pF
pF
pF
IOH = –200µA
IOH = –1mA
IOL = 1.6mA
IOL = 8mA
IOL = 10mA
Vin = 0 V
f = 1MHz
Ta = 25°C
RES
Cin
NMI
All input pins
except RES, NMI
Note: *1 AVcc must be connected to a power supply line, even when the A/D converter is not used.
320
Table 20-2 DC Characteristics (cont)
Item
Current dissipation*2 Normal operation
Symbol
ICC
Min
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Sleep mode
Standby
Analog supply
current
During A/D
conversion
While waiting
AICC
Typ
20
25
30
12
16
20
0.01
–
1.2
Max
30
40
50
20
25
30
5.0
20
2.0
Unit
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
µA
µA
mA
Measurement
Conditions
f = 6 MHz
f = 8 MHz
f = 10 MHz
f = 6 MHz
f = 8 MHz
f = 10 MHz
Ta ≤ 50°C
Ta > 50°C
–
0.01 5.0
µA
RAM standby voltage
VRAM
2.0
–
–
V
*2 Current dissipation values assume that VIH min = VCC – 0.5V, VIL max = 0.5V, all output pins are
in the no-load state, and all MOS input pull-ups are off.
Table 20-3 Allowable Output Current Sink Values
Conditions: VCC = 5.0V ±10%, AVCC = 5.0V ±10%, VSS = AVSS = 0V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
Item
Allowable output Low
current sink (per pin)
Allowable output Low
current sink (total)
Port 4
Other output pins
Port 4, total of 8 pins
Total of all other
output pins
All output pins
Symbol
IOL
Σ IOL
Min
–
–
–
–
Typ
–
–
–
–
Max
10
2.0
40
80
Unit
mA
mA
mA
mA
Allowable output High
–IOH
–
–
2.0
mA
current sink (per pin)
Allowable output High
Total of all output
Σ –IOH
–
–
25
mA
current sink (total)
pins
Note: To avoid degrading the reliability of the chip, be careful not to exceed the output current sink
values in table 20-3. In particular, when driving a Darlington transistor pair or LED directly,
be sure to insert a current-limiting resistor in the output path. See figures 20-1 and 20-2.
321
H8/532
H8/532
Vcc
- - - - - - -- - -
Port
- - - - - - -- - -
-------------
2 kΩ
600 Ω
------------Darlington pair
Port 4
LED
Figure 20-1 Example of Circuit for Driving a
Darlington Transistor Pair
Figure 20-2 Example of Circuit for Driving
an LED
20.2.2 AC Characteristics
The AC characteristics of the H8/532 chip are listed in three tables. Bus timing parameters are
given in table 20-4, control signal timing parameters in table 20-5, and timing parameters of the
on-chip supporting modules in table 20-6.
Table 20-4 Bus Timing
Conditions: VCC = 5.0V ±10%, AVCC = 5.0V ±10%, ø = 0.5 to 10MHz, VSS = 0V
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
Item
Clock cycle time
Clock pulse width Low
Clock pulse width High
Clock rise time
Clock fall time
Address delay time
Address hold time
Data strobe delay time 1
Data strobe delay time 2
Data strobe delay time 3
Write data strobe pulse width
Address setup time 1
6MHz
Symbol Min Max
tcyc
166.7 2000
tCL
65
–
tCH
65
–
tCr
–
15
tCf
–
15
–
70
tAD
tAH
30
–
tDSD1
–
70
–
70
tDSD2
tDSD3
–
70
tDSWW 200 –
25
–
tAS1
322
8MHz
Min Max
125 2000
45
–
45
–
–
15
–
15
–
65
25
–
–
60
–
60
–
60
150 –
20
–
10MHz
Min Max
100 2000
35 –
35 –
–
15
–
15
–
65
20 –
–
40
–
50
–
50
120 –
15 –
Measurement
Unit Conditions
ns
See figure 20-4
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Table 20-4 Bus Timing (cont)
6MHz
Item
Symbol Min Max
Address setup time 2
tAS2
105 –
Read data setup time
tRDS
60
–
0
–
Read data hold time
tRDH
–
280
Read data access time
tACC
–
70
Write data delay time
tWDD
30
–
Write data setup time
tWDS
30
–
Write data hold time
tWDH
Wait setup time
tWTS
40
–
Wait hold time
tWTH
10
–
40
–
Bus request setup time
tBRQS
Bus acknowledge delay time 1 tBACD1 –
70
Bus acknowledge delay time 2 tBACD2 –
70
–
tBACD1
Bus floating delay time
tBZD
E clock delay time
tED
–
20
11
E clock rise time
tEr
–
15
E clock fall time
tEf
–
15
Read data hold time
tRDHE
0
–
(E clock sync)
Write data hold time
tWDHE
50
–
(E clock sync)
323
8MHz
10MHz
Min Max Min Max Unit
80
–
65 –
ns
50
–
40 –
ns
0
–
0
–
ns
–
190 –
160 ns
–
65
–
65
ns
15
–
10 –
ns
25
–
20 –
ns
40
–
40 –
ns
10
–
10 –
ns
40
–
40 –
ns
–
60
–
55
ns
–
60
–
55
ns
–
tBACD1 –
tBACD1 ns
–
15
–
15
ns
Measurement
Conditions
See figure 20-4
See figure 20-
–
–
0
15
15
–
–
–
0
15
15
–
ns
ns
ns
See figure 20-6
40
–
30
–
ns
See figure 20-5
See figure 20-10
Table 20-5 Control Signal Timing
Conditions: VCC = 5.0V ±10%, AVCC = 5.0V ±10%, ø = 0.5 to 10MHz, VSS = 0V
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
Item
RES setup time
RES pulse width
Mode programming
setup time
NMI setup time
NMI hold time
IRQ0 setup time
IRQ1 setup time
IRQ1 hold time
NMI pulse width
(for recovery from
software standby mode)
Crystal oscillator settling
time (reset)
Crystal oscillator settling time
(software standby)
6MHz
Symbol Min Max
tRESS
200 –
6.0
–
tRESW
tMDS
4.0
–
8MHz
10MHz
Measurement
Min Max Min Max Unit Conditions
200 –
200 –
ns See figure 20-7
6.0
–
6.0 –
tcyc
4.0
–
4.0 –
tcyc
tNMIS
tNMIH
tIRQ0S
tIRQ1S
tIRQ1H
tNMIW
150
10
50
50
10
200
–
–
–
–
–
–
150
10
50
50
10
200
–
–
–
–
–
–
150
10
50
50
10
200
–
–
–
–
–
–
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
See figure 20-8
tOSC1
20
–
20
–
20
–
ms
See figure 20-12
tOSC2
10
–
10
–
10
–
ms
See figure 18-1
324
See figure 20-9
Table 20-6 Timing Conditions of On-Chip Supporting Modules
Conditions: VCC = 5.0V ±10%, AVCC = 5.0V ±10%, ø = 0.5 to 10MHz, VSS = 0V
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
6MHz
Item
FRT
TMR
8MHz
10MHz
Measurement
Symbol Min Max
Min Max
Min Max Unit Conditions
Timer output delay time
tFTOD
–
100
–
100
–
100
ns
Timer input setup time
tFTIS
50
–
50
–
50
–
ns
Timer clock input setup time
tFTCS
50
–
50
–
50
–
ns
Timer clock pulse width
tFTCWL,
See figure 20-14
See figure 20-15
tFTCWH
1.5
–
1.5
–
1.5
–
tcyc
Timer output delay time
tTMOD
–
100
–
100
–
100
ns
See figure 20-16
Timer clock input setup time
tTMCS
50
–
50
–
50
–
ns
See figure 20-17
Timer clock pulse width
tTMCWL,
tcyc
tTMCWH
1.5
–
1.5
–
1.5
–
Timer reset input setup time
tTMRS
50
–
50
–
50
–
ns
See figure 20-18
PWM
Timer output delay time
tPWOD
–
100
–
100
–
100
ns
See figure 20-19
SCI
Input clock cycle
tScyc
2
–
2
–
2
–
tcyc
See figure 20-20
(Async)
(Sync)
Port
4
–
4
–
4
–
tcyc
Input clock pulse width
tSCKW
0.4
0.6
0.4
0.6
0.4
0.6
tScyc
Transmit data delay time (Sync)
tTXD
–
100
–
100
–
100
ns
Receive data setup time (Sync)
tRXS
100
–
100
–
100 –
ns
Receive data hold time
tRXH
100
–
100
–
100 –
ns
Output data delay time
(Sync)
tPWD
–
100
–
100
–
100
ns
Input data setup time
tPRS
50
–
50
–
50
–
ns
Input data hold time
tPRH
50
–
50
–
50
–
ns
See figure 20-21
See figure 20-13
• Measurement Conditions for AC Characteristics
5V
RL
H8/532
output pin
C
CC ==90
P2,P2,
P3,P3,
P4,P4,
P5, P6
90pF:
pF:P1,
P1,
P5, P6
==30
P9P9
30pF:
pF:P7,
P7,
RRL L= 2.4
kΩk
= 2.4
RRHH= =1212
kΩk
Input/output
timing
reference
levelslevels
Input/output
timing
reference
Low:
0.8V
Low: 0.8V
High:
2.0V
High:2.0V
RH
Figure 20-3 Output Load Circuit
325
20.2.3 A/D Converter Characteristics
Table 20-7 lists the characteristics of the on-chip A/D converter.
Table 20-7 A/D Converter Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 5.0V ±10%, AVCC = 5.0V ±10%, VSS = AVSS = 0V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
Item
Resolution
Conversion time
Analog input capacitance
Allowable signal-source impedance
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
Full-scale error
Quantizing error
Absolute accuracy
Min
10
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
6MHz
Typ
10
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Max
10
23.0
20
10
±2.0
±2.0
±2.0
±0.5
±2.5
Min
10
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8MHz
Typ
10
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Max
10
17.25
20
10
±2.0
±2.0
±2.0
±0.5
±2.5
10MHz
Min Typ Max
10 10 10
— — 13.8
— — 20
— — 10
— — ±2.0
— — ±2.0
— — ±2.0
— — ±0.5
— — ±2.5
20.3 MCU Operational Timing
This section provides the following timing charts:
20.3.1
20.3.2
20.3.3
20.3.4
20.3.5
20.3.6
20.3.7
20.3.8
Bus timing
Control Signal Timing
Clock Timing
I/O Port Timing
16-Bit Free-Running Timer Timing
8-Bit Timer Timing
Pulse Width Modulation Timer Timing
Serial Communication InterfaceTiming
Figures 20-4 to 20-6
Figures 20-7 to 20-10
Figures 20-11 and 20-12
Figure 20-13
Figures 20-14 and 20-15
Figures 20-16 to 20-18
Figure 20-19
Figure 20-20 and 20-21
326
Unit
Bits
µs
pF
kΩ
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
20.3.1 Bus Timing
1. Basic Bus Cycle (without Wait States) in Expanded Modes
T1
t cyc
T2
T3
t CL
t CH
ø
t Cf
t AD
t Cr
A19 to A0
R/W
t DSD1
t AS1
t DSD3
t AH
AS,
DS (Read),
RD
t RDS
t ACC
D7 to D0
(Read)
t RDH
t DSD2
t DSD3
t AS2
t DSWW
t AH
DS (Write),
WR
t WDD
t WDH
t WDS
D7 to D0
(Write)
Figure 20-4 Basic Bus Cycle (without Wait States) in Expanded Modes
327
2. Basic Bus Cycle (with 1 Wait State) in Expanded Modes
T1
T2
TW
T3
ø
A19 to A0
R/W
DS (Read),
RD
D7 to D0
(Read)
DS (Write),
WR
D7 to D0
(Write)
t WTS
t WTH
t WTS
t WTH
WAIT
Figure 20-5 Basic Bus Cycle (with 1 Wait State) in Expanded Modes
328
3. Bus Cycle Synchronized with E Clock
ø
t ED
E
A19 to A0
R/W
t DSD3
t AH
AS,
DS (Read),
t RDS
RD
t RDHE
D7 to D0 (Read)
t DSD3
t AH
DS (Write),
WR
t WDHE
D7 to D0 (Write)
Figure 20-6 Bus Cycle Synchronized with E Clock
329
20.3.2 Control Signal Timing
1. Reset Input Timing
ø
t RESS
t RESS
RES
t MDS
t RESW
MD2 to MD 0
Figure 20-7 Reset Input Timing
2. Interrupt Input Timing
ø
t NMIS
t NMIH
t IRQ1S
t IRQ1H
NMI
IRQ1
t IRQ0S
IRQ0
Figure 20-8 Interrupt Input Timing
3. NMI Pulse Width
NMI
t NMIW
Figure 20-9 NMI Pulse Width (for Recovery from Software Standby Mode)
330
4. Bus Release State Timing
ø
t BRQS
t BRQS
BREQ
(Input)
t BACD1
t BACD2
BACK
(Output)
t BZD
t AD
A19 to A0 ,
R/W, DS,
RD, WR,
AS
Figure 20-10 Bus Release State Timing
20.3.3 Clock Timing
1. E Clock Timing
ø
tED
tED
E
tEf
tEr
Figure 20-11 E Clock Timing
331
RES
STBY
VCC
ø
tOSC1
tOSC1
2. Clock Oscillator Stabilization Timing
Figure 20-12 Clock Oscillator Stabilization Timing
332
20.3.4 I/O Port Timing
Port read/write cycle
T1
T2
T3
ø
t PRS
Port 1
to
(Input)
port 9
t PRH
t PWD
Port 1*
to
(Output)
port 9
* Except P1 1 , P10, and P8 7 to P8 0
Figure 20-13 I/O Port Input/Output Timing
333
20.3.5 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Timing
1. Free-Running Timer Input/Output Timing
ø
Free-running
timer counter
Compare-match
t FTOD
FTOA 1 , FTOB 1 ,
FTOA 2 , FTOB 2 ,
FTOA 3 , FTOB 3
t FTIS
FTI 1, FTI 2, FTI 3
Figure 20-14 Free-Running Timer Input/Output Timing
2. External Clock Input Timing for Free-Running Timers
ø
t FTCS
FTCI 1 ,
FTCI 2 ,
FTCI 3
t FTCWL
t FTCWH
Figure 20-15 External Clock Input Timing for Free-Running Timers
334
20.3.6 8-Bit Timer Timing
1. 8-Bit Timer Output Timing
ø
Timer
counter
Compare-match
t TMOD
TMO
Figure 20-16 8-Bit Timer Output Timing
2. 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing
ø
t TMCS
t TMCS
TMCI
t TMCWL
t TMCWH
Figure 20-17 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing
3. 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing
ø
t TMRS
TMRI
Timer
counter
n
H’00
Figure 20-18 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing
335
20.3.7 Pulse Width Modulation Timer Timing
ø
Timer
counter
Compare-match
t PWOD
PW1 , PW2 ,
PW3
Figure 20-19 PWM Timer Output Timing
20.3.8 Serial Communication Interface Timing
t SCKW
t Scyc
Figure 20-20 SCI Input Clock Timing
t Scyc
Serial clock
t rXD
Transmit
data
t RXS
t RXH
Receive
data
Figure 20-21 SCI Input/Output Timing (Synchronous Mode)
336
Appendix A Instructions
A.1 Instruction Set
Operation Notation
Rd
Rs
Rn
(EAd)
(EAs)
CCR
N
Z
V
C
CR
PC
CP
SP
General register (destination operand)
General register (source operand)
General register
Destination operand
Source operand
Condition code register
N (Negative) flag in CCR
Z (Zero) flag in CCR
V (Overflow) flag in CCR
C (Carry) flag in CCR
Control register
Program counter
Code page register
Stack pointer
Condition Code Notation
↕
0
1
—
∆
Changed after instruction execution
Cleared to 0
Set to 1
Value before operation is retained
Changed depending on condition
337
FP
#IMM
disp
+
–
×
÷
∧
∨
⊕
→
↔
¬
Frame pointer
Immediate data
Displacement
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Divide
Logical AND
Logical OR
Logical exclusive OR
Move
Swap
Logical NOT
Size
Mnemonic
Operation
B/W
Data
MOV: G (EAs) → Rd
B/W
transfer
Rs
→ (EAd)
#IMM → (EAd)
MOV: E
#IMM → Rd
(short format)
B
MOV: F
@ (d: 8, FP) → Rd
B/W
Rs → @ (d: 8, FP)(short format)
MOV: I
#IMM → Rd
(short format)
W
MOV: L
(@aa: 8) → Rd
(short format)
B/W
MOV: S
Rs
→ (@aa: 8) (short format)
B/W
LDM
@ SP + → Rn (register list)
W
STM
Rn (register list) → @ – SP
W
XCH
Rs ←→ Rd
W
SWAP
Rd (upper byte) ←→ Rd (lower byte)
B
MOVTPE Rs → (EAd) Synchronized with E clock B
MOVFPE (EAs) → Rd Synchronized with E clock B
ArithADD: G
Rd + (EAs) → Rd
B/W
metic
ADD: Q
(EAd) + #IMM → (EAd)
B/W
opera(#IMM = ±1, ±2)
(short format)
tions
ADDS
Rd + (EAs) → Rd
B/W
(Rd is always word size)
ADDX
Rd + (EAs) + C → Rd
B/W
B
DADD
(Rd)10 + (Rs)10 + C → (Rd)10
SUB
Rd – (EAs) → Rd
B/W
SUBS
Rd – (EAs) → Rd
B/W
SUBX
Rd – (EAs) – C → Rd
B/W
DSUB
(Rd)10 – (Rs)10 – C → (Rd)10
B
MULXU
Rd × (EAs) → Rd 8 × 8
B/W
(Unsigned)
16 × 16
DIVXU
Rd ÷ (EAs) → Rd 16 ÷ 8
B/W
(Unsigned)
32 ÷ 16
CMP: G
Rd – (EAs), Set CCR
B/W
(EAd) – #IMM, Set CCR
CMP: E
Rd – #IMM, Set CCR (short format)
B
CMP: I
Rd – #IMM, Set CCR (short format)
W
338
N
↕
CCR Bit
Z V
↕ 0
C
—
↕
↕
↕
↕
0
0
—
—
↕
↕
↕
—
—
—
↕
—
—
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
—
—
—
↕
—
—
↕
↕
0
0
0
—
—
—
0
—
—
↕
↕
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
↕
↕
—
— —
—
↕
—
↕
—
↕
—
↕
↕
↕
↕
—
↕
↕
↕
↕
—
↕
—
↕
—
0
↕
↕
↕
—
↕
↕
0
↕
↕
↕
0
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
Arithmetic
operations
Shift
operations
Mnemonic
Operation
EXTS
(< Bit 7 > of < Rd >)
→ (< Bit 15 to 8 > of < Rd >)
EXTU
0 → (<Bit 15 to 8 > of < Rd >)
TST
(EAd) – 0, Set CCR
NEG
0 – (EAd) → (EAd)
CLR
0 → (EAd)
TAS
(EAd) – 0, Set CCR
(1)2 → (< Bit 7 > of < EAd >)
SHAL
MSB
LSB
C
SHAR
Size
B/W
B
N
↕
CCR Bit
Z V
↕
0
B
B/W
B/W
B/W
B
0
↕
↕
0
↕
↕
↕
↕
1
↕
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
↕
0
0
B/W
↕
↕
↕
↕
B/W
↕
↕
0
↕
B/W
↕
↕
0
↕
B/W
0
↕
0
↕
B/W
↕
↕
0
↕
B/W
↕
↕
0
↕
B/W
↕
↕
0
↕
B/W
↕
↕
0
↕
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
↕
↕
↕
↕
—
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
B/W
—
↕
—
—
B/W
B/W
—
—
↕
↕
—
—
—
—
C
0
0
MSB
LSB
C
SHLL
MSB
LSB
C
SHLR
0
MSB
LSB
0
ROTL
C
ROTR
C
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
C
ROTXL
ROTXR
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
C
C
Logic
operations
AND
OR
XOR
NOT
BSET
Bit
manipulations BCLR
BTST
BNOT
Rd ∧ (EAs) → Rd
Rd ∨ (EAs) → Rd
Rd ⊕ (EAs) → Rd
¬ (EAd) → (EAd)
¬ (< Bit number > of < EAd >) → Z
1 → (< Bit number > of < EAd >)
¬ (< Bit number > of < EAd >) → Z
0 → (< Bit number > of < EAd >)
¬ (< Bit number > of < EAd >) → Z
¬ (< Bit number > of < EAd >) → Z
→ (< Bit number > of < EAd >)
339
Mnemonic
Operation
Branch- Bcc
If condition is true then
ing
PC + disp → PC
instrucelse next;
Mnemonic
Description
tions
BRA
BRN
BHI
BLS
Bcc
BCS
BNE
BEQ
BVC
BVS
BPL
BMI
BGE
BLT
BGT
BLE
(BT)
(BF)
(BHS)
(BLO)
Always (True)
Never (False)
HIgh
Low or Same
Carry Clear (High or Same)
Carry Set (LOw)
Not Equal
EQual
oVerflow Clear
oVerflow Set
PLus
MInus
Greater or Equal
Less Than
Greater Than
Less or Equal
Effective address → PC
Effective address → CP, PC
PC → @ – SP
PC + disp → PC
JSR
PC → @ – SP
Effective address → PC
PJSR
PC → @ – SP
CP → @ – SP
Effective address → CP, PC
RTS
@ SP + → PC
PRTS
@ SP + → CP
@ SP + → PC
RTD
@ SP + → PC
SP + #IMM → SP
PRTD
@ SP + → CP
@ SP + → PC
SP + #IMM → SP
SCB
If condition is true then next;
SCB/F
else Rn – 1 → Rn;
SCB/NE If Rn = –1 then next;
SCB/EQ else PC + disp → PC;
JMP
PJMP
BSR
Mnemonic
SCB/F
SCB/NE
SCB/EQ
Description
Not Equal
Equal
Condition
False
Z=0
Z=1
340
Size
B/W
—
N
—
CCR Bit
Z V C
— — —
Condition
True
False
C∨Z=0
C∨Z=0
C=0
C=1
Z=0
Z=1
V=0
V=1
N=0
N=1
N⊕V=0
N⊕V=1
Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 0
Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
— — —
— — —
— — —
—
—
— —
—
—
—
— —
—
—
—
—
—
— — —
— — —
—
—
— —
—
—
—
— —
—
—
—
— —
—
Mnemonic
Operation
System TRAPA
PC → @ – SP
control
(If MAX MODE CP → @ – SP)
SR → @ – SP
(If MAX MODE < vector > → CP)
< vector > → PC
TRAP/VS If V bit = “1” then TRAP
else next;
RTE
@ SP + → SR
(If MAX MODE @ SP + → CP)
@ SP + → PC
LINK
FP (R6) → @ – SP
SP → FP (R6)
SP + #IMM → SP
UNLK
FP (R6) → SP
@SP + → FP
Normal running mode → power-down state
SLEEP
LDC
(EAs) → CR
STC
CR → (EAd)
ANDC
CR ∧ #IMM → CR
ORC
CR ∨ #IMM → CR
XORC
CR ⊕ #IMM → CR
NOP
PC + 1 → PC
* Depends on the CR.
341
Size
B/W
—
N
—
CCR Bit
Z V
— —
—
—
—
—
—
—
↕
↕
↕
↕
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B/W*
B/W*
B/W*
B/W*
B/W*
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
C
—
A.2 Instruction Codes
Table A-1 shows the machine-language coding of each instruction.
• How to read table A-1 (a) to (d)
The general operand format consists of an effective address (EA) field and operation-code (OP)
field specified in the following order.
EA field
1
2
Op field
3
4
5
Bytes 2, 3, 5, 6 are not present in all instructions.
342
6
disp (H)
address
address (H)
data
data (H)
1 1 1 0 Sz r r r
1 1 1 1 Sz r r r
1 0 1 1 Sz r r r
1 1 0 0 Sz r r r
0 0 0 0 Sz 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 Sz 1 0 1
0000 0 100
0000 1 100
@(d:8, Rn)
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn
@Rn+
@aa:8
@aa:16
#xx:8
#xx:16
data (L)
disp
1 1 0 1 Sz r r r
@Rn
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
3
MOV:G.W <EAs >, Rd
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
MOV:G.B Rs , <EA d >
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
MOV:G.W Rs , <EAd >
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
1 0 1 0 Sz r r r
1
Addressing mode
Instruction
address (L)
disp (L)
3
2
2
Rn
Operation code (EA)
MOV:G.B <EAs >, Rd
Instruction
Byte length of instruction
Operation code (OP)
4
4 1 0 0 0 0 r d r d rd
3
1 0 0 1 0 r s r s rs
4 1 0 0 1 0 r s r s rs
Shading indicates addressing
modes not available for this
instruction.
Some instructions have a special format in which the operation code comes first.
The following notation is used in the tables.
• Sz:
5
1 0 0 0 0 r d r d rd
Operand size (byte or word)
Byte: Sz = 0
Word: Sz = 1
343
6
• rrr : General register number field
rrr
Sz = 0 (Byte)
15
Sz = 1 (Word)
8 7
0
15
0
000
Not used
R0
R0
001
Not used
R1
R1
010
Not used
R2
R2
011
Not used
R3
R3
100
Not used
R4
R4
101
Not used
R5
R5
110
Not used
R6
R6
111
Not used
R7
R7
• ccc : Control register number field
ccc
Sz = 0 (Byte)
000
Sz = 1 (Word)
15
(Not allowed*)
7
0
SR
0
001
CCR
(Not allowed)
010
(Not allowed)
(Not allowed)
011
BR
(Not allowed)
100
EP
(Not allowed)
101
DP
(Not allowed)
110
(Not allowed)
(Not allowed)
111
TP
(Not allowed)
* “Disallowed” means that this combination of bits must not be specified. Specifying a disallowed
combination may cause abnormal results.
344
• register list: A byte in which bits indicate general registers as follows
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
R0
• #VEC: Four bits designating a vector number from 0 to 15. The vector numbers correspond to
addresses of entries in the exception vector table as follows:
#VEC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Vector Address
Minimum Mode
Maximum Mode
H'0020 – H'0021
H'0040 – H'0043
H'0022 – H'0023
H'0044 – H'0047
H'0024 – H'0025
H'0048 – H'004B
H'0026 – H'0027
H'004C – H'004F
H'0028 – H'0029
H'0050 – H'0053
H'002A – H'002B H'0054 – H'0057
H'002C – H'002D H'0058 – H'005B
H'002E – H'002F H'005C – H'005F
#VEC
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Vector Address
Minimum Mode
Maximum Mode
H'0030 – H'0031
H'0060 – H'0063
H'0032 – H'0033
H'0064 – H'0067
H'0034 – H'0035
H'0068 – H'006B
H'0036 – H'0037
H'006C – H'006F
H'0038 – H'0039
H'0070 – H'0073
H'003A – H'003B H'0074 – H'0077
H'003C – H'003D H'0078 – H'007B
H'003E – H'003F H'007C – H'007F
• Examples of machine-language coding
Example 1: ADD:G.B @R0, R1
Table A-1 (a)
Machine code
EA Field
OP Field
1101Szrrr
00100rdrdrd
11010000
00100 0 0 1
H'D021
Example 2: ADD:G.W @H'11:8, R1
Table A-1 (a)
Machine code
EA Field
0000Sz101
00010001
0000 1 101
00010001
H'0D1121
OP Field
00100rdrdrd
00100 0 0 1
345
data (L)
1 1 0 0 Sz r r r
0 0 0 0 Sz 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 Sz 1 0 1
0000 0 100
0000 1 100
@Rn+
@aa:8
@aa:16
#xx:8
#xx:16
data (H)
1 0 1 1 Sz r r r
@–Rn
data
1 1 1 1 Sz r r r
@(d:16, Rn)
address (H)
address
disp (L)
1 1 1 0 Sz r r r
@(d:8, Rn)
disp
1 1 0 1 Sz r r r
@Rn
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
3
MOV:G.W <EAs >, Rd
2
Addressing mode
Data transfer instruction
disp (H)
3
2
1 0 1 0 Sz r r r
Rn
Operation code (EA)
2
1
MOV:G.B <EAs >, Rd
Instruction
Arithmetic operation instruction
address (L)
Table A-1 (a) Machine Language Coding [General Format]
Operation code (OP)
4
5
6
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 data (H)
data (L)
1 0 0 0 0 rd rd rd
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
MOV:G.B Rs , <EA d >
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
1 0 0 1 0 rs rs rs
MOV:G.W Rs , <EAd >
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
4 1 0 0 1 0 rs rs rs
MOV:G.B #xx:8, <EA d>
3
4
5
3
3
4
5
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 data
MOV:G.W #xx:8, <EA d >
3
4
5
3
3
4
5
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 data
MOV:G.W #xx:16, <EA d >
4
5
6
4
4
5
6
LDM.W @SP+,
4 1 0 0 0 0 rd rd rd
2
<register list>
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 register list
2
STM.W <register list>,@–SP
XCH.W Rs ,Rd
2
SWAP.B Rd
2
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 register list
1 0 0 1 0 rd rd rd
00010000
MOVTPE.B Rs , <EA d>
3
4
5
3
3
4
5
MOVTPE.B <EA s >, R d
3
4
5
3
3
4
5
ADD:G.B <EA s>, Rd
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
ADD:G.W <EA s >, Rd
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 rs rs rs
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 rd rd rd
3
0 0 1 0 0 rd rd rd
4 0 0 1 0 0 rd rd rd
ADD:Q.B #1, <EA d>*
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00001000
ADD:Q.W #1, <EAd >*
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00001000
ADD:Q.B #2, <EA d >*
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00001001
ADD:Q.W #2, <EAd >*
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00001001
ADD:Q.B #-1, <EA d >*
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00001100
ADD:Q.W #-1, <EA d>*
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00001100
ADD:Q.B #-2, <EA d> *
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00001101
ADD:Q.W #-2, <EA d >*
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
ADDS.B <EA s >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
ADDS.W <EA s >, Rd
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
ADDX.B <EA s >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
ADDX.W <EA s >, Rd
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00001101
3
0 0 1 0 1 rd rd rd
4 0 0 1 0 1 rd rd rd
3
1 0 1 0 0 rd rd rd
4 1 0 1 0 0 rd rd rd
Note: * Short format instruction
346
disp (H)
address
address (H)
data
data (H)
1 1 1 0 Sz r r r
1 1 1 1 Sz r r r
1 0 1 1 Sz r r r
1 1 0 0 Sz r r r
0 0 0 0 Sz 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 Sz 1 0 1
0000 0 100
0000 1 100
@(d:8, Rn)
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn
@Rn+
@aa:8
@aa:16
#xx:8
#xx:16
data (L)
disp (L)
disp
1 1 0 1 Sz r r r
@Rn
3
2
1 0 1 0 Sz r r r
Rn
Operation code (EA)
Addressing mode
1
address (L)
Table A-1 (a) Machine Language Coding [General Format] (cont)
Instruction
5
6
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 rd rd rd
DADD.B Rs ,Rd
Arithmetic operation instruction
Operation code (OP)
4
3
SUB.B <EA s >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
SUB.W <EA s >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
0 0 1 1 0 rd rd rd
SUBS.B <EA s>, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
SUBS.W <EA s >,R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
SUBX.B <EA s>, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
SUBX.W <EA s >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
DSUB.B R s , R d
3
MULXU.B <EA s >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
MULXU.X <EA s >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
DIVXU.B <EA s >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
DIVXU.W <EA s >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
CMP:G.B <EA s>, R d
2
3
4
5
3
3
4
5
CMP:G.W <EAs >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
CMP:G.B #xx, <EAd >
3
4
5
3
3
4
5
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 data
CMP:G.W #xx, <EA d >
4
5
6
4
4
5
6
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 data (H)
4 0 0 1 1 0 rd rd rd
3
0 0 1 1 1 rd rd rd
4 0 0 1 1 1 rd rd rd
3
1 0 1 1 0 rd rd rd
4 1 0 1 1 0 rd rd rd
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 rd rd rd
3
1 0 1 0 1 rd rd rd
4 1 0 1 0 1 rd rd rd
3
1 0 1 1 1 rd rd rd
4 1 0 1 1 1 rd rd rd
3
0 1 1 1 0 rd rd rd
4 0 1 1 1 0 rd rd rd
EXTS.B R d
2
00010001
EXTU.B R d
2
TST.B <EAd >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00010110
TST.W <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00010110
NEG.B <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00010100
NEG.W <EAd >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00010100
CLR.B <EAd >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00010011
CLR.W <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00010011
TAS.B <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00010111
00010010
347
data (L)
Shift instruction
Logic operation instruction
disp (H)
address
address (H)
data
data (H)
1 1 1 0 Sz r r r
1 1 1 1 Sz r r r
1 0 1 1 Sz r r r
1 1 0 0 Sz r r r
0 0 0 0 Sz 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 Sz 1 0 1
0000 0 100
0000 1 100
@(d:8, Rn)
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn
@Rn+
@aa:8
@aa:16
#xx:8
#xx:16
data (L)
disp (L)
disp
1 1 0 1 Sz r r r
@Rn
3
3
4
2
2
3
4
2
1 0 1 0 Sz r r r
Rn
2
Addressing mode
1
Operation code (EA)
2
Instruction
SHAL.B <EA d >
address (L)
Table A-1 (a) Machine Language Coding [General Format] (cont)
Operation code (OP)
4
00011000
SHAL.W <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011000
SHAR.B <EAd >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011001
SHAR.W <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011001
SHLL.B <EA d>
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011010
SHLL.W <EAd >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011010
SHLR.B <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011011
SHLR.W <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011011
ROTL.B <EAd >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011100
ROTL.W <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011100
ROTR.B <EA d>
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011101
ROTR.W <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011101
ROTXL.B <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011110
ROTXL.W <EA d>
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011110
ROTXR.B <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00011111
ROTXR.W <EAd >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
AND.B <EA s >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
AND.W <EA s >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
OR.B.B <EA s >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
OR.B.W <EA s >, Rd
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
XOR.B <EA s >, Rd
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
XOR.W <EAs >, R d
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
NOT.B <EAd >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00010101
NOT.W <EA d>
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
00010101
348
00011111
3
0 1 0 1 0 rd rd rd
4 0 1 0 1 0 rd rd rd
3
0 1 0 0 0 rd rd rd
4 0 1 0 0 0 rd rd rd
3
0 1 1 0 0 rd rd rd
4 0 1 1 0 0 rd rd rd
5
6
Bit manipulate instruction
System control instruction
disp (H)
address
address (H)
data
data (H)
1 1 1 0 Sz r r r
1 1 1 1 Sz r r r
1 0 1 1 Sz r r r
1 1 0 0 Sz r r r
0 0 0 0 Sz 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 Sz 1 0 1
0000 0 100
0000 1 100
@(d:8, Rn)
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn
@Rn+
@aa:8
@aa:16
#xx:8
#xx:16
data (L)
disp (L)
disp
1 1 0 1 Sz r r r
@Rn
3
3
4
2
2
3
4
2
1 0 1 0 Sz r r r
Rn
2
Addressing mode
1
Operation code (EA)
2
Instruction
BSET.B #xx, <EA d >
address (L)
Table A-1 (a) Machine Language Coding [General Format] (cont)
Operation code (OP)
4
1 1 0 0 (data)
BSET.W #xx, <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
1 1 0 0 (data)
BSET.B R s , <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
0 1 0 0 1 rs rs rs
BSET.W Rs , <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
0 1 0 0 1 rs rs rs
BCLR.B #xx, <EAd >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
1 1 0 1 (data)
BCLR.W #xx, <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
1 1 0 1 (data)
BCLR.B R s , <EA d>
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
0 1 0 1 1 rs rs rs
BCLR.W Rs , <EAd >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
0 1 0 1 1 rs rs rs
BTST.B #xx, <EAd >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
1 1 1 1 (data)
BTST.W #xx, <EA d>
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
1 1 1 1 (data)
BTST.B Rs , <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
0 1 1 1 1 rs rs rs
BTST.W Rs , <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
0 1 1 1 1 rs rs rs
BNOT.B #xx, <EAd >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
1 1 1 0 (data)
BNOT.W #xx, <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
1 1 1 0 (data)
BNOT.B R s , <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
0 1 1 0 1 rs rs rs
BNOT.W Rs , <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
LDC.B <EAs >, CR
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
LDC.W <EA s >, CR
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
4 10001ccc
STC.B CR, <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
10011ccc
STC.W CR, <EA d >
2
2
3
4
2
2
3
4
0 1 1 0 1 rs rs rs
3
10011ccc
3
ANDC.B #xx:8, CR
10001ccc
01011ccc
4 01011ccc
ANDC.W #xx:16, CR
3
ORC.B #xx:8, CR
01001ccc
4 01001ccc
ORC.W #xx:16, CR
XORC.B #xx:8, CR
3
01101ccc
4 01101ccc
XORC.W #xx:16, CR
349
5
6
Table A-1 (b) Machine Language Coding [Special Format: Short Format]
Instruction
Byte
MOV:E,B #xx:8,Rd
MOV:I.W #xx:16,Rd
MOV:L.B @aa:8,Rd
MOV:L.W @aa:8,Rd
MOV:S.B Rs,@aa:8
MOV:S.W Rs,@aa:8
MOV:F.B @(d:8,R6),Rd
MOV:F.W @(d:8,R6),Rd
MOV:F.B Rs @(d:8,R6)
MOV:F.W Rs,@(d:8,R6)
CMP:E.B #xx:8,Rd
CMP:I.W #xx:16,Rd
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
1
01010rdrdrd
01011rdrdrd
01100rdrdrd
01101rdrdrd
01110rsrsrs
01111rsrsrs
10000rdrdrd
10001rdrdrd
10010rsrsrs
10011rsrsrs
01000rdrdrd
01001rdrdrd
350
Operation code
2
3
data
data (H)
address (L)
address (L)
address (L)
address (L)
disp
disp
disp
disp
data
data (H)
data (L)
data (L)
4
Table A-1 (c) Machine Language Coding [Special Format: Branch Instruction]
Instruction
Bcc d:8
Bcc d:16
BRA (BT)
BRN (BF)
BHI
BLS
BCC (BHS)
BCS (BLO)
BNE
BEQ
BVC
BVS
BPL
BMI
BGE
BLT
BGT
BLE
BRA (BT)
BRN (BF)
BHI
BLS
BCC (BHS)
BCS (BLO)
BNE
BEQ
BVC
BVS
BPL
BMI
BGE
BLT
BGT
BLE
JMP @Rn
JMP @aa:16
Byte
2
3
2
3
1
00100000
00100001
00100010
00100011
00100100
00100101
00100110
00100111
00101000
00101001
00101010
00101011
00101100
00101101
00101110
00101111
00110000
00110001
00110010
00110011
00110100
00110101
00110110
00110111
00111000
00111001
00111010
00111011
00111100
00111101
00111110
00111111
00010001
00010000
351
Operation code
2
3
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
11010rrr
address (H)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
address (L)
4
Table A-1 (c) Machine Language Coding [Special Format: Branch Instruction]
Instruction
JMP @(d:8,Rn)
JMP @(d:16,Rn)
BSR d:8
BSR d:16
JSR @Rn
JSR @aa:16
JSR @(d:8,Rn)
JSR @(d:16,Rn)
RTS
RTD #xx:8
RTD #xx:16
SCB/cc Rn,disp SCB/F
SCB/NE
SCB/EQ
PJMP @aa:24
PJMP @Rn
PJSR @aa:24
PJSR @Rn
PRTS
PRTD #xx:8
PRTD #xx:16
Byte
3
4
2
3
2
3
3
4
1
2
3
3
4
2
4
2
2
3
4
1
00010001
00010001
00001110
00011110
00010001
00011000
00010001
00010001
00011001
00010100
00011100
00000001
00000110
00000111
00010011
00010001
00000011
00010001
00010001
00010001
00010001
Operation code
2
3
11100rrr
disp
11110rrr
disp (H)
disp
disp (H)
disp (L)
11011rrr
address (H)
address (L)
11101rrr
disp
11111rrr
disp (H)
data
data (H)
10111rrr
10111rrr
10111rrr
page
11000rrr
page
11001rrr
00011001
00010100
00011100
4
disp (L)
disp (L)
data (L)
disp
disp
disp
address (H)
address (L)
address (H)
address (L)
data
data (H)
data (L)
Table A-1 (d) Machine Language Coding [Special Format: System Control Instructions]
Instruction
TRAPA #xx
TRAP/VS
RTE
LINK FP,#xx:8
LINK FP,#xx:16
UNLK FP
SLEEP
NOP
Byte
2
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
00001000
00001001
00001010
00010111
00011111
00001111
00011010
00000000
352
Operation code
2
3
0001 #VEC
data
data (H)
data (L)
4
353
R0
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
3
BRA
d:8
BRA
d:16
JMP
2
1
0
0
NOP
LO
R1
BRN
BHI
BHI
STM
2
LDM
BLS
BLS
PJMP
@aa:24
3
PJSR
@aa:24
Bcc
Bcc
4
#xx:8
See
Tbl.
A-5
RTD
#xx:8
CMP:E #xx:8, Rn
R2
R3
R4
MOV:E #xx:8, Rn
MOV:L.B @aa:8, Rn
MOV:S.B Rn, @aa:8
MOV:F.B @ (d:8, R6), Rn
MOV:F.B Rn, @ (d:8, R6)
Rn
@–Rn
@Rn+
@Rn
@(d:8,Rn)
@(d:16,Rn)
1
SCB/F
See
Tbl.
A-6
See
Tbl.
A-6
*
BRN
(Byte)
(Byte)
(Byte)
(Byte)
(Byte)
(Byte)
R5
BCS
5
#aa:8.B
See
Tbl.
A-4
@aa:16.B
See
Tbl.
A-4
BCS
R7
BEQ
BEQ
R0
BVC
BVC
R1
BVS
BVS
BPL
BPL
SLEEP
A
RTE
BMI
BMI
B
BGE
BLT
C
D
#xx:16 @aa:8.W
See
See
Tbl.
Tbl.
A-5
A-4
@aa:16.W
RTD
#xx:16 See
Tbl.
A-4
BLT
BGE
CMP:I #xx:16, Rn
R2
R3
R4
R5
MOV:I #xx:16, Rn
MOV:L.W @aa:8, Rn
MOV:S.W Rn, @aa:8
MOV:F.W @ (:8, R6), Rn
MOV:F.W Rn, @ (d:8,R6)
(Word)
Rn
(Word)
@–Rn
(Word)
@Rn+
(Word)
@Rn
(Word)
@(d:8,Rn)
(Word)
@(d:16,Rn)
7
8
9
SCB/EQ TRAPA TRAP/V S
See
Tbl.
A-6
LINK
JSR
RTS
#xx:8
See Table A-3
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
R6
BNE
BNE
6
SCB/NE
See
Tbl.
A-6
Notes:
References to tables A-3 through A-6 indicate that the instruction code has one or more additional bytes, described in those tables.
* H'11 is the first operation code byte of the following instructions:
JMP,JSR, PJSR (register indirect addressing mode)
JMP,JSR (register indirect addressing mode with displacement)
PRTS, PRTD (all addressing modes)
HI
Table A-2 Operation Codes in Byte 1
R7
BLE
BLE
LINK
#xx:16
F
UNLK
See Table A-3
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
R6
BGT
BGT
BSR
d:16
E
BSR
d:8
Tables A-2 through A-6 are maps of the operation codes. Table A-2 shows the meaning of the first byte of the instruction code, indicating
both operation codes and addressing modes. Tables A-2 through A-6 indicate the meanings of operation codes in the second and third bytes.
A.3 Operation Code Map
354
0
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
b1
b2
R6
R7
ROTXR
DIVXU
SUBX
BTST (Immediate specification of bit number)
BNOT (Immediate specification of bit number)
BCLR (Immediate specification of bit number)
BSET (Immediate specification of bit number)
b6
b7
b8
b9
b10
MULXU
ADDX
b3
STC
b11
b12
b13
b14
b15
BTST (Register indirect specification of bit number)
XCH
b5
R5
ROTXL
F
BNOT (Register indirect specification of bit number)
LDC
b4
R4
ROTR
E
BCLR (Register indirect specification of bit number)
MOV
Note: * The operation code is in byte 3, given in table A-6.
b0
R3
ROTL
D
ADD:Q
#-2
CMP
ADDS
R2
SHLR
C
ADD:Q
#-1
7
R1
SHLL
B
XOR
R0
SHAR
A
6
R7
SHAL
9
ADD:Q
#2
8
ADD:Q
#1
AND
R6
TAS
7
5
R5
TST
6
BSET (Register indirect specification of bit number)
R4
ADD
R3
NOT
5
OR
NEG
4
CLR
3
4
R2
EXTU
2
SUBS
R1
EXTS
1
SUB
R0
SWAP
0
See Tbl.
A-6*
LO
3
2
1
HI
Table A-3 Operation Codes in Byte 2 (Axxx)
355
0
TAS
8
SHAL
ADD:Q
#1
9
ADDS
SHAR
ADD:Q
#2
SHLL
A
SHLR
B
C
ROTL
ADD:Q
#-1
D
ROTR
ADD:Q
#-2
ROTXL
E
Note: * The operation code is in byte 3, given in table A-6.
BTST (Immediate specification of bit number)
BNOT (Immediate specification of bit number)
E
F
BCLR (Immediate specification of bit number)
D
DIVXU
MULXU
BSET (Immediate specification of bit number)
SUBX
ADDX
STC
C
B
A
MOV (store)
MOV (load)
8
9
BTST (Register indirect specification of bit number)
7
LDC
BNOT (Register indirect specification of bit number)
XOR
CMP
6
BCLR (Register indirect specification of bit number)
AND
TST
7
MOV
#xx:16
5
NOT
6
MOV
#xx:8
BSET (Register indirect specification of bit number)
NEG
5
CMP
#xx:16
4
CMP
#xx:8
OR
ADD
CLR
3
4
2
SUBS
1
SUB
0
See Tbl.
A-6*
LO
3
2
1
HI
Table A-4 Operation Codes in Byte 2 (05xx, 15xx, 0Dxx, 1Dxx, Bxxx, Cxxx, Dxxx, Exxx, Fxxx)
ROTXR
F
356
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
HI
0
LO
0
1
2
SUBX
ADDX
MOV
CMP
XOR
AND
OR
SUB
ADD
3
4
5
Table A-5 Operation Codes in Byte 2 (04xx, 0Cxx)
6
7
8
9
A
DIVXU
MULXU
LDC
XORC
ANDC
ORC
SUBS
ADDS
B
C
D
E
F
357
0
PRTD
#xx:8
4
JMP @Rn
JMP @(d:8,Rn)
C
D
E
JMP @(d:16,Rn)
PJMP @Rn
F
DSUB
MOVFPE
R3
R4
3
B
R2
2
DADD
R1
1
A
R0
0
MOVTPE
LO
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
HI
R5
5
R6
6
R7
7
R0
8
R1
PRTS
9
Table A-6 Operation Codes in Bytes 2 and 3 (11xx, 01xx, 06xx, 07xx, xx00xx)
R3
B
C
R4
PRTD
#xx:16
JSR @(d:16,Rn)
JSR @(d:8,Rn)
JSR @Rn
PJSR @Rn
SCB
R2
A
R5
D
R6
E
R7
F
A.4 Instruction Execution Cycles
Tables A-7 (1) through (6) list the number of cycles required by the CPU to execute each
instruction in each addressing mode.
The meaning of the symbols in the tables is explained below. The values of I, J, and K are used to
calculate the number of execution cycles when off-chip memory is accessed for an instruction
fetch or operand read/write. The formulas for these calculations are given next.
A.4.1 Calculation of Instruction Execution States
Instruction Fetch
On-chip memory *1
Operand Read/Write
On-chip memory
On-chip memory module
or off-chip memory *2
Off-chip memory *2
On-chip memory
On-chip supporting module
or off-chip memory *2
Number of States
(Value given in table A-7) +
(Value in table A-8)
Byte
(Value in table A-7) +
(Value in table A-8) + I
Word
((Value in table A-7) +
(Value in table A-8) + 2I
(Value given in table A-7) + 2(J + K)
Byte
(Value in table A-7) +
I + 2(J + K)
Word
((Value in table A-7) +
2(I + J + K)
Notes: *1. When the instruction is fetched from on-chip memory (ROM or RAM), the number of
execution states varies by 1 or 2 depending of whether the instruction is stored at an
even or odd address. This difference must be noted when software is used for timing,
and in other cases in which the exact number of states is important.
*2. If wait states are inserted in access to external memory, add the necessary number of
cycles.
358
A.4.2 Tables of Instruction Execution Cycles
Tables A-7 (1) through (6) should be read as shown below:
J + K: Number of
instruction fetch cycles.
Addressing mode
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn
@Rn+
@aa:8
@aa:16
#xx:8
#xx:16
K
J
@(d:8, Rn)
1
@Rn
Instruction
Rn
I: Total number of bytes
written and read when
operand is in memory.
1
1
2
3
1
1
2
3
2
3
3
ADD.B
1
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
ADD.W
2
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
ADD:Q.B
2
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
ADD:Q.W
4
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
2
4
DADD
Shading in the I column means
the operand cannot be in memory.
4
Shading indicates addressing modes
that cannot be used with this instruction.
359
• Examples of Calculation of Number of States Required for Execution
(Example 1) Instruction fetch from on-chip memory
Operand
Read/Write
On-chip memory
or general register
Start
Addr.
Even
Odd
Assembler Notation
Address Code
Mnemonic
H'0100
H'D821 ADD @R0, R1
H'0101
H'D821 ADD @R0, R1
Table A-7 +
Table A-8
5+1
5+0
Number
of States
6
5
(Example 2) Instruction fetch from on-chip memory
Operand
Read/Write
On-chip supporting
module or external
memory (word)
Start
Addr.
Even
Odd
Assembler Notation
Address Code
Mnemonic
H'FC00
H'11D8 JSR @R0
H'FC01
H'11D8 JSR @R0
Table A-7 +
Table A-8 + 2I
9+0+2×2
9+1+2×2
Number
of States
13
14
Table A-7 +
2(J + K)
5 + 2 × (1 + 1)
Number
of States
9
(Example 3) Instruction fetch from external memory
Operand
Read/Write
On-chip memory or
general register
Assembler Notation
Address Code
Mnemonic
H'9002
H'D821 ADD @R0, R1
360
Table A-7 Instruction Execution Cycles (1)
@aa:8
@aa:16
#xx:8
#xx:16
2
3
1
1
2
3
2
3
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
3
ADD:G.W
2
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
ADD:Q.B
2
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
ADD:Q.W
4
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
ADDS.B
1
1
3
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
ADDS.W
2
1
3
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
ADDX.B
1
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
ADDX.W
2
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
AND.B
1
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
AND.W
2
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
1
K
J
@–Rn
1
1
Instruction
@Rn
1
ADD:G.B
Rn
@Rn+
@(d:16, Rn)
@(d:8, Rn)
Addressing mode
1
ANDC
3
4
3
4
3
4
5
BCLR.B
2
1
4
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
BCLR.W
4
1
4
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
BNOT.B
2
1
4
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
BNOT.W
4
1
4
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
BSET.B
2
1
4
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
BSET.W
4
1
4
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
BTST.B
1
1
3
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
BTST.W
2
1
3
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
CLR.B
1
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
CLR.W
2
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
CMP:G.B
1
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
CMP:G.W
2
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
CMP:G.B #XX:8, <EA>
1
2
6
6
7
6
7
6
7
CMP:G.B #XX:16, <EA>
2
3
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
361
4
9
3
4
Table A-7 Instruction Execution Cycles (2)
J
1
2
1
2
1
0
0
2
0
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
11
1
1
2
20
4
26
20
4
26
3
4
3
3
33
2
3
2
2
3
2
23 24
23
24
21
29
23
29 30 29 30
23 24 23 24
29
23
30
24
21
29
29
30 29 30
29
30
6
6
7
6
7
6
7
7
6
5
7
5
5
7
5
8
7
7
6
5
7
5
5
7
5
8
7
8
7
6
8
6
6
8
6
9
8
7
6
5
7
5
5
7
5
8
7
8
7
6
8
66
8
6
9
8
7
6
5
7
5
5
7
5
8
7
8
7
6
8
6
6
8
6
9
8
8
8
9
8
9
8
9
MOV:F.WRs,
Rd @(d:8,
, @(d:8,R6)
R6)
MOV:F.B
12
00
55
MOV:F.W Rs, @(d:8, R6)
2
0
5
2
3
3
3
3
23
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
21
4
3
2
4
2
2
#xx:16
#xx:16
@aa:8
@aa:8
@Rn+
@Rn+
1
2
23
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
2
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00
362
1
1
4
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
3
1
2
LDC.W
LDC.B
MOV.B
LDC.W
MOV.W
MOV.B
MOV.B #xx:8, <EA>
MOV.W
MOV.B #xx:16, <EA>
MOV.B #xx:8,<EA>
MOV:E #xx:8, Rd
MOV.W #xx:16,<EA>
MOV:I #xx:8, Rd
MOV:E #xx:8,Rd
MOV:L.B @aa:8, Rd
MOV:I #xx:16,Rd
MOV:L.W @aa:8, Rd
MOV:L.B @aa:8,Rd
MOV:S.B Rd ,@aa:8
MOV:L.W @aa:8,Rd
MOV:S.W Rd ,@aa:8
MOV:S.B Rs,@aa:8
MOV:F.B @(d:8, R6), Rd
MOV:S.W Rs,@aa:8
MOV:F.W @(d:8, R6), Rd
MOV:F.B @(d:8, R6), Rd
MOV:F.B @(d:8,
R d , @(d:8,
MOV:F.W
R6),R6)
Rd
2
3
@-Rn@–Rn
2
@(d:16,Rn)
@(d:16, Rn)
1
@(d:8,Rn)
@(d:8, Rn)
1
#xx:8 #xx:8
I
0K
Addressing mode
@aa:16
@aa:16
CMP:E #xx:8, R d
Instruction
CMP:I #xx:16, Rd
CMP:E #xx:8,Rd
DADD
CMP:I #xx:16,Rd
DIVXU.B
DADD
DIVXU.W
DIVXU.B
DSUB
DIVXU.W
EXTS
DSUB
EXTU
EXTS
LDC.B
EXTU
K
J
Rn
1
Instruction
@Rn @Rn
Rn
Addressing mode
24
28
4
4
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
55
5
6
6
4
4
2
2
5
28
3
3
Table A-7 Instruction Execution Cycles (3)
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn
@Rn+
@aa:8
@aa:16
#xx:8
#xx:16
K
J
@(d:8, Rn)
1
@Rn
Instruction
Rn
Addressing mode
1
1
2
3
1
1
2
3
2
3
MOVFPE *
0
2
13
|
20
13
|
20
14
|
21
13
|
20
14
|
21
13
|
20
14
|
21
MOVTPE *
0
2
13
|
20
13
|
20
14
|
21
13 14
|
|
20 21
13
|
20
14
|
21
MULXU.B
1
1
16
19
19
20
19 20
19
20
MULXU.W
2
1
23
25
25
26
25 26
25
26
NEG.B
2
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
NEG.W
4
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
NOT.B
2
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
NOT.W
4
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
OR.B
1
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
OR.W
2
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
8
8
1
ORC
25
3
4
5
ROTL.B
2
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
ROTL.W
4
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
ROTR.B
2
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
ROTR.W
4
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
ROTXL.B
2
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
ROTXL.W
4
1
3
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
ROTXR.B
2
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
ROTXR.W
4
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
SHAL.B
2
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
SHAL.W
4
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
SHAR.B
2
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
SHAR.W
4
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
SHLL.B
2
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
SHLL.W
4
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
* MOVFPE and MOVTPE are executed synchronous with the E-clock, so the number of execution
states will change depending on timing of the execution.
363
18
9
Table A-7 Instruction Execution Cycles (4)
@Rn+
@aa:8
@aa:16
#xx:8
#xx:16
1
2
3
1
1
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
SHLR.W
4
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
STC.B
1
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
1
Instruction
K
J
@Rn
1
SHLR.B
Rn
@–Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@(d:8, Rn)
Addressing mode
STC.W
2
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
SUB.B
1
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
SUB.W
2
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
SUBS.B
1
1
3
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
SUBS.W
2
1
3
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
SUBX.B
1
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
SUBX.W
2
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
1
3
SWAP
TAS
2
1
4
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
TST.B
1
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
TST.W
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
XCH
1
2
1
4
XOR.B
1
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
XOR.W
4
1
4
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
XORC
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
5
9
↵
1
3
*
Zero divide, minimum mode
DIVXU.B
Zero divide, maximum mode
DIVXU.W
Zero divide, minimum mode
DIVXU.W
Zero divide, maximum mode
DIVXU.B
DIVXU.W
↵
*
DIVXU.B
6
1
20
23
23
24
23 24
23
24
21
1
25
28
28
29
28 29
28
29
21
7
10
11
6
8
10
12
1
20
23
23
24
23 24
23
24
27
1
25
28
28
29
28 29
28
29
27
Overflow
1
1
8
11
11
12
11 12
11
12
Overflow
2
1
8
11
11
12
11 12
11
12
For register and immediate
operands
For memory operand
364
9
10
Table A-7 Instruction Execution Cycles (5)
Instruction
(Condition)
Execution Cycles
Bcc d:8
Condition false, branch not taken
3
2
Condition true, branch taken
7
5
Condition false, branch not taken
3
3
Condition true, branch taken
7
d:8
9
2
4
d:16
9
2
5
@aa:16
7
5
@Rn
6
5
@(d:8, Rn)
7
5
@(d:16, Rn)
8
@aa:16
9
2
5
@Rn
9
2
5
@(d:8, Rn)
9
2
5
@(d:16, Rn)
10
2
6
6 + 4n*
2n
2
#xx:8
6
2
2
#xx:16
7
2
3
Bcc d:16
BSR
JMP
JSR
LDM
LINK
RTE
SLEEP
6
1
#xx:8
9
2
4
#xx:16
9
2
5
Minimum mode
13
4
4
Maximum mode
15
6
4
8
2
4
RTS
SCB
J+K
6
2
NOP
RTD
I
Condition false, branch not taken
3
3
Count = –1, branch not taken
4
3
Other than the above, branch taken
8
6
Cycles preceding transition to power-
2
0
down mode
6 + 3n*
STM
* n is the number of registers specified in the register list.
365
2n
2
Table A-7 Instruction Execution Cycles (6)
Instruction
(Condition)
Execution Cycles
I
J+K
TRAPA
Minimum mode
17
6
4
Maximum mode
22
10
4
V = 0, trap not taken
3
V = 1, trap taken, minimum mode
18
6
4
V = 1, trap taken, maximum mode
23
10
4
5
2
1
TRAP/VS
UNLK
PJMP
PJSR
@aa:24
9
@Rn
8
@aa:24
15
4
6
@Rn
13
4
5
12
4
5
#xx:8
13
4
5
#xx:16
13
4
6
PRTS
PRTD
1
6
5
Table A-8 (a) Adjusted Value (Branch Instruction)
Instruction
BSR, JMP, JSR, RTS, RTD, RTE
TRAPA, PJMP, PJSR, PRTS, PRTD
Bcc, SCB, TRAP/VS (When branches)
Address
even
odd
even
odd
Adjusted Value
0
1
0
1
@(d:8, Rn)
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn
@Rn+
@aa:8
@aa:16
MOV.B #xx:8, <EA>
even
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MOVTPE, MOVFPE
odd
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MOV.W #xx:16, <EA>
even
2
0
2
2
2
0
2
odd
0
2
0
0
0
2
0
even
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
odd
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Rn
#xx:16
Start
address
#xx:8
Instruction
@Rn
Table A-8 (b) Adjusted Value (Other Instructions by Addressing Modes)
Instruction other than above
366
Appendix B Register Field
B.1 Register Addresses and Bit Names
Addr.
(last
byte)
H'80
H'81
H'82
H'83
H'84
H'85
H'86
H'87
H'88
H'89
H'8A
H'8B
H'8C
H'8D
H'8E
H'8F
H'90
H'91
H'92
H'93
H'94
H'95
H'96
H'97
H'98
H'99
H'9A
H'9B
H'9C
H'9D
H'9E
H'9F
Register
Name
Bit 7
P1DDR P17DDR
P2DDR —
P1DR
P17
P1DR
—
P3DDR P37DDR
P4DDR P47DDR
P3DR
P37
P4DR
P47
P5DDR P57DDR
P6DDR —
P5DR
P57
P6DR
—
P7DDR P77DDR
—
—
P7DR
P77
P8DR
P87
TCR
ICIE
TCSR
ICF
FRC (H)
FRC (L)
OCRA (H)
OCRA (L)
OCRB (H)
OCRB (L)
ICR (H)
ICR (L)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 6
P16DDR
—
P16
—
P36DDR
P46DDR
P36
P46
P56DDR
—
P56
—
P76DDR
—
P76
P86
OCIEB
OCFB
Bit 5
P15DDR
—
P15
—
P35DDR
P45DDR
P35
P45
P55DDR
—
P55
—
P75DDR
—
P75
P85
OCIEA
OCFA
Bit Names
Bit 4
Bit 3
P14DDR P13DDR
P24DDR P23DDR
P14
P13
P24
P23
P34DDR P33DDR
P44DDR P43DDR
P34
P33
P44
P43
P54DDR P53DDR
—
P63DDR
P54
P53
—
P63
P74DDR P73DDR
—
—
P74
P73
P84
P83
OVIE
OEB
OVF
OLVLB
Bit 2
P12DDR
P22DDR
P12
P22
P32DDR
P42DDR
P32
P42
P52DDR
P62DDR
P52
P62
P72DDR
—
P72
P82
OEA
OLVLA
Bit 1
P11DDR
P21DDR
P11
P21
P31DDR
P41DDR
P31
P41
P51DDR
P61DDR
P51
P61
P71DDR
—
P71
P81
CKS1
IEDG
Bit 0
P10DDR
P20DDR
P10
P20
P30DDR
P40DDR
P30
P40
P50DDR
P60DDR
P50
P60
P70DDR
—
P70
P80
CKS0
CCLRA
Module
Port 1
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
—
Port 7
Port 8
FRT 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Note:
FRT1: Free-Running Timer channel 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
(Continued on next page)
367
(Continued from preceding page)
Addr.
(last
byte)
H'A0
H'A1
H'A2
H'A3
H'A4
H'A5
H'A6
H'A7
H'A8
H'A9
H'AA
H'AB
H'AC
H'AD
H'AE
H'AF
H'B0
H'B1
H'B2
H'B3
H'B4
H'B5
H'B6
H'B7
H'B8
H'B9
H'BA
H'BB
H'BC
H'BD
H'BE
H'BF
Register
Name
Bit 7
TCR
ICIE
TCSR
ICF
FRC (H)
FRC (L)
OCRA (H)
OCRA (L)
OCRB (H)
OCRB (L)
ICR (H)
ICR (L)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
TCR
ICIE
TCSR
ICF
FRC (H)
FRC (L)
OCRA (H)
OCRA (L)
OCRB (H)
OCRB (L)
ICR (H)
ICR (L)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 6
OCIEB
OCFB
Bit 5
OCIEA
OCFA
Bit 4
OVIE
OVF
Bit Names
Bit 3
Bit 2
OEB
OEA
OLVLB OLVLA
Bit 1
CKS1
IEDG
Bit 0
CKS0
CCLRA
Module
FRT2
—
—
—
—
—
—
OCIEB
OCFB
—
—
—
—
—
—
OCIEA
OCFA
—
—
—
—
—
—
OVIE
OVF
—
—
—
—
—
—
OEB
OLVLB
—
—
—
—
—
—
OEA
OLVLA
—
—
—
—
—
—
CKS1
IEDG
—
—
—
—
—
—
CKS0
CCLRA
FRT 3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Notes:
FRT2: Free-Running Timer channel 2
FRT3: Free-Running Timer channel 3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
(Continued on next page)
368
(Continued from preceding page)
Addr.
(last
byte)
H'C0
H'C1
H'C2
H'C3
H'C4
H'C5
H'C6
H'C7
H'C8
H'C9
H'CA
H'CB
H'CC
H'CD
H'CE
H'CF
H'D0
H'D1
H'D2
H'D3
H'D4
H'D5
H'D6
H'D7
H'D8
H'D9
H'DA
H'DB
H'DC
H'DD
H'DE
H'DF
Register
Name
TCR
DTR
TCNT
—
TCR
DTR
TCNT
—
TCR
DTR
TCNT
—
—
—
—
—
TCR
TCSR
TCORA
TCORB
TCNT
—
—
—
SMR
BRR
SCR
TDR
SSR
RDR
—
—
Notes:
PWM1:
PWM2:
PWM3:
TMR:
SCI:
Pulse-Width Modulation timer channel 1
Pulse-Width Modulation timer channel 2
Pulse-Width Modulation timer channel 3
8-Bit Timer
Serial Communication Interface
Bit 7
OE
Bit 6
OS
Bit 5
—
Bit 4
—
Bit Names
Bit 3
Bit 2
—
CKS2
Bit 1
CKS1
Bit 0
CKS0
Module
PWM1
—
OE
—
OS
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
CKS2
—
CKS1
—
CKS0
PWM2
—
OE
—
OS
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
CKS2
—
CKS1
—
CKS0
PWM3
—
—
—
—
—
CMIEB
CMFB
—
—
—
—
—
CMIEA
CMFA
—
—
—
—
—
OVIE
OVF
—
—
—
—
—
CCLR1
—
—
—
—
—
—
CCLR0
OS3
—
—
—
—
—
CKS2
OS2
—
—
—
—
—
CKS1
OS1
—
—
—
—
—
CKS0
OS0
—
TMR
—
—
—
C/A
—
—
—
CHR
—
—
—
PE
—
—
—
O/E
—
—
—
STOP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
CKS1
—
—
—
CKS0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
—
—
CKE1
CKE0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SCI
(Continued on next page)
369
(Continued from preceding page)
Addr.
(last
byte)
H'E0
H'E1
H'E2
H'E3
H'E4
H'E5
H'E6
H'E7
H'E8
H'E9
H'EA
H'EB
H'EC
H'ED
H'EE
H'EF
Register
Name
Bit 7
ADDRA (H) AD9
ADDRA (L) AD1
ADDRB (H) AD9
ADDRB (L) AD1
ADDRC (H) AD9
ADDRC (L) AD1
ADDRD (H) AD9
ADDRD (L) AD1
ADCSR ADF
—
—
—
—
—
—
TCSR*
OVF
TCNT*
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 6
AD8
AD0
AD8
AD0
AD8
AD0
AD8
AD0
ADIE
—
—
—
WT/IT
—
—
—
Bit 5
AD7
—
AD7
—
AD7
—
AD7
—
ADST
—
—
—
TME
—
—
—
Bit 4
AD6
—
AD6
—
AD6
—
AD6
—
SCAN
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit Names
Bit 3
AD5
—
AD5
—
AD5
—
AD5
—
CKS
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 2
AD4
—
AD4
—
AD4
—
AD4
—
CH2
—
—
—
CKS2
—
—
—
Bit 1
AD3
—
AD3
—
AD3
—
AD3
—
CH1
—
—
—
CKS1
—
—
—
Bit 0
AD2
—
AD2
—
AD2
—
AD2
—
CH0
—
—
—
CKS0
—
—
—
Module
A/D
WDT
—
Notes:
(Continued on next page)
A/D:
Analog-to-Digital converter
WDT: Watchdog Timer
* Read addresses are shown. Write addresses of both TCSR and TCNT are H'FFED. See section 13.2.3,
“Notes on Register Access” for details.
370
(Continued from preceding page)
Addr.
(last
byte)
H'F0
H'F1
H'F2
H'F3
H'F4
H'F5
H'F6
H'F7
H'F8
H'F9
H'FA
H'FB
H'FC
H'FD
H'FE
H'FF
Register
Name
IPRA
IPRB
IPRC
IPRD
DTEA
DTEB
DTEC
DTED
WCR
RAMCR
MDCR
SBYCR
P1CR
—
P9DDR
P9DR
Bit 7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
RAME
—
SSBY
—
—
P97DDR
P97
Bit 6
Bit 5
IRQ0
FRT1
FRT3
SCI
—
—
OCIB1
OCIA1
OCIB3
OCIA3
TXI
RXI
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
—
—
P96DDR P95DDR
P96
P95
Bit Names
Bit 3
—
—
—
—
IRQ0
—
ICI1
—
ICI3
—
—
—
—
WMS1
—
—
—
—
—
—
NMIEG BRLE
—
—
P94DDR P93DDR
P94
P93
Bit 4
Notes:
INTC: Interrupt Controller
WSC: Wait State Controller
371
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
IRQ1
FRT2
8 Bit Timer
A/D
—
—
IRQ1
OCIB2
OCIA2
ICI2
—
CMIB
CMIA
—
—
ADI
WMS0
WC1
WC0
—
—
—
MDS2
MDS1
MDS0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
P92DDR P91DDR P90DDR
P92
P91
P90
Module
INTC
WSC
RAM
Port 1
Port 9
B.2 Register Descriptions
Register name
Acronym of the register
Address to which the
register is mapped
SYSCR1—System Control Register 1
Bit
numbers
Initial bit
values
Bit
Name of the on-chip
supporting module
H'FEFC
Port 1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
NMIEG
BRLE
—
—
—
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Read/Write
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
Type of access permitted
R
Read only
W Write only
R/W Both read and write
Names of the
bits.
Dashes (—)
indicate
reserved bits.
Bus Release Enable
0
P12 and P13 are I/O ports.
1
P12 is the BACK output pin. P13 is the BREQ input pin.
Full name of the bit
Nonmaskable Interrupt Edge
0
An NMI request is generated on the falling edge of the NMI pin input.
1
An NMI request is generated on the rising edge of the NMI pin input.
Functions of the bit settings
Interrupt Request 0 Enable
0 P15 is an I/O port; IRQ0 input is disabled.
1 P15 is the IRQ0 input pin.
Interrupt Request 1 Enable
0 P16 is an I/O port; IRQ1 input is disabled.
1 P16 is the IRQ1 input pin.
372
P1DDR—Port 1 Data Direction Register
Bit
7
6
5
H'FF80
4
3
Port 1
2
1
0
P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 1 Input/Output Selection
0 Input port
1 Output port
P1DR—Port 1 Data Register
Bit
H'FF82
Port 1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
373
P1CR—Port 1 Control Register
Bit
H'FFFC
Port 1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
NMIEG
BRLE
—
—
—
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Read/Write
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
Bus Release Enable
0 P12 and P13 are I/O ports.
1 P12 is the output pin and
P13 is the input pin.
Nonmaskable Interrupt Edge
0 An NMI request is generated on the
falling edge of the NMI pin input.
1 An NMI request is generated on the
rising edge of the NMI pin input.
Interrupt Request 0 Enable
0 P15 is an I/O port; input is disabled.
1 P15 is the input pin.
Interrupt Request 1 Enable
0 P16 is an I/O port; input is disabled.
1 P16 is the input pin.
P2DDR—Port 2 Data Direction Register
Bit
H'FF81
4
3
Port 2
7
6
5
2
1
0
—
—
—
Initial value
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
W
W
W
W
W
P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR
Port 2 Input/Output Selection
0 Input port
1 Output port
374
P2DR—Port 2 Data Register
Bit
H'FF83
Port 2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
Initial value
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P3DDR—Port 3 Data Direction Register
Bit
7
6
5
H'FF84
4
3
Port 3
2
1
0
P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 3 Input/Output Selection
0 Input port
1 Output port
P3DR—Port 3 Data Register
Bit
H'FF86
Port 3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P4DDR—Port 4 Data Direction Register
Bit
7
6
5
H'FF85
4
3
Port 4
2
1
0
P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 4 Input/Output Selection
0 Input port
1 Output port
375
P4DR—Port 4 Data Register
Bit
H'FF87
Port 4
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P5DDR—Port 5 Data Direction Register
Bit
7
6
5
H'FF88
4
3
Port 5
2
1
0
P57DDR P56DDR P55DDR P54DDR P53DDR P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 5 Input/Output Selection
0 Input port
1 Output port
P5DR—Port 5 Data Register
Bit
H'FF8A
Port 5
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P6DDR—Port 6 Data Direction Register
Bit
H'FF89
3
Port 6
7
6
5
4
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
Initial value
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
W
W
W
W
P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR
Port 6 Input/Output Selection
0 Input port
1 Output port
376
P6DR—Port 6 Data Register
Bit
H'FF8B
Port 6
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
P63
P62
P61
P60
Initial value
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P7DDR—Port 7 Data Direction Register
Bit
7
6
5
H'FF8C
4
3
Port 7
2
1
0
P77DDR P76DDR P75DDR P74DDR P73DDR P72DDR P71DDR P70DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 7 Input/Output Selection
0 Input port
1 Output port
P7DR—Port 7 Data Register
Bit
H'FF8E
Port 7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P8DR—Port 8 Data Register
Bit
Read/Write
H'FF8F
Port 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P87
P86
P85
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
377
P9DDR—Port 9 Data Direction Register
Bit
7
6
5
H'FFFE
4
3
Port 9
2
1
0
P97DDR P96DDR P95DDR P94DDR P93DDR P92DDR P91DDR P90DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 9 Input/Output Selection
0 Input port
1 Output port
P9DR—Port 9 Data Register
Bit
H'FFFF
Port 9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P97
P96
P95
P94
P93
P92
P91
P90
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
378
TCR—Timer Control Register
Bit
H'FF90
FRT1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICIE
OCIEB
OCIEA
OVIE
OEB
OEA
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
00
01
10
11
Clock Select
Internal clock
source: ø4
Internal clock
source: ø8
Internal clock
source: ø32
External clock source:
counted on rising edge
Output Enable A
0 Compare-A output is disabled.
1 Compare-A output is enabled.
Output Enable B
0 Compare-B output is disabled.
1 Compare-B output is enabled.
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
0 Overflow interrupt request is disabled.
1 Overflow interrupt request is enabled.
Output Compare Interrupt Enable A
0 Compare-match A interrupt request is disabled.
1 Compare-match A interrupt request is enabled.
Output Compare Interrupt Enable B
0 Compare-match B interrupt request is disabled.
1 Compare-match B interrupt request is enabled.
Input Capture Interrupt Enable
0 Input capture interrupt is disabled.
1 Input capture interrupt is enabled.
379
TCSR—Timer Control/Status Register
Bit
H'FF91
FRT1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICF
OCFB
OCFA
OVF
OLVLB
OLVLA
IEDG
CCLRA
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Counter Clear A
0 FRC count
is not cleared.
1 FRC count is
cleared by
comparematch A.
Input Edge Select
0 Count is captured on
falling edge of input
capture signal (FTI).
1 Count is captured on
rising edge of input
capture signal.
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Output Level A
Compare-match A causes 0 output.
Compare-match A causes 1 output.
Output Level B
Compare-match B causes 0 output.
Compare-match B causes 1 output.
Timer Overflow
Cleared from 1 to 0 when CPU reads OVF =
1, then writes 0 in OVF.
Set to 1 when FRC changes from H'FFFF to H'0000.
Output Compare Flag A
Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads OCFA = 1, then writes 0 in OCFA.
2. OCIA interrupt is served by DTC.
Set to 1 when FRC = OCRA.
Output Compare Flag B
Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads OCFB = 1, then writes 0 in OCFB.
2. OCIB interrupt is served by DTC.
1 Set to 1 when FRC = OCRB.
Input Capture Flag
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads ICF = 1, then writes 0 in ICF.
* Only writing of a 0 to
2. ICI interrupt is served by DTC.
clear the flag is enabled.
1 Set to 1 when input capture signal is received and FRC count is copied to ICR.
0
380
FRC (H and L)—Free-Running Counter
H'FF92, H'FF93
FRT 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Count value
OCRA (H and L)—Output Compare Register A
H'FF94, H'FF95
FRT 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Continually compared with FRC. OCFA is set to 1 when OCRA = FRC.
OCRB (H and L)—Output Compare Register B
H'FF96, H'FF97
FRT 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Continually compared with FRC. OCFB is set to 1 when OCRB = FRC.
ICR (H and L)—Input Capture Register
H'FF98, H'FF99
FRT 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contains FRC count captured when external input capture signal changes.
381
TCR—Timer Control Register
Bit
H'FFA0
FRT 2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICIE
OCIEB
OCIEA
OVIE
OEB
OEA
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
TCSR—Timer Control/Status Register
Bit
H'FFA1
FRT 2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICF
OCFB
OCFA
OVF
OLVLB
OLVLA
IEDG
CCLRA
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
* Only writing of a 0 to clear the flag is enabled.
FRC (H and L)—Free-Running Counter
H'FFA2, H'FFA3
FRT 2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
382
OCRA (H and L)—Output Compare Register A
H'FFA4, H'FFA5
FRT 2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
OCRB (H and L)—Output Compare Register B
H'FFA6, H'FFA7
FRT 2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
ICR (H and L)—Input Capture Register
H'FFA8, H'FFA9
FRT 2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
TCR—Timer Control Register
Bit
H'FFB0
FRT 3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICIE
OCIEB
OCIEA
OVIE
OEB
OEA
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
383
TCSR—Timer Control/Status Register
Bit
H'FFB1
FRT 3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICF
OCFB
OCFA
OVF
OLVLB
OLVLA
IEDG
CCLRA
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
* Only writing of 0 to clear the flag is enabled.
FRC (H and L)—Free-Running Counter
H'FFB2, H'FFB3
FRT 3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
OCRA (H and L)—Output Compare Register A
H'FFB4, H'FFB5
FRT 3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
384
OCRB (H and L)—Output Compare Register B
H'FFB6, H'FFB7
FRT 3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
ICR (H and L)—Input Capture Register
H'FFB8, H'FFB9
FRT 3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
385
TCR—Timer Control Register
Bit
H'FFC0
PWM1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OE
OS
—
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select (Values When ø = 10MHz)
Internal
ResoPW
PW
Clock Freq. lution
Period Frequency
ø/2
200ns
50µs
20kHz
ø/8
800ns
200µs
5kHz
ø/32
3.2µs
800µs
1.25kHz
ø/128
12.8µs
3.2ms
312.5kHz
ø/256
25.6µs
6.4ms
156.3Hz
ø/1024
102.4µs 25.6ms 39.1Hz
ø/2048
204.8µs 51.2ms 19.5Hz
ø/4096
409.6µs 102.4ms 9.8Hz
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
Output Select
0 Positive logic
1 Negative logic
Output Enable
0 PW output disabled; TCNT cleared to H'00 and stops.
1 PW output enabled; TCNT runs.
DTR—Duty Register
H'FFC1
PWM1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Pulse duty factor
386
TCNT—Timer Counter
H'FFC2
PWM1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Count value (runs from H'00 to H'F9, then repeats from H'00)
* Write function is for test purposes only. Writing to this register during normal operation may have
unpredictable effects
TCR—Timer Control Register
Bit
H'FFC4
PWM2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OE
OS
—
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM1.
DTR—Duty Register
H'FFC5
PWM2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM1.
387
TCNT—Timer Counter
H'FFC6
PWM2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM1.
* Write function is for test purposes only. Writing to this register during normal operation may have
unpredictable effects
TCR—Timer Control Register
Bit
H'FFC8
PWM3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OE
OS
—
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM1.
DTR—Duty Register
H'FFC9
PWM3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM1.
388
TCNT—Timer Counter
H'FFCA
PWM3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM1.
* Write function is for test purposes only. Writing to this register during normal operation may have
unpredictable effects.
389
TCR—Timer Control Register
Bit
H'FFD0
TMR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CMIEB
CMIEA
OVIE
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select
0 0 0 No clock source; timer stops.
0 0 1 Internal clock source: ø8,
counted on falling edge.
0 1 0 Internal clock source: ø64,
counted on falling edge.
0 1 1 Internal clock source: ø1024,
counted on falling edge.
1 0 0 No clock source; timer stops.
1 0 1 External clock source, counted
on rising edge.
1 1 0 External clock source, counted
on falling edge.
1 1 1 External clock source, counted
on both rising and falling edges.
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Counter Clear
Counter is not cleared.
Cleared by compare-match A.
Cleared by compare-match B.
Cleared on rising edge of external reset input.
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
0 Overflow interrupt request is disabled.
1 Overflow interrupt request is enabled.
Compare-Match Interrupt Enable A
0 Compare-match A interrupt request is disabled.
1 Compare-match A interrupt request is enabled.
Compare-Match Interrupt Enable B
0 Compare-match B interrupt request is disabled.
1 Compare-match B interrupt request is enabled.
390
TCSR—Timer Control/Status Register
Bit
7
6
H'FFD1
5
TMR
4
3
2
1
0
OS2*2
OS1*2
OS0*2
CMFB
CMFA
OVF
—
OS3*2
Initial value
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*1
R/(W)*1
R/(W)*1
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Output Select
No change on compare-match A.
Output 0 on compare-match A.
Output 1 on compare-match A.
Invert (toggle) output on compare-match A.
Output Select
0 0 No change on compare-match B.
0 1 Output 0 on compare-match B.
1 0 Output 1 on compare-match B.
1 1 Invert (toggle) output on compare-match B.
Timer Overflow Flag
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 when CPU reads OVF =
1, then writes 0 in OVF.
1 Set to 1 when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00.
Compare-Match Flag A
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads CMFA = 1, then writes 0 in CMFA.
2. CMA interrupt is served by the DTC.
1 Set to 1 when TCNT = TCORA.
Compare-Match Flag B
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads CMFB = 1, then writes 0 in CMFB.
2. CMB interrupt is served by the DTC.
1 Set to 1 when TCNT = TCORB.
*1 Only writing of 0 to clear the flag is enabled.
*2 When all four bits (OS3 to OS0) are cleared to 0, output is disabled.
391
TCORA—Time Constant Register A
H'FFD2
TMR
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The CMFA bit is set to 1 when TCORA = TCNT.
TCORB—Time Constant Register B
H'FFD3
TMR
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The CMFB bit is set to 1 when TCORB = TCNT.
TCNT—Timer Counter
H'FFD4
TMR
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Count value
392
SMR—Serial Mode Register
Bit
H'FFD8
SCI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
—
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Clock Select
ø clock
ø/4 clock
ø/16 clock
ø/64 clock
Stop Bit Length
0 One stop bit
1 Two stop bits
Parity Mode
0 Even parity
1 Odd parity
Parity Enable
0 Transmit: No parity bit added.
Receive: Parity bit not checked.
1 Transmit: Parity bit added.
Receive: Parity bit checked.
Character Length
0 8-Bit data length
1 7-Bit data length
Communication Mode
0 Asynchronous
1 Synchronous
393
BRR—Bit Rate Register
H'FFD9
SCI
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Constant that determines the baud rate
SCR—Serial Control Register
Bit
H'FFDA
SCI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
—
—
CKE1
CKE0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
Clock Enable 0
0 SCK pin is NOT USED.
1 SCK pin is used for output.
Clock Enable 1
0 Internal clock
1 External clock, input at SCK pin
Receive Enable
0 Receive disabled
1 Receive enabled
Transmit Enable
0 Transmit disabled
1 Transmit enabled
Receive Interrupt Enable
0 Receive interrupt request (RXI) is disabled.
1 Receive interrupt request (RXI) is enabled.
Transmit Interrupt Enable
0 Transmit interrupt request (TXI) is disabled.
1 Transmit interrupt request (TXI) is enabled.
394
TDR—Transmit Data Register
H'FFDB
SCI
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Transmit data
395
SSR—Serial Status Register
Bit
H'FFDC
SCI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
—
—
—
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
—
—
—
Parity Error
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads PER = 1, then writes 0 in PER.
2. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
1 Set to 1 when a parity error occurs (parity of
receive data does not match parity selected by bit).
Framing Error
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads FER = 1, then writes 0 in FER.
2. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
1 Set to 1 when a framing error occurs (stop bit is 0).
Overrun Error
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads ORER = 1, then writes 0 in ORER.
2. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
1 Set to 1 when an overrun error occurs (next data is
completely received while RDRF bit is set to 1).
Receive Data Register Full
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads RDRF = 1, then writes 0 in RDRF.
2. RDR is read by the DTC.
3. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
1 Set to 1 when one character is received normally and
transferred from RSR to RDR.
Transmit Data Register Empty
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads TDRE = 1, then writes 0 in TDRE.
2. The DTC writes data in TDR.
1 Set to 1 when:
1. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
2. Data is transferred from TDR to TSR.
3. CPU reads TDRE = 0, then clears 0 in TE.
* Only writing of 0 to clear the flag is enabled.
396
RDR—Receive Data Register
H'FFDD
SCI
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Receive data
ADDRn (H)—A/D Data Register n (High)
H'FFE0, H'FFE2, H'FFE4, H'FFE6
Bit
(n = A, B, C, D)
A/D
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Upper 8 bits of 10-bit A/D conversion result
ADDRn (L)—A/D Data Register n (Low)
H'FFE1, H'FFE3, H'FFE5, H'FFE7
Bit
(n = A, B, C, D)
A/D
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Lower 2 bits of 10-bit A/D conversion result
397
ADCSR—A/D Control/Status Register
Bit
H'FFE8
A/D
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADF
ADIE
ADST
SCAN
CKS
CH2
CH1
CH0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
CH2 CH1 CH0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
Channel Select
Single Mode Scan Mode
AN0
AN0
AN1
AN0, AN1
AN2
AN0 to AN2
AN3
AN0 to AN3
AN4
AN4
AN5
AN4, AN5
AN6
AN4 to AN6
AN7
AN4 to AN7
Clock Select
0 Conversion time = 274 states
1 Conversion time = 138 states
Scan Mode
0 Single mode
1 Scan mode
A/D Start
0 A/D conversion is halted.
1 1. Single mode: One A/D conversion is performed,
then this bit is automatically cleared to 0.
2. Scan mode: A/D conversion starts and continues
cyclically on all selected channels until 0 is
written in this bit.
A/D Interrupt Enable
0 The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is disabled.
1 The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is enabled.
A/D End Flag
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
2. CPU reads ADF = 1, then writes 0 in ADF.
3. DTC is served by ADI.
1 Set to 1 at the following times:
1. Single mode: at the completion of A/D conversion.
2. Scan mode: when all selected channels have been converted.
* Only writing of 0 to clear the flag is enabled.
398
H'FFEC*1, H'FFED*2
TCSR—Timer Status/Control Register
Bit
WDT
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVF
WT/IT
TME
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*3
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Clock Select
ø/2
(51.2µs)*4
ø/32
(819.2µs)
ø/64
(1.6ms)
ø/128
(3.3ms)
ø/256
(6.6ms)
ø/512
(13.1ms)
ø/2048 (52.4ms)
ø/4096 (104.9ms)
Timer Enable
0 Timer is disabled.
• TCNT is initialized to H'00 and stopped.
1 Timer is enabled.
• TCNT starts incrementing.
• CPU interrupt request is enabled.
Timer Mode Select
0 Interval timer mode (IRQ0 interrupt request)
1 Watchdog timer mode (NMI interrupt request)
Overflow Flag
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 when CPU reads OVF = 1, then wtites 0
in OVF.
1 Set to 1 when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00.
*1
*2
*3
*4
Read address
Write address
Only writing of 0 to clear the flag is enabled.
Times in parentheses are the times for TCNT to increment from H'00 to H'FF and change to
H'00 again when ø = 10MHz.
399
TCNT—Timer Counter
H'FFED
WDT
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Count value
IPRA—Interrupt Priority Register A
Bit
7
6
5
H'FFF0
4
3
—
INTC
2
1
0
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ0 interrupt priority level (0 to 7)
IPRB—Interrupt Priority Register B
Bit
7
6
5
IRQ1 interrupt priority level (0 to 7)
H'FFF1
4
—
3
INTC
2
1
0
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
16-Bit FRT1 interrupt
priority level (0 to 7)
400
16-Bit FRT2 interrupt
priority level (0 to 7)
IPRC—Interrupt Priority Register C
Bit
7
6
H'FFF2
5
4
—
3
INTC
2
1
0
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
16-Bit FRT3 interrupt
priority level (0 to 7)
IPRD—Interrupt Priority Register D
Bit
7
6
8-Bit timer interrupt
priority level (0 to 7)
H'FFF3
5
4
—
3
INTC
2
1
0
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
SCI interrupt priority
level (0 to 7)
IPRD—Interrupt Priority Register D
Bit
A/D interrupt priority
level (0 to 7)
H'FFF4
7
6
5
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
4
INTC
3
2
1
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ0
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
401
0
IRQ1
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
DTEB—Data Transfer Enable Register B
Bit
7
6
5
H'FFF5
4
—
3
INTC
2
1
0
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
16-Bit FRT channel 1
16-Bit FRT channel 2
ICI
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
OCIA
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
OCIB
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
ICI
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
OCIA
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
OCIB
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
402
DTEC—Data Transfer Enable Register C
Bit
7
6
5
H'FFF6
4
—
INTC
3
2
—
—
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
16-Bit FRT channel 3
8-Bit timer
CMIA
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
CMIB
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
ICI
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
OCIA
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
OCIB
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
403
DTED—Data Transfer Enable Register D
Bit
7
6
5
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
INTC
4
3
2
1
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
Initial value
H'FFF7
SCI
0
A/D converter
ADI
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
RXI
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
TXI
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
404
WCR—Wait-State Control Register
Bit
H'FFF8
WSC
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
WMS1
WMS0
WC1
WC0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Wait Count 1 and 0
0 0 No wait states (TW)
are inserted.
0 1 1 Wait states are inserted.
1 0 2 Wait states are inserted.
1 1 3 Wait state is inserted.
Wait Mode Select 1 and 0
0 0 Programmable wait mode
0 1 No wait states are inserted,
regardless of the wait count.
1 0 Pin wait mode
1 1 Pin auto-wait mode
RAMCR—RAM Control Register
Bit
H'FFF9
RAM
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAME
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
RAM Enable
0 On-chip RAM is disabled.
1 On-chip RAM is enabled.
405
MDCR—Mode Control Register
Bit
H'FFFA
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
MDS2
MDS1
MDS0
Initial value
1
1
0
0
0
—*
—*
—*
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
R
Mode Select
Value input at mode pins
* Initialized according to the inputs at pins MD2, MD1, and MD0.
SBYCR—Software Standby Control Register
Bit
H'FFFB
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSBY
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Software Standby
0 SLEEP instruction causes transition to sleep mode.
1 SLEEP instruction causes transition to software standby mode.
406
Appendix C I/O Port Schematic Diagrams
C.1 Schematic Diagram of Port 1
Internal data bus (PDB8)
Figure C-1 (a) to (g) gives a schematic view of the port 1 input/output circuits.
Reset
R
Q
D
P10 DDR
C
WP1D
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
RP1: Read Port 1
ø
P10
RP1
Figure C-1 (a) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P10
Table C-1 (a) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P10)
Port Read Data
Pin value
ø
Reset
R
Q
D
P11 DDR
C
WP1D
Internal data bus (PDB9)
Setting
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
RP1: Read Port 1
E
P11
RP1
Figure C-1 (b) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P11
407
Table C-1 (b) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P11)
Setting
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Pin value
E
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
WP1: Write to Port 1
RP1: Read Port 1
Reset
R
D
P12 DDR
C
WP1D
Reset
R
Q
P12
D
P12 DR
C
Internal data bus (PDB10)
Q
WP1
Mode 1, 2, 3,
or 4
Port 1 control
register, bit 3
BRLE
Q
BACK
RP1
Figure C-1 (c) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P12
Table C-1 (c) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P12)
Mode
1,2,3,4
7
Setting
BRLE = 1
BRLE
=0
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
DR value
Pin value
DR value
Pin value
DR value
408
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
WP1: Write to Port 1
RP1: Read Port 1
Reset
R
D
P13 DDR
C
WP1D
Reset
R
P13
Q
D
P13 DR
C
WP1
Mode 1, 2, 3,
or 4
Internal data bus (PDB11)
Q
Port 1 control register,
bit 3
BRLE
Q
RP1
BREQ to CPU
Figure C-1 (d) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P13
Table C-1 (d) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P13)
Mode
1,2,3,4
7
Setting
BRLE = 1
BRLE
=0
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Pin value
Pin value
DR value
Pin value
DR value
409
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
WP1: Write to Port 1
RP1: Read Port 1
Reset
R
D
P14 DDR
C
WP1D
Reset
R
P14
Q
D
P14 DR
C
WP1
Mode 1, 2, 3,
or 4
Internal data bus (PDB12)
Q
Wait-state control
register, bit 3
WMS1
Q
RP1
WAIT to CPU
Figure C-1 (e) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P14
Table C-1 (e) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P14)
Mode
1,2,3,4
7
Setting
WMS 1 = 1
WMS 1
=0
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Pin value
Pin value
DR value
Pin value
DR value
410
R
Q
D
P1n DDR
C
WP1D
Reset
R
P1n
Q
D
P1n DR
C
WP1
Internal data bus (PDB13, PDB14)
Reset
WP1D:
WP1:
RP1:
n:
Write to P1DDR
Write to Port 1
Read Port 1
5 or 6
Port 1 control register,
bits 5 and 6
IRQ 0 E
or
IRQ 1 E
Q
RP1
IRQ0 , IRQ 1 to CPU
Figure C-1 (f) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pins P15 and P16
Table C-1 (f) Port 1 Port Read (Pins P15, P16)
Setting
IRQ0E
or
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
or
IRQ1E
Port Read Data
=1
Pin value
DDR = 0
Pin value
DDR = 1
DR value
=0
411
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
WP1: Write to Port 1
RP1: Read Port 1
Reset
D
P17 DDR
C
WP1D
Reset
R
Q
P17
D
P17 DR
C
WP1
Internal data bus (PDB15)
R
Q
8-Bit timer module
Output enable
8-Bit timer output
RP1
Figure C-1 (g) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P17
Table C-1 (g) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P17)
Setting
8-bit timer output enable
8-bit timer
output disable
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
8-bit timer output value
Pin value
DR value
412
C.2 Schematic Diagram of Port 2
Figure C-2 gives a schematic view of the port 2 input/output circuits.
Bus release
Reset
S
Q
R
D
P2 n DDR
C
WP2D
Reset
Mode 7
R
Q
P2n
D
P2 n DR
C
WP2
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
RP2
Bus control signals
Figure C-2 Schematic Diagram of Port 2
Table C-2 Port 2 Port Read
Mode
1,2,3,4
7
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
DR value
Pin value
DR value
413
WP2D:
WP2:
RP2:
n:
Internal data bus (PDB8 to PDB11)
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
Software standby
Write to P2DDR
Write to Port 2
Read Port 2
0, 1, 2, 3, or 4
C.3 Schematic Diagram of Port 3
Figure C-3 gives a schematic view of the port 3 input/output circuits.
Data bus control
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
Reset
R
Q
D
WP3
Mode 1, 2, 3,
or 4
Reset
R
P3n
Q
Mode 7
D
P3 n DR
C
WP3D
RP3
External address read
Figure C-3 Schematic Diagram of Port 3
Table C-3 Port 3 Port Read
Mode
1,2,3,4
7
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Always reads 1
Pin value
DR value
414
Internal data bus (PDB8 to PDB15)
P3 n DDR
C
Mode 7
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
WP3D:
WP3:
RP3:
n:
Write to P3DDR
Write to Port 3
Read Port 3
0 to 7
C.4 Schematic Diagram of Port 4
Figure C-4 gives a schematic view of the port 4 input/output circuits.
Bus release
R
D
P4 n DDR
C
WP4D
Reset
Mode 7
R
Q
P4n
D
P4 n DR
C
WP4
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
RP4
Figure C-4 Schematic Diagram of Port 4
Table C-4 Port 4 Port Read
Mode
1,2,3,4
7
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
DR value
Pin value
DR value
415
Internal data bus (PDB8 to PDB15)
Reset
S
Q
WP4D:
WP4:
RP4:
n:
Internal address bus (IAB0 to IAB7)
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
Software standby
Write to P4DDR
Write to Port 4
Read Port 4
0 to 7
C.5 Schematic Diagram of Port 5
Figure C-5 gives a schematic view of the port 5 input/output circuits.
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
Mode 1 or 3
Bus release
S
Q
R
D
P5 n DDR
C
WP5D
Reset
Mode 7
R
Q
P5n
D
P5 n DR
C
WP5
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
RP5
Figure C-5 Schematic Diagram of Port 5
Table C-5 Port 5 Port Read
Mode
1,3
2,4,7
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
DR value
Pin value
DR value
416
Internal data bus (PDB8 to PDB15)
Reset
MOS
pull-up
WP5D:
WP5:
RP5:
n:
Internal address bus (IAB8 to IAB15)
Software standby
Write to P5DDR
Write to Port 5
Read Port 5
0 to 7
C.6 Schematic Diagram of Port 6
Figure C-6 gives a schematic view of the port 6 input/output circuits.
Mode 3 or 4
Mode 3
Bus release
S
Q
R
D
P6 n DDR
C
WP6D
Reset
Mode 1, 2, or 7
R
Q
P6n
D
P6 n DR
C
WP6
Mode 3 or 4
RP6
Figure C-6 Schematic Diagram of Port 6
Table C-6 Port 6 Port Read
Mode
3
1,2,4,7
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
DR value
Pin value
DR value
417
Internal data bus (PDB8 to PDB15)
Reset
MOS
pull-up
WP6D:
WP6:
RP6:
n:
Internal address bus (IAB16 to IAB19)
Software standby
Write to P6DDR
Write to Port 6
Read Port 6
0 to 3
C.7 Schematic Diagram of Port 7
Figure C-7 (a) to (e) gives a schematic view of the port 7 input/output circuits.
WP7D: Write to P7DDR
WP7: Write to Port 7
RP7: Read Port 7
Reset
R1
D
P70 DDR
C
WP7D
Reset
R
Q
P70
D
P70 DR
C
WP7
Internal data bus (PDB8)
Q
8-Bit timer module
RP7
Input clock
Figure C-7 (a) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pin P70
Table C-7 (a) Port 7 Port Read (Pin P70)
Setting
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Pin value
DR value
418
Reset
R1
D
P7n DDR
C
WP7D
Reset
R
Q
P7n
D
P7n DR
C
WP7
Internal data bus (PDB9 to 10)
Q
WP7D:
WP7:
RP7:
n:
Write to P7DDR
Write to Port 7
Read Port 7
1 or 2
Free-running timer module
RP7
Input capture signal
Figure C-7 (b) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pins P71 and P72
Table C-7 (b) Port 7 Port Read (Pins P71, P72)
Setting
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Pin value
DR value
419
WP7D: Write to P7DDR
WP7: Write to Port 7
RP7: Read Port 7
Reset
R1
D
P73 DDR
C
WP7D
Reset
R
Q
P73
D
P73 DR
C
WP7
Internal data bus (PDB11)
Q
RP7
8-Bit timer module
Counter reset input
Free-running timer module
Input capture signal
Figure C-7 (c) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pin P73
Table C-7 (c) Port 7 Port Read (Pin P73)
Setting
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Pin value
DR value
420
R
Q
D
P7n DDR
C
WP7D
Reset
R
Q
P7n
D
P7n DR
C
WP7
Internal data bus (PDB12 to PDB14)
Reset
WP7D:
WP7:
RP7:
n:
Write to P7DDR
Write to Port 7
Read Port 7
4, 5 or 6
Free-running timer module
Output enable
Output compare output
RP7
Counter clock output
Figure C-7 (d) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pins P74, P75 and P76
Table C-7 (d) Port 7 Port Read (Pins P74 – P76)
Setting
Output enable
Output disable
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Output compare output value
Pin value
DR value
421
WP7D: Write to P7DDR
WP7: Write to Port 7
RP7: Read Port 7
Reset
R1
D
P77 DDR
C
WP7D
Reset
R
Q
P77
D
P77 DR
C
WP7
Internal data bus (PDB15)
Q
Free-running timer module
Output enable
Output compare output
RP7
Figure C-7 (e) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pin P77
Table C-7 (e) Port 7 Port Read (Pin P77)
Setting
Output enable
Output disable
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Output compare output value
Pin value
DR value
422
C.8 Schematic Diagram of Port 8
Internal data bus
(PDB8 to PDB15)
Figure C-8 gives a schematic view of the port 8 input circuits.
RP8
P8n
RP8: Read Port 8
n:
0 to 7
A/D converter module
Input multiplexer
Figure C-8 Schematic Diagram of Port 8
423
C.9 Schematic Diagram of Port 9
Figure C-9 (a) to (e) gives a schematic view of the port 9 input/output circuits.
R
Q
D
P9 n DDR
C
WP9D
Reset
R
Q
P9n
D
P9 n DR
C
WP9
Internal data bus (PDB8, PDB9)
Reset
WP9D:
WP9:
RP9:
n:
Write to P9DDR
Write to Port 9
Read Port 9
0 or 1
Free-running timer module
Output enable
Output compare output
RP9
Figure C-9 (a) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pins P90 and P91
Table C-9 (a) Port 9 Port Read (Pins P90, P91)
Setting
Output enable
Output disable
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Output compare output value
Pin value
DR value
424
R
Q
D
P9 n DDR
C
WP9D
Reset
R
Q
P9n
D
P9 n DR
C
WP9
Internal data bus (PDB10 to PDB12)
Reset
WP9D:
WP9:
RP9:
n:
Write to P9DDR
Write to Port 9
Read Port 9
2, 3, or 4
PWM timer module
Output enable
PWM 1 , PWM 2 , or PWM 3 output
RP9
Figure C-9 (b) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pins P92, P93 and P94
Table C-9 (b) Port 9 Port Read (Pins P92 – P94)
Setting
Output enable
Output disable
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
PWM 1, 2, 3 output value
Pin value
DR value
425
Reset
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to Port 9
RP9: Read Port 9
R
D
P9 5 DDR
C
WP9D
Reset
R
Q
P95
D
P9 5 DR
C
WP9
Internal data bus (PDB13)
Q
SCI timer module
Output enable
Serial transfer data
RP9
Figure C-9 (c) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P95
Table C-9 (c) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P95)
Setting
Output enable
Output disable
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Serial transfer data
Pin value
DR value
426
Reset
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to Port 9
RP9: Read Port 9
R
D
P96 DDR
C
WP9D
P96
Reset
R
Q
D
P96 DR
C
Internal data bus (PDB14)
Q
WP9
SCI timer module
RP9
Input enable
Serial receive data
Fig. C-9 (d)
Figure C-9 (d) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P96
Table C-9 (d) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P96)
Setting
Output enable
Output disable
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Serial transfer data
Pin value
DR value
427
Reset
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to Port 9
RP9: Read Port 9
R
Q
D
P97 DDR
C
Reset
R
Q
P97
D
P97 DR
C
WP9
Internal data bus (PDB15)
WP9D
SCI timer module
Clock input enable
Clock output enable
Clock output
RP9
Clock input
Figure C-9 (e) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P97
Table C-9 (e) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P97)
Setting
Clock input enable
Clock output enable
Clock input/output
enable
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Input clock value
Output clock value
Pin value
DR value
428
429
430
H'FFFF
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FB7F
H'FB80
H'00BF
H'00C0
H'0000
Register field
128 bytes
On-chip RAM
1K byte
External
memory
Vector tables
Page 0
H'FFFF
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FB7F
H'FB80
H'7FFF
H'8000
H'00BF
H'00C0
H'0000
Register field
128 bytes
On-chip RAM
1K byte
External
memory
On-chip ROM
32K bytes
Vector tables
Mode 2
Expanded maximum mode
Mode 1
Page 0
H'FFFFF
H'F0000
H'1FFFF
H'0FFFF
H'10000
H'0FF7F
H'0FF80
H'0FB7F
H'0FB80
H'0017F
H'00180
H'00000
External
memory
Register field
128 bytes
On-chip RAM
1K byte
External
memory
Vector tables
Mode 3
Page 15
Page 1
Page 0
H'FFFFF
H'F0000
H'1FFFF
H'0FFFF
H'10000
H'0FF7F
H'0FB80
H'0FB7F
H'0FB80
H'07FFF
H'08000
H'0017F
H'00180
H'00000
External
memory
Register field
128 bytes
On-chip RAM
1K byte
External
memory
On-chip ROM
32K bytes
Vector tables
Mode 4
Expanded maximum mode
Appendix D Memory Map
Page 15
Page 1
Page 0
H'FFFF
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FB80
H'7FFF
H'00BF
H'00C0
H'0000
Register field
128 bytes
On-chip RAM
1K byte
On-chip ROM
32K bytes
Vector tables
Mode 7
Single-chip mode
Page 0
Appendix E Pin State
E.1 Port State of Each Pin State
Table E-1 Port State
Hardware
Port
Pin Name
Mode Reset
P17 to P12
1
Standby
Software
Bus-right
Program Execution
Mode
Standby mode Sleep Mode
Release Mode State (Normal Operation)
Input/Output port or
TMO, IRQ1, IRQ0 2
Control signal Input/
keep*1
keep*3
keep*4
Output
7
keep*2
keep
---
Input/Output port
P11/E
1
(DDR = 1)
(DDR = 1)
(DDR = 1)
(DDR = 1)
P10/ø
2
Clock
ø=H
Clock output Clock output Clock output
3
output
WAIT, BREQ,
3
BACK
4
P24 to P20
T
T
E=L
(DDR = 0)
(DDR = 0)
(DDR = 0)
4
T
(DDR = 0)
T
T
Input port
7
T
---
1
WR, RD, DS,
2
R/W, AS
3
WR, RD, DS,
H
T
H
T
R/W, AS
T
keep
keep
---
Input/Output port
T
T
T
D7 to D0
keep
keep
---
Input/Output port
T
L
T
A7 to A0
4
7
P37 to P30
1
D7 to D0
2
3
T
T
4
7
P47 to P40
1
A7 to A0
2
L
3
T
4
7
T
keep
keep
---
Input/Output port
P57 to P50
1
L
T
L
T'
A15 to A8
A15 to A8
2
T
T*6
*5
T*6
Address/Input port
T
L
T
A15 to A8
T*6
*5
T*6
Address/Input port
keep
keep
---
Input/Output port
3
L
4
T
7
T
431
Table E-1 Port State (cont)
Hardware
Port
Pin Name
Mode Reset
P63 to P60
1
A19 to A16
2
T
3
L
4
T
Standby
Software
Bus-right
Mode
Standby mode Sleep Mode
Release Mode State (Normal Operation)
keep
keep
keep
T
L
T
A19 to A16
T*6
*5
T*6
Address/Input port
keep
keep
---
Input/Output port
T
7
P77 to P70
Program Execution
Input/Output port
1
2
3
T
T
keep*2
keep
keep
Input port
T
T
T
T
T
Input port
T
T
keep*2
keep
keep
Input/Output port
4
7
P87 to P80
1
2
3
4
7
P97 to P90
1
2
3
4
7
H: “High” = High level
L: “Low” = Low level
T: High Impedance
keep: If DDR = 0 and DR = 1 in port 5 and 6, Pull-up MOS holds on-state.
Notes:
*1 8 Bit Timer is reset, so P17 becomes input or output port controlled by DDR and DR. Also P12
goes to the high impedance state when it is programmed as BACK output.
*2 On-chip supporting modules are reset. So these pins become input or output ports controlled
by DDR and DR.
*3 BREQ can be accepted and BACK goes LOW.
*4 BACK outputs LOW.
*5 The pins programmed as address bus output LOW and others programmed as input are at the
high impedance state.
If DDR = 0 and DR = 1, the pull-up MOS’s keep ON state.
*6 If DDR = 0 and DR = 1, the pull-up MOS’s keep ON state.
432
Table E-2 Pull-Up MOS State
Port
P57 to P50
A15 to A8
P57 to P50
A15 to A8
Mode
1
2
3
4
7
1
2
3
4
7
Reset
OFF
Hardware Standby Mode
OFF
Other Operating State*
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF: Pull-up MOS is always OFF.
ON/OFF: Pull-up MOS holds on-state only when DDR = “0” and DR = 1.
* Including Software Standby Mode
433
E.2 Pin Status in the Reset State
1. Mode 1
Figures E-1 and E-2 show how the pin states change when the RES pin goes Low during external
memory access in mode 1.
As soon as RES goes Low, all ports are initialized to the input (high-impedance) state. The AS,
DS, RD, and WR signals all go High. The data bus (D7 to D0) is placed in the high-impedance
state.
The address bus and the R/W signal are initialized 1.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the
RES pin is sampled. All address bus signals are made Low. The R/W signal is made High.
The clock output pins P10/ø and P11/E are initialized 0.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the
RES pin is sampled. Both pins are initialized to the output state.
434
ZTAT Versions
External memory access
T2
T1
T3
P10 / ø*
RES
Internal reset signal
H’0000
A15 to A0
R/W
AS, RD and DS (read)
WR and DS (write)
High impedance
D7 to D0 (write)
High impedance
I/O ports
*
The dotted line indicates that P10/ø is an input port if the corresponding DDR bit is 0,
but a clock output pin if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-1 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 1)
435
Masked-ROM Versions
External memory access
T1
T2
T3
P10 / ø*
RES
Internal reset signal
A15 to A0
H’0000
R/W
AS, RD and DS (read)
WR and DS (write)
High impedance
D7 to D0 (write)
High impedance
I/O ports
*
The dotted line indicates that P10/ø is an input port if the corresponding DDR bit is 0,
but a clock output pin if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-2 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 1)
436
2. Mode 2
Figures E-3 and E-4 show how the pin states change when the RES pin goes Low during external
memory access in mode 2.
As soon as RES goes Low, all ports are initialized to the input (high-impedance) state. The AS,
DS, RD, and WR signals all go High. The data bus (D7 to D0) is placed in the high-impedance
state. Pins P57/A15 to P50/A8 of the address bus are initialized as input ports.
Pins A7 to A0 of the address bus and the R/W signal are initialized 1.5 ø clock periods after the
Low state of the RES pin is sampled. Pins A7 to A0 are made Low. The signal is made High.
The clock output pins P10/ø and P11/E are initialized 0.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the
RES pin is sampled. Both pins are initialized to the output state.
437
ZTAT Versions
External memory access
T1
T2
T3
P10 / ø*
RES
Internal reset signal
H’00
A7 to A0
High impedance
P57 /A15 to P5 0 to A 8
R/W
AS, RD and DS (read)
WR and DS (write)
High impedance
D7 to D0 (write)
High impedance
I/O ports
*
The dotted line indicates that P10/ø is an input port if the corresponding DDR bit is 0,
but a clock output pin if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-3 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 2)
438
Masked-ROM Versions
External memory access
T1
T2
T3
P10 / ø*
RES
Internal reset signal
H’00
A7 to A 0
High impedance
P57 /A15 to P5 0/A8
R/W
AS, RD and DS (read)
WR and DS (write)
High impedance
D7 to D0 (write)
High impedance
I/O ports
*
The dotted line indicates that P10/ø is an input port if the corresponding DDR bit is 0,
but a clock output pin if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-4 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 2)
439
3. Mode 3
Figures E-5 and E-6 show how the pin states change when the RES pin goes Low during external
memory access in mode 3.
As soon as RES goes Low, all ports are initialized to the input (high-impedance) state. The AS,
DS, RD, and WR signals all go High. The data bus (D7 to D0) is placed in the high-impedance
state.
The address bus and the signal are initialized 1.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the RES
pin is sampled. All address bus signals are made Low. The R/W signal is made High.
The clock output pins P10/ø and P11/E are initialized 0.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the
RES pin is sampled. Both pins are initialized to the output state.
440
ZTAT Version
External memory
access
T1
T2
P10 / ø*
RES
Internal reset signal
A19 to A0
H’00000
R/W
AS, RD and DS (read)
WR and DS (write)
High impedance
D7 to D0 (write)
High impedance
I/O ports
*
The dotted line indicates that P10/ø is an input port if the corresponding DDR bit is 0,
but a clock output pin if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-5 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 3)
441
Masked-ROM Version
External memory access
T1
T2
P10 / ø*
RES
Internal reset signal
A19 to A0
H’0000
R/W
AS, RD and DS (read)
WR and DS (write)
High impedance
D7 to D0 (write)
High impedance
I/O ports
*
The dotted line indicates that P10/ø is an input port if the corresponding DDR bit is 0,
but a clock output pin if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-6 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 3)
442
4. Mode 4
Figures E-7 and E-8 show how the pin states change when the RES pin goes Low during external
memory access in mode 4.
As soon as RES goes Low, all ports are initialized to the input (high-impedance) state. The AS,
DS, RD, and WR signals all go High. The data bus (D7 to D0) is placed in the high-impedance
state. Pins P57/A15 to P50/A8 of the address bus and pins P63/A19 to P60/A16 of the page address
bus are initialized as input ports.
Pins A7 to A0 of the address bus and the R/W signal are initialized 1.5 ø clock periods after the
Low state of the RES pin is sampled. Pins A7 to A0 are made Low. The R/W signal is made
High.
The clock output pins P10/ø and P11/E are initialized 0.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the
RES pin is sampled. Both pins are initialized to the output state.
443
ZTAT Versions
T1
T2
T3
T1
P10 / ø*
RES
Internal reset signal
H’00
A7 to A0
High impedance
P63 /A19 to P6 0 to A16 and
P57 /A15 to P5 0 /A8
R/W
AS, RD and DS (read)
WR and DS (write)
High impedance
D7 to D0 (write)
High impedance
I/O ports
*
The dotted line indicates that P10/ø is an input port if the corresponding DDR bit is 0,
but a clock output pin if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-7 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 4)
444
Masked-ROM Versions
T1
T2
T3
T1
P10 / ø*
RES
Internal reset signal
H’00
A7 to A0
P63 /A19 to P6 0/A16,
P57 /A15 to P5 0 /A8
High impedance
R/W
AS, RD and DS (read)
WR and DS (write)
High impedance
D7 to D0 (write)
High impedance
I/O ports
*
The dotted line indicates that P10/ø is an input port if the corresponding DDR bit is 0,
but a clock output pin if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-8 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 4)
445
5. Mode 7
Figures E-9 and E-10 show how the pin states change when the RES pin goes Low in mode 7.
As soon as RES goes Low, all ports are initialized to the input (high-impedance) state.
The clock output pins P10/ø and P11/E are initialized 0.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the
RES pin is sampled. Both pins are initialized to the output state.
ZTAT Versions
P10 / ø*
P10 / E*
RES
Internal reset signal
High impedance
I/O ports
*
The dotted line indicates that P10/ø and P10/E are input port if the corresponding DDR
bit is 0, but clock output pins if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-9 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 7)
446
Masked-ROM Versions
P10 / ø*
P10 /E*
RES
Internal reset signal
High impedance
I/O ports
*
The dotted line indicates that P10/ø and P10/E are input port if the corresponding DDR
bit is 0, but clock output pins if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-10 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 7)
447
Appendix F Timing of Entry to and Recovery from
Hardware Standby Mode
Timing of Entry to Hardware Standby Mode
(1) To preserve RAM contents, drive the RES signal line low 10 system clock cycles before the
fall of the STBY signal.
The RES signal can rise any time after STBY goes low. The minimum necessary time from
STBY low to RES high is 0 ns.
STBY
t1
t2
RES
(2) When it is not necessary to preserve RAM contents, RES need not be driven low as in (1).
Timing of Exit from Hardware Standby Mode
Drive the RES signal line low approximately 100 ns before the rise of the STBY signal.
STBY
t = 100ns
RES
449
t OSC
Appendix G Package Dimensions
Figure G-1 shows the dimensions of the CP-84 package. Figure G-2 shows the dimensions of the
CG-84 package. Figure G-3 shows the dimensions of the FP-80A package.
Figure G-1 Package Dimensions (CP-84)
Figure G-2 Package Dimensions (CG-84)
451
Figure G-3 Package Dimensions (FP-80A)
452